Page 11850
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 913
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6773
Case 2
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 10761
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable.
- If the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of
steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See:
Adjustments
Page 8375
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14332
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4607
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
Page 8043
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2552
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13568
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8310
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7556
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11472
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
- CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM
MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Page 8616
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9924
2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 4577
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3704
Mating mark (F) Yellow link Copper link
- When it is difficult to align mating marks (A) with (B) and (E) with (F) of the primary timing chain
with each sprocket, gradually turn the
camshaft to align it with the mating marks.
- During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary
timing chains.
4. Install internal chain guide.
Page 5484
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 751
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Page 5855
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 9986
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten the drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.)
increments without overtightening. Refer to
COMPONENTS. Tighten until proper rotating torque is achieved.
CAUTION: ^
Do not loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque.
^ Do not exceed specified rotating preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded
a new collapsible spacer must be installed.
^ Do not exceed maximum tightening torque. If maximum tightening torque is reached prior to
reaching the required rotating torque, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace the
collapsible spacer.
6. Check the gear oil level. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". 7. Install the remaining
components in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2368
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4731
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13080
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13172
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 14285
License Plate Lamp: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Terminals And Reference Values For BCM Part 1
Page 8348
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 639
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 4238
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5159
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13521
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 7787
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12840
11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4.
12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor.
13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order.
^ Reuse the original cover.
^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor.
^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb).
14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the
codes:
^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function,
SELF-DIAG [PAST].
15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows:
a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure
5).
b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF.
c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the
Service Manual for diagnosis and repair.
^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this
bulletin.
16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector.
Page 1113
Page 9083
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13120
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control
unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 911
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1957
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5739
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4523
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Upper Link
Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Link
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary
Page 7568
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13956
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 4729
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Service and Repair
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 12582
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 1
Page 5878
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
C200
Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection C200
Checking Differential Gear Oil
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly
or around it.
Page 12211
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 14263
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2353
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4297
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 194
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12413
Page 1307
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8707
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 16
Page 489
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 2525
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6803
Case 8
Case 9
Page 1977
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11460
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3705
- If removed, reinstall slack guide.
CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats
when bolts are tightened to specification.
- Remove stopper pin from primary timing chain tensioner.
5. Make sure again that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets and timing chain have not slipped
out of alignment. 6. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed
and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft.
Tool number : (J-48761)
7. Install front timing chain case. Refer to EM-4, Front Timing Chain Case, Installation.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack
in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
Page 4286
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2813
Locations
Page 11637
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Wheel Turning Angle
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on
stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum
inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning
angle.
Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if
the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear
- Steering column
- Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new
ones.
Page 12601
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 527
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 13631
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5547
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Combination Meters
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1125
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11441
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7414
Page 6237
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 9680
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11006
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6767
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 8)
Page 1940
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 4084
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4054
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 10876
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1310
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14119
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Page 92
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 6660
LAN-CAN-36
CAN System (Type 12)
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 2159
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14447
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 179
Page 2629
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 11298
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13761
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9692
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 2252
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are
an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to
"REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat
cushion.
Page 5102
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11013
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14455
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring
Squeak On Bumps
Classification: RA05-003
Reference: NTB05-117
Date: December 9, 2005
2005-2006 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAK NOISE FROM LEAF SPRING
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak from the rear of the leaf spring wind-up clip when:
^ going over bumps
Or
^ by compressing the rear suspension
ACTION
^ Inspect the inside of the rear leaf spring wind-up clip plastic cover for contact (rubbing) with the
leaf spring.
^ If signs of rubbing are present, apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the leaf spring and
wind-up clip plastic cover.
Page 5612
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 1865
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 375
Page 6726
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 7807
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9530
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6146
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2981
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a)
Page 3289
Camshaft: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove front timing chain case, camshaft sprocket, timing chain and rear timing
chain case.
Page 2711
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 3792
6. Disconnect MAF sensor and remove air cleaner case (upper). 7. Remove coolant reservoir hose.
8. Disconnect upper radiator hose from radiator. 9. Disconnect and remove engine cooling fan
(Motor driven type).
10. Remove upper fan shroud. 11. Remove drive belt. 12. Remove drive belt auto-tensioner. 13.
Remove chain tensioner cover. 14. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper (1). b. Depress
plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). c. Keep slack guide pressed and insert
stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in.
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
d. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary).
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- When installing timing chain tensioner (primary), push in plunger and keep it pressed in with
stopper pin.
- Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of
primary timing chain tensioner.
- After installation, pull out stopper pin.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove
the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe)
Page 11421
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8844
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7751
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10066
Model 2S1330-BJ100
REMOVAL 1. Put the transmission in neutral and release the parking brake.
2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the rear final drive companion
flange as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or
the companion flange.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive and transmission or
transfer.
INSPECTION
^ Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft
assembly. Propeller shaft runout limit
Page 6867
Case 12
Case 13
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 2491
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 1925
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER
^ Install lower cylinder block without installing main bearings, and tighten lower cylinder block bolts
to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter of main bearing housing with bore gauge. Standard: 74.993 - 75.017
mm (2.9525 - 2.9534 inch)
^ If out of the standard, replace cylinder block and lower cylinder block as assembly
NOTE: Cylinder block cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with
lower cylinder block.
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method by Calculation
^ Install main bearings to cylinder block and lower cylinder block, and tighten lower cylinder block
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter of main bearing with bore gauge.
(Bearing clearance) = (Main bearing inner diameter) - (Crankshaft main journal diameter) Standard:
0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 inch) (actual clearance) Limit: 0.065 mm (0.0026 inch)
^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, select proper main bearing according to main bearing
inner diameter and crankshaft main journal diameter to obtain specified bearing oil clearance.
Refer to "HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING".
Method of Using Plastigage ^
Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft main journal and the surfaces of each bearing
completely.
^ Cut plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction,
avoiding oil holes.
^ Install main bearings to cylinder block and lower cylinder block, and tighten lower cylinder block
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft.
^ Remove lower cylinder block and bearings, and using scale on plastigage bag, measure the
plastigage width.
NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the
"Method by Calculation".
Page 915
Page 4991
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 5908
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5540
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4832
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 14648
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7944
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5297
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative
Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative
Classification: BT05-029a
Reference: NTB05-069a
Date: July 26, 2005
2005 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER; FRONT SEAT MANUAL RECLINER INOPERATIVE
This bulletin amends NTB05-069. This version amends Step 9 to include the bolt torque
specification.
Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S):
2005 Frontier (D40), Xterra (N50), Pathfinder (R51) (Applies to Non-Fold Flat front seat ONLY)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The driver and/or passenger seat does not recline or tilt forward when lifting up on the recliner
handle.
ACTION
^ Re-align the recliner linkage which may have slipped out of position (off pin). (See Figure 1)
^ Adjust the seat cushion rear bracket to prevent the above.
IMPORTANT
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 2152
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14015
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 14413
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5565
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 13184
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6272
Page 4134
6. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor 1 (left bank) using Tool.
Tool number: (J-44626)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1.
^ Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
7. Remove three-way catalyst (left bank). 8. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as
shown.
NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal.
9. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
Page 13217
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 5665
Exhaust
Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Available Valve Lifter
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.)
6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn
crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the
specifications by referring to the specified values.
Page 7212
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
- When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General
Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link
Connector Schematic
Page 8266
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11908
Swing Torque ^
Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured
value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace the socket.
Tool number: (J-44372)
Rotating Torque
^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer
sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3
- 25 inch lbs.)
Axial End Play
^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lbs.) to the ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the
amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the
sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less
ASSEMBLY 1. Install the inner sockets.
Page 12953
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6643
LAN-CAN-19
Page 746
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Page 9778
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 939
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking
Noises
Stabilizer Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises
Classification: FA10-003A
Reference: NTB10-072A
Date: October 6, 2010
FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN
6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct
23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All
IF YOU CONFIRM
A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following
actions:
^ turning the steering wheel left or right
^ driving over speed bumps
^ driving on rough roads
^ accelerating or decelerating
AND
The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing.
ACTIONS
Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts
Information section of this bulletin.
^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and
installation instructions.
Page 8154
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6468
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9135
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 10963
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9749
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the
terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 13602
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11276
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2022
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13710
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Electrical Diagrams
EC-ASC/BS
EC-ASC/BS-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ASCBOF
Page 6537
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 14012
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 9239
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8207
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11490
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 555
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
- If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 9475
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13708
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2490
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9292
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5066
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6037
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 4513
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 3896
Page 14573
Page 9268
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 5675
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14700
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2018
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Diagram Information and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11947
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13090
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3046
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11670
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12957
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 341
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9069
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1604
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1942
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Fuel Injector: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Component Inspection
INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5 Ohms [at 10 - 60 °C (50 - 140 °F)]
Page 1279
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2853
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 5246
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10115
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged
Roof Rack Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged
Classification: BT06-026A
Reference: NTB06-093A
Date: January 5, 2010
2005 - 2010 XTERRA AND FRONTIER; ROOF RACK DECAL DAMAGE
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and the Parts Information have been
updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard the earlier version of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The "NISSAN", "FRONTIER", or "XTERRA" roof rack decal(s) need to be replaced for any reason.
ACTIONS
1. Use a heat gun to carefully remove the damaged decal.
2. Clean the side rail or air dam surface.
3. Apply a new decal listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the roof rack, rails, or air dam for damaged decals.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service\ Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Page 2897
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
Changing A/T Fluid
1. Run the engine to warm up the ATF. 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the bolt for the ATF level
gauge.
4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill
same volume with drained fluid and use the
dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^
To flush out the old fluid from the coolers pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine
idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return
line.
^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is
about the same as the color of the new fluid flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of
new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity.
Transmission fluid type: Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid J ATF Transmission fluid capacity (with
torque converter): 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt)
CAUTION: ^
Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.
^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as
the exhaust manifold.
Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
5. Check the fluid level and condition. Refer to "Checking AT Fluid". If the fluid is still dirty, repeat
steps 2 through 5. 6. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level
gauge bolt. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 8410
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 187
Relay Box: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2312
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3307
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Page 11265
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 5976
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Service and Repair
Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
CAUTION: ^
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or
interference with adjacent parts.
^ After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39
N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lbs.), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder. 2. Remove casing cap from
bracket of control device assembly and remove interlock rod from adjuster holder.
Page 5910
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7113
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Page 13926
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 2301
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds.
Page 7608
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12487
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 14638
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 379
Page 5083
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
- Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated
Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Specifications
Page 4579
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14056
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 428
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 9687
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 12972
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11959
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Page 6776
Case 5
Page 265
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2942
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 13439
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE
PROCEDURE
1. Preparation for seat removal.
^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make
sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS.
^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors:
A. Write down all radio station presets.
B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Page 1023
Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11685
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1206
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6642
LAN-CAN-18
CAN System (Type 6)
Page 5787
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11611
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 12292
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2
Page 7098
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5316
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s)
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine
Mount(s)
Classification: EM11-002
Reference: NTB11-014
Date: February 16, 2011
05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY
APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50:
Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise.
ACTION
Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information
table below
Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13841
Mirror Compass Operational Description
^ This electronic compass is able to display 8 primary directions: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW.
^ All standard compasses determine direction relative to Magnetic North; however, this electronic
compass is designed to display direction relative to True North.
^ The difference between Magnetic North and True North varies from place to place across the
surface of the earth.
^ This electronic compass must be "told" approximately where it is on the earth's surface so that
the Magnetic North reading can be properly converted into a True North display.
^ To tell the electronic compass where it's at, the earth is separated into numbered "Zone
Variances" (see zone variance). The Zone Variance number in which the compass is to function
must be entered into this electronic compass.
^ Each zone is magnetically about 4.20 wide. Typically, anything under 22.50 total zone change is
not noticed on the electronic compass display. However, over 22.50, a reading may be off by one
or more primary directions.
^ On long trips, a vehicle may leave its original zone and enter one or more new zones. Generally,
you do not need to reset the compass zone if you travel between 3 or 4 zones, such as business
travel or vacation. The typical driver will not notice any difference on the display within 3 or 4
zones. However, if the vehicle is "permanently" moved to a new location, it is recommended that
the compass zone be reset.
Compass Troubleshooting
^ The electronic compass is highly protected from changes in most magnetic fields. However,
some large changes in magnetic fields can affect it. Some examples are (but not limited to): high
tension power lines, large steel buildings, subways, steel bridges, automatic car washes, large
piles of scrap metal, etc. While this does not happen very often, it is possible.
^ During normal operation, the Compass Mirror will continuously update the compass calibration to
adjust for gradual changes in the vehicle's magnetic 'remnant" field. If the vehicle is subjected to
high magnetic influences, the compass may appear to indicate false headings, become locked, or
appear that it is unable to be calibrated. If this occurs, perform the calibration procedure.
^ If at any time the compass continually displays the incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or
locked, you need to verify the correct zone variance (see steps 1, 2 and 3 of the Compass
Calibration Procedure).
Compass Troubleshooting Chart
Mirror Compass Calibration Procedure
NOTE:
The compass calibrates itself under normal driving conditions. However, occasional circumstances
may cause the compass to operate inaccurately.
Example:
Page 4855
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11827
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8047
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4910
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13440
NOTE:
Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks.
3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each
corner (see Figure 1).
Page 8012
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9117
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8196
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11730
Page 8398
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8197
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 670
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 9789
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4301
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard
..........................................................................................................................................................
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum
...........................................................................................................................................................
961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders
....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14
psi)/300 rpm
Page 6022
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 953
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14601
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13852
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11209
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5560
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6026
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6275
Page 2391
Page 2703
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 7303
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 1204
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5966
Page 1890
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2923
Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential
Checking Differential Gear Oil
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly
or around it.
Page 14404
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 8819
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4603
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 4274
Optional Splice
Part 1
Component Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 11580
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 1147
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13676
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13808
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6694
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Work Flow
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
- CAN communication line is open. (CAN H, CAN L, or both)
- CAN communication line is shorted. (Ground, between CAN lines, or other harnesses)
- The areas related to CAN communication of unit is malfunctioning.
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
- Removal and installation of parts : When the units that perform CAN communication or the
sensors related to CAN communication are removed and installed, malfunction may be detected
(or DTC other than CAN communication may be detected).
- Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may be stopped at such time.
- Low voltage : If the voltage decreases because of battery discharge when IGN is ON, malfunction
may be detected by self-diagnosis according to the units.
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
Page 10395
Page 13801
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13994
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately.
For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER".
Page 13826
Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does
Operate) (Steps 1 - 2)
Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does
Operate) (Step 3)
Page 11327
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6699
Case 3
Page 14453
Page 9428
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2065
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13119
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 14462
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8377
Page 14711
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8265
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4447
Page 14345
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5009
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6325
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 11036
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 10488
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
Part 1
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to
"Drain and Refill".
Part 2
3. Remove union bolt and cylinder body bolts, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
Page 14275
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 801
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4726
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5935
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch
- Key switch
- Hazard switch
- Door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH)
- Back door switch
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- Back door key cylinder switch
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 11078
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
LUBRICANT
Capacity (total in system) ml (US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
............................................................................................................................................200 (6.8,
7.0)
Page 9416
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13875
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8321
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Page 12116
Part 1
Part 2
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack.
Page 4456
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 8278
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2294
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 130
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 832
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9409
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5184
Page 1707
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5909
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4420
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 8289
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 820
Page 11385
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 389
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 5377
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7460
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 10278
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4024
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4259
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 11636
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe-In
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the
vehicle straight ahead about 5 meters (16 ft.).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub
center as shown. These marks are measuring points.
4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly
ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again
from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward.
6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total
toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B".
Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)".
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length L: Refer to POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Page 9422
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3563
b. Remove oil pan (lower) using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
^ Do not insert screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
NOTE: Slide seal cutter (1) by tapping on the side (2) of the tool with hammer.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer if any object attached.
INSTALLATION (LOWER) 1. Install oil pan (lower) as follows:
a. Use scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
^ Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
^ Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and thread.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to the oil pan (lower) as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
Page 2650
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so
that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
NOTE:
- Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD".
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as
shown in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to
zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5400
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4470
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 11969
Page 7635
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Removal and Installation
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir tank. 2. Remove the engine room
cover. 3. Remove the air duct assembly. 4. Remove the serpentine drive belt from the auto
tensioner and power steering oil pump. 5. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the high pressure and low pressure piping from the power steering oil pump. Refer to
"HYDRAULIC LINE". 7. Remove the power steering oil pump bolts, then remove the power
steering pump.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "HYDRAULIC LINE" for
tightening torque. ^
After installation, bleed the air from the hydraulic circuit thoroughly. Refer to "Air Bleeding Hydraulic
System".
NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment.
Page 7518
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 10795
Page 906
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7305
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 14721
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10214
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10582
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 12669
6. Turn the ignition OFF.
7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows:
The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment.
^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from
the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON).
^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed.
^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the
sensor is completely installed.
^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing.
8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2).
9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3.
^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused.
10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover.
Page 3844
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
IVT CONTROL
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of
the intake valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and
engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the
shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in
high-speed range.
IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the
ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through
intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
Page 9353
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 4581
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 12526
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5496
Page 11005
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12070
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Diagram Information and Instructions
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5136
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 526
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 11588
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Front
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4.
Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to
the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit".
NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer.
2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake
tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill
brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 6288
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 11909
2. Install the large-diameter side of the boots to the gear housing assembly. 3. Install the
small-diameter side of the boots to the groove of the inner sockets.
4. Install the boot clamps to the boots, as shown.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps.
5. Crimp the large-diameter boot clamps, using Tool.
Tool number: KV40107300 (-)
6. Install the cylinder tubes to the gear housing assembly 7. Install the lock nuts and outer sockets
to the inner sockets.
8. Thread the outer sockets onto the inner sockets to the specified length L, then tighten the lock
nuts to the specified torque. Refer to Disassembly
and Assembly. Reconfirm that the tie-rod length L is within specification.
Page 5232
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6255
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 750
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 12255
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires
Classification: WT06-002
Reference: NTB06-076
Date: November 7, 2006
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels
SERVICE INFORMATION
The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during
wheel and tire service.
Tire Changing:
^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside
(internal jaws).
^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel.
^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or
have rubber/plastic protective covers.
Wheel Balancing:
Page 5448
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2070
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 9677
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13223
INSTALLATION
1. Install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom
rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f.
Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank
assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly.
3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset
the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7.
Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR".
Page 8229
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 14276
License Plate Lamp: Description and Operation
System Description
Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the
lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the
BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker
and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power
distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central
processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This relay, when energized,
directs power to the parking, license plate and tail lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
- to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
- to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
- through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the
BCM receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to
illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication
lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil, which when energized, directs
power
- through 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 57
- to license plate lamp terminal 1
- to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 28
- to front combination lamp LH (side marker) terminal 7
- to front combination lamp LH (parking) terminal 4, and
- through IPDM E/R terminal 49
- to front combination lamp RH (side marker) terminal 7
- to front combination lamp RH (parking) terminal 4.
Ground is supplied
- to front combination lamp LH and RH (side marker) terminal 8
- to front combination lamp LH and RH (parking) terminal 5
- to license plate lamp terminal 2
- through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
- to rear combination lamp LH terminal 1 through ground B85, and
- to rear combination lamp RH terminal 1
- through ground B160.
With power and ground supplied, the parking, side marker, license plate and tail lamps illuminate.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION".
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position, and the ignition
switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Page 9014
Page 594
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Page 12502
16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no
refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to
"Operational Check".
Page 2015
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 1969
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13215
3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until
the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle
and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the
glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped,
disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly.
9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
Page 3711
13. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 14. Remove rocker
covers (right and left banks).
NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed.
15. Obtain No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke as follows:
NOTE: When timing chain is not removed/installed, this step is not required.
a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
b. Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank)
are located as shown.
^ If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown.
NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed.
To make sure that No. 1 cylinder is at its compression TDC, remove front timing chain case first.
Then check mating marks on camshaft sprockets. Refer to "INSTALLATION".
16. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove starter motor and set Tool.
Tool number KV10117700 (J-44716)
Page 5694
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2333
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9317
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 14443
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 748
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 8127
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8438
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Front
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin
bolt. 3. Suspend cylinder body with a wire and remove pad and shim from torque member.
INSTALLATION 1. Push piston into cylinder body
NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes pushing in the piston easier.
Page 5314
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10122
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4525
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 9729
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12219
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 7063
EC-O2H2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B1
Page 5478
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 6156
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3014
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1536
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 11993
Page 7452
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 1788
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8387
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9651
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1838
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7482
Page 14025
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 813
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9012
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14737
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12272
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT".
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly.
^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play
Page 2008
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Front
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Front
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign
materials are stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and
cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
Page 9177
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11619
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Page 14736
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1314
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 782
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13557
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 4063
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11259
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 2638
Page 10634
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
Part 1
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to
"Drain and Refill".
Part 2
3. Remove union bolt and cylinder body bolts, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 6934
Case 7
Page 1036
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12500
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the leak detector
properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance.
1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown.
2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown.
3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second
as shown.
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop
chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low
air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports.
Refer to "Precautions for Service Equipment". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least
345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 °C (61 °F). If less than specification,
Page 3775
a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal.
- When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not
circumference).
b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt in two steps.
Step 1 : 44.1 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
c. Remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-48761)
9. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly.
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack
in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
Timing Chain
Page 2474
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Page 8045
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1794
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2347
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4423
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 13088
Page 7314
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 11092
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 3293
^ Measure the following parts if out of the limit. -
Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 inch)
- Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing Standard: 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 1.0781 inch)
^ Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of
camshaft.
CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a
different diameter from the other three locations.
2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^
If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Valve Lifter Clearance VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER
Page 10194
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5378
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 9508
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 7805
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 12639
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air
bag connectors.
4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure
2.
^ The seat does not need to be removed.
^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit.
CAUTION:
Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes.
Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that
are under the seat.
Page 9753
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 13134
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to
check CONSULT II data link connector
(DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link Connector/Data Link Connector
Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 5116
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7185
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5523
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 11363
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8435
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1919
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11076
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 10095
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2236
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 8320
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 931
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11606
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 6779
Case 8
Page 12404
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13898
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately.
For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER".
Page 13081
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5053
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5251
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2137
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13010
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8135
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4857
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10191
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8137
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 12956
Page 1988
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 7902
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9113
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8598
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10323
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4365
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3
Page 12251
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 1372
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 653
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 6858
Case 2
Page 8168
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2287
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10600
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 9107
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5134
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9132
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12971
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6489
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14725
Page 12999
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14625
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1844
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10945
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14597
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 3834
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6353
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 7560
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7373
Page 13905
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 2478
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3946
Exhaust
Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Available Valve Lifter
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.)
6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn
crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the
specifications by referring to the specified values.
Page 137
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8966
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 648
Page 10272
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4970
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2743
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC
3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86,
"ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments
Page 11226
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11341
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5118
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5323
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Service and Repair
Tie Rod: Service and Repair
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary.
Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as
an assembly if necessary.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket Swing Torque
^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the
measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace
the socket. Tool number: (J-44372)
Rotating Torque
^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer
sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3
- 25 inch lbs.)
Axial End Play
^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lbs.) to the ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the
amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the
sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less
Page 11448
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6349
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 14650
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14514
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9265
Optional Splice
Part 1
Service Limits & General Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications
CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER
^ Install connecting rod bearing cap without installing connecting rod bearing, and tightening
connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod big end with inside micrometer. Standard: 57.000 57.013 mm (2.2441 - 2.2446 inch)
^ If out of the standard, replace connecting rod assembly.
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE
Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter
Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bushing with inside micrometer. Standard: 22.000 22.012 mm (0.8661 - 0.8666 inch)
Piston Pin Outer Diameter
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin with micrometer. Standard: 21.989 - 22.001 mm (0.8657 0.8662 inch)
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Connecting rod bushing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod
bushing inner diameter) - (Piston pin outer diameter) Standard: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007
inch) Limit: 0.030 mm (0.0012 inch) ^
If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston
pin assembly.
^ If replacing piston and piston pin assembly, refer to "HOW TO SELECT PISTON".
Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Component Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 13576
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8956
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 4745
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 6487
Page 14645
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9464
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4983
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8649
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6108
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7852
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6432
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 14257
Page 2459
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Page 9075
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6946
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 11925
Upper: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (0.05 - 0.49 kg-m, 5 - 43 inch lbs.) Lower: 0.5 - 6.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 5 56 inch lbs.)
VERTICAL END PLAY Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play C: 0 mm (0 inch)
Page 918
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 253
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4445
Page 13004
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 11492
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14393
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12387
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6145
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 10282
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11948
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1554
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6576
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13512
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 10263
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 116
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Page 1550
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6359
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 9790
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6072
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6055
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6431
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 7237
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 1176
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8564
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC
Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS
Wheel bearing axial end play...............................................................................................................
................................................................ 0 mm (0 in)
Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft.
lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39
(3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29)
Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 45° - 60°
Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg,
lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4)
With used grease seal N (kg,
lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3)
Page 9179
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1415
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5042
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2443
Repair Flow Chart
Page 7019
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 14797
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2084
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 829
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11025
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1914
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6191
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9242
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13123
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch
- Key switch
- Hazard switch
- Door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH)
- Back door switch
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- Back door key cylinder switch
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 10768
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation (C200), or "Removal and
Installation" (M226).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 1781
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4975
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions.
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Page 6729
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Check Sheet Part 1
Description and Operation
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM
uses this signal for engine control.
Page 4946
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12948
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5364
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9649
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3136
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 7437
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 10248
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7486
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3172
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance)
Components
Page 4601
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 3401
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 13638
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9164
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11075
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10500
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Front Brakes
1. Replace the front brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit.
^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit).
^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service
information.
IMPORTANT:
Page 6375
Page 14055
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4182
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 13467
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the seat back trim.
2. Locate the recliner shaft and side link pins on the back of the seat.
3. Confirm the recliner shaft link slot and pin (inner and/or outer side) are misaligned.
Page 4514
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 30
Page 2694
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 1775
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6416
Page 9067
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8654
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14466
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3708
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). Refer to EM-9, Timing Chain.
2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with
suitable tool as shown.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown
- Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary
timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt.
Tool number : (J-50246)
2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7896
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13942
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 5965
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6104
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8374
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8113
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9140
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5235
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13043
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 14770
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2577
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4916
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7882
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
With reservoir ......................................................................................................................................
.......................... 2 3/4 gal. (2 1/4 Imp gal, 10.2 L)
Page 11188
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 10349
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10302
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 11824
Page 7764
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 12403
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8795
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 2052
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14707
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7383
Page 13138
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration".
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER
INSTRUMENT PANEL LH".
3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration".
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System - NATS)
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 8730
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 8078
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6321
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 1202
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11164
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8720
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 11009
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13787
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Cowl Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9912
Location of Electrical Parts
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1832
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Front
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Front
ADJUSTMENT
INSTALLATION
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF"
(auto stop). 2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to
clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before tightening nut. 3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper
switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF". 4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within
clearance "L1" and "L2".
Clearance "L1": 24.5 - 39.5 mm (0.965 - 1.555 in) Clearance "L2": 23.5 - 38.5 mm (0.925 - 1.516
in)
- Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of
wiper arm looseness.
- Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper arm nuts: 23.6 Nm 2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb
Page 1459
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6886
Case 8
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4767
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3826
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 11718
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5969
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4670
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 8284
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2970
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING: ^
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Warm up engine, put vehicle on flat and level surface then check for engine oil leakage from
engine components. Refer to "ENGINE OIL
LEAKAGE".
2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Loosen oil filler cap and then remove drain plug. 4. Drain
engine oil. 5. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER".
CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
6. Refill with new engine oil.
Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
Engine oil capacity (Approximate)
CAUTION: ^
When filling engine oil, do not pull out oil level gauge.
^ The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
^ Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine.
7. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 8. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes. 9. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL".
Page 486
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 9802
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12254
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 8630
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 13110
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 12537
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8955
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2828
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11299
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7998
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 11435
Page 1595
Testing and Inspection
Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to "CLUTCH PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4829
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 815
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7920
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 11201
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 615
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10622
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 10623
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 7453
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 8941
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
ABS
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 7957
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11280
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 3672
Page EM-13
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Page 11273
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 14250
Page 4685
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7085
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1426
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10445
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation" (C200), or "Removal and
Installation" (M226).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 2925
Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 With Electronic Lock Differential
Checking Differential Gear Oil
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly
or around it.
Page 11661
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7188
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12750
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 941
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 11079
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5013
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9834
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 1937
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4252
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
Page 787
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7092
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2664
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 13083
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 13609
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder
2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles
originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The
District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in
the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS)
housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens,
the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator.
CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front
air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will
receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the
warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining
the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1319
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 995
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 11676
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6691
NOTE: There is a case that some of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" and "SELF-DIAG RESULTS"
are not needed for diagnosis. In the case, "UNKWN" and "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" in
"Check sheet results (example)" change to "-". Then, ignore check marks on the check sheet table.
4. Perform system diagnosis for possible causes identified. 5. Perform diagnosis again after
inspection and repair. Make sure that repair is completely performed, and then end the procedure.
Start CAN system trouble diagnosis if this procedure can be confirmed. Refer to "CAN
Communication Unit".
Page 11014
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14262
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4501
Page 1928
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5075
EC-O2H2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B2
Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Page 7577
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 843
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Locations
Page 9983
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Locking Differential
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove the brake calipers and rotors. Refer to
"Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
Page 2156
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3768
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft
pulley.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to
protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it.
19. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown.
Page 819
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6504
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 72
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown.
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in
series under middle speed condition.
Page 1792
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7559
Page 6258
Page 9722
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7232
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6561
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Replaced
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
Page 10181
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 6629
LAN-CAN-05
Page 10948
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5322
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9423
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5522
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 10422
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
On-Vehicle Service
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II.
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
G Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE".
Page 2579
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 3660
Page EM-1
Page 2932
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Lock Differential
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
Page 7820
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 1612
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14755
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1119
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8480
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Description and Operation
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM
uses this signal for engine control.
Page 8984
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 14166
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is
depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
Page 14874
Windshield: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove inside mirror. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). 3. Remove cowl top cover.
4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
- If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
- Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
- Install parts removed.
Page 14543
Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
Removal
The vanity mirror lamp is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14029
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 1500
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11553
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 7713
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9646
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 359
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 9228
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3489
Page 4797
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 3689
6. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown.
Front oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
7. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows:
a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to
intake valve timing control covers as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Tool number : WS39930000
c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being
careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain
case with the holes to install intake valve
timing control covers.
e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
8. Install crankshaft pulley as follows:
Page 143
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8424
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11890
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 2307
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11817
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12390
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8429
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5902
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 2414
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs
to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch.
Caution:
Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the
highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this.
Page 4279
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1508
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4957
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2983
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the leak detector
properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance.
1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown.
2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown.
3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second
as shown.
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop
chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low
air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports.
Refer to "Precautions for Service Equipment". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least
345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 °C (61 °F). If less than specification,
Page 5206
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1010
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 338
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14251
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 5276
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 541
Page 6464
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 10468
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube.
CAUTION: ^
Do not disassemble the brake pedal assembly.
^ Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
^ Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
1. Remove the lower driver instrument panel. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 2.
Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch from the pedal assembly. 3. Remove snap pin and
clevis pin from the clevis of the brake booster. 4. Remove the pedal assembly.
^ Temporarily install the nuts by hand to support the booster.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Page 5577
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 6943
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
TCM Circuit Inspection
Page 14689
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2695
Service and Repair
Carpet: Service and Repair
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Front Carpet
1. Remove front seats. Refer to "FRONT SEAT". 2. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to
"SEAT BELTS". 3. Remove lower body side trim panels. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 4. Remove
center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". 5. Remove floor mat hook from front carpet. 6.
Remove front carpet.
Rear Carpet
1. Remove luggage side lower finisher LH/RH. 2. Remove back door kick plate. 3. Remove cargo
floor rails, luggage floor cover and storage tray. 4. Remove the rear seats. Refer to "REAR SEAT".
5. Remove the rear carpet.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11509
Relay Box: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8401
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9412
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1120
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2892
Disclaimer
Page 8884
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2295
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 6396
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 5039
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8114
Page 5581
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13795
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1303
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 3514
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 11495
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13711
EC-ASCBOF-01
Page 14654
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3633
Page EM-6
Page 6623
CAN System (Type 11) Schematic
Page 8938
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6902
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 624
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6692
Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced
1. See "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of all units attached to the check sheet. If "CAN COMM CIRCUIT",
"CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" or "CAN
COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]" is displayed, put a check mark to the applicable column of
self-diagnostic results of the check sheet table.
NOTE: For "ENGINE", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]" are displayed. Put a check mark to it.
- For "A/T", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
- For "BCM", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
- For "METER", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
- For "ALL MODE AWD/4WD", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to
it.
- For "ABS", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
- For "IPDM E/R", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
Page 13771
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 17 and 18 with pushing
each switch.
Locations
Page 7502
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 8498
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8276
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4549
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 6540
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 6921
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 7099
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14566
Page 6835
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 9394
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9776
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11501
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5105
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10602
Brake Drum: Specifications
REAR DRUM BRAKE
BRAKES / GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 14405
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 5487
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2492
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5399
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 12600
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13113
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2912
Fluids and Lubricants Oil" capacity. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
2. After refilling the oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to the filler plug, then install it to the
transmission.
Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Service and Repair
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair
Foam Repair
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations
around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on
vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures.
FILL PROCEDURES
1. Fill procedures after installation of service part.
- Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Install service part.
- Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the
service part.
2. Fill procedures before installation of service part.
- Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area.
- Install service part.
NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times.
Page 12955
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6196
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12529
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2951
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 7479
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13505
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 10068
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Journal
1. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft and flange yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke.
2. Remove the snap rings.
3. Push out and remove the journal bearings by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer,
taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke
hole.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
4. Push out and remove the remaining journal bearings at the opposite side by lightly tapping the
flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to
damage the journal or flange yoke hole.
Page 6721
Case 9
Case 10
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 11451
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9081
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6111
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7434
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8921
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11180
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 1552
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13785
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5375
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4016
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 1273
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
For details, refer to "SPIRAL CABLE".
Page 12137
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
C200
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/C200
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
M226
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/M226
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 11137
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13864
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7499
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Preliminary Check
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 6414
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 14246
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13087
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5532
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9439
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 2656
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 2786
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 14769
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations
Page 622
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1593
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6336
VDC/TCS/ABS
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 6600
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4584
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 5137
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6969
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11378
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8974
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 14014
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 13790
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7234
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3905
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 10209
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10388
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 13234
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13677
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1315
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5463
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3793
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). Refer to EM-9, Timing Chain.
2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with
suitable tool as shown.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown
- Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary
timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt.
Tool number : (J-50246)
2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3761
24. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner
cover and intake valve timing control covers.
INSTALLATION
1. Hammer dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in
order to shorten protrusion length.
2. Install new front oil seal on the front timing chain case.
^ Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip.
^ Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
^ Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift
[outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 inch)].
^ Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted.
Page 14828
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7863
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions.
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Page 7454
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 1499
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3038
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 11401
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 1723
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
- Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated
Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Page 6511
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Page 9240
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9185
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10182
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the
differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 2041
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5011
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12378
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6478
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8548
Page 9022
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13633
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Page 168
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 6852
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 471
Attachment General Procedure
Page 1361
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4146
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated/missing band clamp(s).
^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed.
Page 6938
Case 11
Page 11673
Page 13527
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Testing and Inspection
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 7981
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6836
Case 1
Page 8079
Page 141
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1024
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3242
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8754
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so
that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
NOTE:
- Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD".
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as
shown in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to
zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
Page 4368
Page 10901
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13882
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4888
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5916
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12492
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to "Discharging Refrigerant". 2. Drain the
coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". 3. Disconnect
the battery negative and positive terminals.
Page 5396
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11534
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 8588
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3060
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
- When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
- When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
Page 9007
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2699
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition
switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5
seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
Page 1040
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6096
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4467
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 11397
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Page 269
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 1214
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6569
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4878
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Page 940
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5603
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 6883
Case 5
Page 14749
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 640
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 5663
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC
3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86,
"ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity ..........................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 0.70 kg
(1.54 lb)
Page 9830
Valve Body: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Page 5141
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2098
Page 638
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Page 5552
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8183
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6674
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 6/TYPE 7
Page 6112
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8204
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1975
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5236
Page 2308
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 234
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 8912
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 8129
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1128
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5489
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 142
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Specifications
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 8227
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6722
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Page 2158
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 10.3L (10 7/8 qt. US, 9 1/8 qt. Imp)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12622
Part 2
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
For Side Collision
Check the SRS components using the given table.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION
1. Replace the following components:
- Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
- Diagnosis sensor unit
- (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table.
- Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents,
cracks, deformation).
3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS
Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire
SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION
1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table.
- If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS
Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire
SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
Part 1
Page 10574
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 8675
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1572
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 5014
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14564
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8716
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8573
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 1338
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 5838
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9454
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 583
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 4265
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or
change setting value for each item according to the
configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration
items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the
CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be
manually set or changed.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting
vehicle model cannot be memorized.
Page 476
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 2543
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 959
Page 6319
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 7735
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5397
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7102
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1099
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C
evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1807
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 14838
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 7774
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 833
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12764
Page 9024
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5579
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 9275
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7509
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 7190
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4424
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 13656
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13419
11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel
or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9.
12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative
cable last), and reset the radio stations.
Disclaimer
Page 12513
8. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this
lubricant to "new" compressor through the
suction port opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
lubricant at this time.
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor.
Page 9503
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 2855
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove oil filter access in undercover.
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION: ^
Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN Oil Filter or equivalent.
^ Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.
^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to drive belts.
^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.
INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of new oil filter.
3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or
tighten to specification.
Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.)
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL
LEVEL". 2. Start engine, and check there are no leaks of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10
minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL".
Page 2684
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 908
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 247
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14077
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6584
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3819
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6856
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 404
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 9061
Page 8167
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5794
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9721
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8200
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11149
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 315
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1883
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6854
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 3758
13. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 14. Remove rocker
covers (right and left banks).
NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed.
15. Obtain No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke as follows:
NOTE: When timing chain is not removed/installed, this step is not required.
a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
b. Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank)
are located as shown.
If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown.
NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed.
To make sure that No. 1 cylinder is at its compression TDC, remove front timing chain case first.
Then check mating marks on camshaft sprockets. Refer to "INSTALLATION".
16. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove starter motor and set Tool.
Tool number KV10117700 (J-44716)
Page 4820
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4593
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 14684
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 3774
6. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown.
Front oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
7. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows:
a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to
intake valve timing control covers as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Tool number : WS39930000
c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being
careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain
case with the holes to install intake valve
timing control covers.
e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
8. Install crankshaft pulley as follows:
Page 8261
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13358
3. Disconnect the 2 actuator connectors. (Power mirror only)
^ Connectors are gray and black and are labeled on the actuator.
4. Install the new actuator in the reverse order of removal.
5. Install the mirror
A. At the top of the mirror, insert the holder slides (hooks) into the grooved cutouts in the actuator.
NOTE:
If it is a heated mirror, make sure to connect the 2 electric terminals to glass.
B. Then fold the glass DOWN against the actuator.
Page 6859
Case 3
Page 2597
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 1018
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5799
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 14329
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 4325
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 7993
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 897
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II.
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 1911
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6864
Case 8
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 13593
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2328
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14362
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 667
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 1744
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14780
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 886
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation" (C200), or "Removal and
Installation" (M226).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 1906
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1918
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1506
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 459
Page 4426
Page 9702
2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models). 3. Install rear propeller shaft. 4. Check the A/T
fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to "Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 5475
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 470
Page 1186
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14450
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11095
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 10403
Page 1405
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10257
Page 13607
EC-ASCBOF-01
Page 11382
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9843
shown. First step: 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Final step: 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 19 ft. lbs.) Tool
number: ST20630000 (J-26366)
3. Install the manual transmission. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD
models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle
(For 4WD models)".
Page 2428
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 4595
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 1804
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8400
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1559
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3892
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 1786
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1364
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2061
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13513
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 8836
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8595
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Balancing Wheels
Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels
Balancing Wheels
REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
CAN System (Type 1)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2140
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5308
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 14703
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6481
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 9241
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Engine Compartment Electrical Units
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1714
EC-AF1HB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B1
Diagnostic Aids
Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3210
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Page 403
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 5991
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13760
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9862
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY ^
Remove the dust cover, push rod and piston assembly from the cylinder body.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Inspect for the following, replace parts as necessary. ^
Damage, foreign material, wear, corrosion, and pinholes on the cylinder inner surface, piston, and
sliding part of piston cup
^ Weak spring
^ Cracked or deformed dust cover
ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber lubricant to the cylinder body inner surface and rubber grease to the
piston cup and piston. 2. Insert the piston assembly and piston spring into the cylinder body. 3.
Apply rubber grease to the dust cover and install the push rod and dust cover.
Page 221
Page 595
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5337
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5366
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9392
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6508
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Page 7650
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4260
2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT
WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed
and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List
Page 7799
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1263
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9111
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7562
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9131
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 9961
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
Page 14757
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14342
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1496
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5725
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10478
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 8064
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9052
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 502
Page 8361
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 2014
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9724
Page 12259
Wheels: Service and Repair
Balancing Wheels
REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
Page 12071
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Locations
Page 3639
Page EM-12
Page 6907
Case 5
Page 6711
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Page 8046
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9408
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9985
CAUTION: Do not damage axle housing.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the new oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of the
new oil seal. Install the new front oil seal into the
axle housing using Tool. Tool number: ST15310000
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ Do not incline oil seal when installing.
^ Apply multi-purpose grease onto oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of oil seal.
2. Align the matching mark of the drive pinion with the matching mark B of the companion flange,
then install the companion flange.
3. Install the new washer (if required), and new drive pinion nut. Tighten the nut until there is zero
bearing end play using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer.
4. Rotate the drive pinion using Tool. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in
step 4 above during removal plus an additional 0.56
Nm (5 inch lbs.).
Page 9806
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14607
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2815
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 6795
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 3044
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4735
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13802
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 296
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 852
Door Switch Check (Step 4)
Page 13820
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the driver seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch
LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
Ground is supplied
- to combination meter terminal 24
- through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1.
Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19.
The combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN
communication line.
BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN
communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal to the combination meter via CAN
communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds
the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 5754
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 121
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 5163
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14217
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 9635
Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
CAUTION: ^
When installing an air breather hose, do not to crush or block by folding or bending the hose.
^ When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend portion.
Page 318
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12825
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Connect C-III to the vehicle.
3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs.
a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode.
b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function.
^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform
repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure.
^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this
bulletin.
NOTE:
All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with
this procedure.
4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds.
Page 6110
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 5405
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9219
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10848
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7743
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11178
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be
performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch
Check
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps
cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates.
1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4.
Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor
(magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 11205
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1349
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9509
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Page 5292
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13580
Page 4298
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7878
Page 2013
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9405
Optional Splice
Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14465
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10891
Page 6572
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10509
2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in
Figures 1 and 2.
^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer.
3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order.
Page 10381
Page 12959
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
- Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Page 8887
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13762
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10988
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 274
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6441
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 2767
Page 1683
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12970
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4156
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated/missing band clamp(s).
^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed.
Page 14717
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9127
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7763
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6032
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11988
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Page 8901
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4521
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 9267
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2588
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 7804
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7329
Disclaimer
Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Side Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Classification: RS05-006
Reference: NTB06-046
Date: June 13, 2006
2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN
CIRCUIT (DTC B1134)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit,
and
The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or
partially,
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not
disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
ACTION
Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in
the Parts Information.
IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be
performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1762
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 6730
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 6747
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 14069
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1826
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8033
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Service and Repair
Shift Linkage: Service and Repair
SHIFT CONTROL
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL 1. Remove the shift knob. 2. Remove the M/T finisher. Refer to "M/T FINISHER". 3.
Remove the retaining plate and dust boot covers. 4. Remove the clip (B) and then separate the
boot from the control housing. 5. Remove the guide plate bolts and then separate the guide plate.
6. Remove the shift lever assembly and spring from the transmission.
INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Apply multi-purpose grease to the socket and bushing.
^ Do not reuse clip.
^ Apply cement to threads of the shift lever assembly.
^ Tighten guide plate bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 8729
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 2509
11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 7790
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14059
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9318
Optional Splice
Part 1
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 4080
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5058
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14777
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5331
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Page 11769
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing and deterioration.
1. Run the engine until the fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in the reservoir
tank. Keep engine speed idle.
CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank
frequently and add fluid as needed.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the right and left several times. 3. Hold the steering wheel at each
locked position for five seconds to check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is
the possibility that the oil pump may be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at a connection is noticed, loosen the connection and then retighten. Do not
over-tighten connector as this can damage O-ring,
washer and connector. Refer to "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" and "HYDRAULIC LINE".
5. If fluid leakage from the oil pump is noticed, check the oil pump. Refer to "POWER STEERING
OIL PUMP". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid, indicating a leak from the
steering gear.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers.
Page 14058
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6151
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Page 7258
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6350
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 13592
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 13697
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 295
ITEMS OF EACH PART
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 6830
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 1671
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3779
c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets.
- Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side.
- Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 in)-thick metal or resin plate between timing chain and timing chain
tensioner plunger (guide). Remove timing chain
(secondary) together with camshaft sprockets with timing chain loose from guide groove.
CAUTION: Be careful of plunger coming off when removing timing chain (secondary).
NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain
(primary) and for timing chain (secondary).
Page 8745
b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
^ Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
^ Insert fuel injector so that protrusion "B" of fuel tube matches cutout "B" of clip.
^ Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip.
c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off.
^ Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
4. Connect fuel tube (RH) to fuel tube (LH), and tighten bolts temporarily.
^ Tighten bolts with the specified torque after installing fuel tube and fuel injector assembly.
CAUTION: ^
Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it.
5. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
^ Tighten bolts in two steps in numerical order as shown. Fuel injector tube assembly bolts 1st
step: 10.1 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 7 ft. lbs.) 2nd step: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.)
6. Tighten bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH) with the specified torque. 7.
Connect fuel injector harness connector. 8. Install intake manifold collector. Refer to
"INSTALLATION". 9. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check on Fuel Leakage 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" (with
engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection
points.
NOTE: Use mirrors for checking at points out of clear sight.
2. Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopped, as engine becomes extremely hot.
Page 14583
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12380
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2149
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11015
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10283
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 12018
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13758
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3691
1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket
(EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8.
Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft
sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other
sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt
threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft
pulley.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or
install the timing chain(s).
REMOVAL
Page 3857
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 6825
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6200
Page 5994
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 4813
Page 3204
Towing Information: Service and Repair
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
- It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
- Always attach safety chains before towing.
- When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in good order.
If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
- Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
2WD MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and
move the transmission selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to OFF position
and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never
place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock
mechanism.
Page 14516
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3671
Page EM-12
Page 2494
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13314
NOTE: Use an assistant to steady the headlining while lowering from roof. -
Remove clips from center of headlining.
- Remove clips from rear of headlining.
- Disconnect rear washer tube at front connection, allow to drain.
- Disconnect harnesses and rear washer tube rear connections.
- Thread seat belt escutcheon through cutout in headlining.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11847
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7690
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10099
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14741
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 11104
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 11141
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 5070
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4702
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Page 9217
Page 6633
LAN-CAN-09
CAN System (Type 3)
Page 6636
LAN-CAN-12
CAN System (Type 4)
Page 2770
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 14641
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2275
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7191
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 2072
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9395
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4305
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7313
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 5106
Page 5126
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Page 14773
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13770
Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads
voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC
SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Page 6187
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8281
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6075
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6206
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 10331
Page 6213
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5584
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 6802
Case 7
Page 817
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11538
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 2578
Page 13163
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 2380
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7086
Page 2322
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10686
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Lines
Removal and Installation
Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. 2. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose. 3.
Remove check valve from brake booster.
4. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Insert vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 inch).
^ Do not use lubricating oil during assembly.
Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection
Page 4218
Page 13735
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7377
Page 1325
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10250
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14742
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5806
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5406
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5067
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 264
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13189
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Components
Page 10364
11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 3908
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 2657
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 2792
Drive Belt: Adjustments
DRIVE BELT TENSION
There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted
by the drive belt auto-tensioner.
Page 6517
Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional Diagrams
Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC
Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ECM/PW
EC-ECM/PW-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 10427
Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle
at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator
lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1177
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Page 3470
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Page 8022
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9379
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13558
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 12401
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5152
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 920
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10216
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission Gear Oil
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 4 1/4 qt (3.98L)
Page 4076
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Page 377
Page 10739
Repair Flow Chart
Page 10034
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 2091
Page 10687
Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve
specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inch Hg) for 15 seconds
under a vacuum of - 66.7 kPa (- 500 mmHg, - 19.69 inch Hg)
Page 1483
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2473
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11531
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 8725
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7459
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6541
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 11684
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7664
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7855
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3893
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 12610
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 14813
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13825
Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Strategies
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function
description. Refer to "System Description". 3. Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-45,
"Preliminary Check". See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 4. Check symptom and repair
or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If
not, go to 3. 6. Inspection End.
All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate
Page 6494
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Specifications
Page 5355
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7672
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8821
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4254
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to INFORMATION BUS".
Page 6605
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3712
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface as 10 mm (0.39 inch) from its
original position.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place
protect removed crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it.
17. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown. 18. Remove front timing
chain case as follows:
a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off
case by moving tool as shown (2). ^
Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Do not use screwdriver or something similar.
^ After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a
load.
Page 11067
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6058
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9870
3. Adjust clearance "C" while depressing clutch pedal fully. (With clutch interlock switch)
Clearance C: 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 inch)
4. Check clutch hydraulic and system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch operating
cylinder, clutch withdrawal lever and clutch release
bearing) for sticking or binding. a. If any sticking or binding noted, repair or replace related parts as
necessary. b. If hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to
"Bleeding".
NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a
vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all the air from the system.
Page 7134
Page 12717
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 14386
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5342
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 6285
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 5253
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 14669
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1649
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13944
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 6276
Page 4694
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the
partition glass.
5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and
screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
- Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm
(0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
Rear Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch.
4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Page 13687
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13378
Page 6440
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 11182
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Page 10872
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 6719
Case 6
Page 12236
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 12234
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 9227
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7654
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12790
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 7256
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13705
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12398
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 400
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 9833
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 14609
Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6344
Attachment General Procedure
Page 4691
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13095
Page 12480
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 5550
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1158
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 4592
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13788
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6997
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 3147
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 5797
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8053
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3444
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 1567
Page 6799
Case 4
Page 4744
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 12715
5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled.
^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place.
6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector
holder as shown in Figure 4.
^ Remove and discard the old connector holder.
^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it).
7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4.
^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first.
9. Re-set the radio station presets.
Page 11386
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13591
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9016
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14783
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8070
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14722
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14627
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13451
4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied.
Torque screws to:
Page 8169
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12875
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 1250
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4150
WARNING:
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 5139
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 10446
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s).
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly
Page 12043
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt
it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the
coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed.
Page 841
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 11778
10. Install new bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION) into the holes from the backside (see Figure 7).
11. Install the new oil cooler, placing the existing and added brackets onto their studs and bolts.
12. Install and then torque the nuts on the existing studs.
13. Install and then torque the new nuts on the bolts.
^ Nuts torque: 6.5 Nm (0.66 kg-m, 57.5 in lb)
^ Hold the bolts with a wrench while torquing the nuts.
14. Install the power steering hoses to both ends of the oil cooler.
^ Make sure to leave the upper bracket in place (see Figure 1).
15. Complete installation of the oil cooler.
16. Air bleed the power steering system as needed.
^ Refer to the G>STEERING section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 8370
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 215
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 2779
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Page 13015
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 235
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 6219
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 516
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 12654
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8614
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8882
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12987
Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation
System Description
Power is supplied at all times
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
- through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
- through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and
- to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to IPDM E/R terminal 61
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and
- through 30 A fusible link (letter m, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and
- through 30 A fusible link (letter h, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and
- to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T).
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67 and
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
- to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2
- to trailer connector terminal 2 and
- to backup lamp relay terminal 1 (with M/T)
- through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION
The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1.
With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto
light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied from the tail lamp relay
- through 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 29
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1.
When energized, trailer tow relay 1 tail lamp power is supplied
- through trailer tow relay 1 terminal 5
- to trailer connector terminal 4.
TRAILER STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
The trailer stop, turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM. If either turn signal or the
hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them flash. If
the BCM receives stop lamp switch signal, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make
them illuminate.
Left stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- to trailer connector terminal 3
- through BCM terminal 52.
Right stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- to trailer connector terminal 6
- through BCM terminal 51.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1650
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5580
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 10995
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4454
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 8536
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 7674
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13682
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8717
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 5271
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6866
Case 10
Case 11
Page 7975
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7252
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10805
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10212
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2229
6. Turn the ignition OFF.
7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows:
The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment.
^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from
the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON).
^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed.
^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the
sensor is completely installed.
^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing.
8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2).
9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3.
^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused.
10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover.
Page 7659
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3694
c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets.
- Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side.
- Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 in)-thick metal or resin plate between timing chain and timing chain
tensioner plunger (guide). Remove timing chain
(secondary) together with camshaft sprockets with timing chain loose from guide groove.
CAUTION: Be careful of plunger coming off when removing timing chain (secondary).
NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain
(primary) and for timing chain (secondary).
Page 7950
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1141
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately.
For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER".
Page 10931
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11360
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5722
Optional Splice
Part 1
LAN System Component Parts
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13016
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4650
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.
- It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is
malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance............................................................................................................................................
....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Page 11383
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3829
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6781
Case 10
Case 11
Page 10389
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5861
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 1306
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 12653
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 6846
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 14535
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)
Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock
it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12399
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8563
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 2556
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11210
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14340
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14899
Page 11073
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1467
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14876
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully
Page 2483
Page 7924
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9029
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6333
Page 9243
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4494
Page 13635
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9440
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3343
^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder
inner wall, hone or re-bore the inner wall.
^ Oversize piston is provided. When using oversize piston, rebore cylinder so that the clearance of
the piston-to-cylinder bore satisfies the standard.
CAUTION: When using oversize piston, use oversize pistons for all cylinders with oversize piston
rings.
Oversize(OS): 0.2 mm (0.008 inch)
Piston Skirt Diameter
Measure the outer diameter of piston skirt with micrometer. Measure point: Distance from the top
43.03 mm (1.6941 inch) Standard: 95.480 - 95.510 mm (3.7590 - 3.7602 inch)
Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance Calculate by piston skirt diameter and cylinder bore inner
diameter (direction "X", position "B"). (Clearance) = (Cylinder bore inner diameter) - (Piston skirt
diameter). Standard: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 inch) Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 inch) If the
calculated value exceeds the limit, replace piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to "HOW TO
SELECT PISTON".
Re-boring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston to cylinder bore
clearance to piston skirt diameter.
Re-bored size calculation: D = A + B - C where, D: Bored diameter A: Piston skirt diameter as
measured B: Piston to cylinder bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm
(0.0008 inch)
2. Install lower cylinder block, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be
distorted in final assembly. 3. Cut cylinder bores.
NOTE: ^
When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
^ Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) or so in
diameter at a time.
4. Hone cylinders to obtain the specified piston to cylinder bore clearance. 5. Measure finished the
cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.
NOTE: Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN
Page 6912
Case 10
Page 14666
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3835
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1414
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3947
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the
engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.
Locations
Page 1037
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6873
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 1646
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-004D
Reference: NTB05-099D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 197
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12376
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1522
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7506
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Page 271
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14395
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12361
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the compressor. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Compressor".
2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown.
Tool number: J-44614
3. Remove the clutch disc.
4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool.
Page 5363
Page 13392
Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal.
1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C).
2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure
1).
^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it.
3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2).
Damaged Decal Removal:
4. Remove the damaged decal as follows:
Page 1222
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. 3. If
NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 2 again.
Page 331
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9581
Page 4823
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8445
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12260
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance)
Page 9330
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5036
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 136
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 626
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11223
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8178
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6785
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
TCM Circuit Inspection
Page 11153
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 6241
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 1720
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to
the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at
the specified range.
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an
oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a
heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C
(1,292 - 1,472 °F).
Page 4772
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14415
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7645
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8853
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Replaced
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
Page 7340
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 7259
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 7643
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 186
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8029
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8663
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9365
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4462
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 1738
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10944
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11156
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6755
Case 6
Page 10632
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
- Do not reuse piston seal.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal into groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston boot. Cover the piston end with piston boot, and then install
cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a
groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
Page 12908
Disclaimer
Page 9906
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable and brake tube from the carrier cover.
3. Remove the carrier cover bolts. Then separate the carrier cover from the axle housing using
Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer
to "COMPONENTS".
3. Connect the brake tube and parking brake cable to the carrier cover and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to PB-4, "Components". See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair
4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Refer to
"Checking Differential Gear Oil".
Page 880
Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle
at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator
lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off.
Page 9376
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14389
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6805
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
Page 6296
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 4009
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12115
4. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt and nut using power tool. 5. Remove the three shock
absorber upper mounting nuts using power tool. 6. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber
assembly.
^ Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
The step in the strut assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle.
^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
Removal and Installation
Page 2493
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7871
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11496
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11547
Repair Flow Chart
Page 12396
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8560
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 13941
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 13104
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4386
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 664
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 14694
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7662
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 14621
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4388
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 5792
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2175
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6833
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 6956
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R
Page 6900
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 14)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 1416
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14511
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 994
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11)
Page 6673
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 6752
Case 3
Page 10325
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7015
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 9410
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5143
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14365
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5207
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1873
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5920
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5402
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 2435
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 14629
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5414
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2744
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve
lifters at the locations that are out of the standard.
4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation
below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 =
Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F)
^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Intake
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Page 9426
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7080
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1548
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 149
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 582
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 7463
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6596
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4712
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Testing and Inspection
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 4895
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4721
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2153
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Reference: NTB09-001
Date: January 24, 2009
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT
AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807
NHTSA #: 08V-690
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier
(D40)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra,
and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that
regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water
and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on
roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in
a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle
operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags
in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan
dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor.
Eligible Vehicles
Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles
registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan,
Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the
campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check
Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The
CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues.
Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their
warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected
vehicles begins on January 26, 2009.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5466
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7233
Page 8975
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 12954
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9326
Page 3662
Page EM-3
Page 8667
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8650
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9738
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2758
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 11016
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1285
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C".
2. Disconnect the hazard switch connector.
3. Remove the screws and remove the hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7806
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11782
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal and installation.
Page 11901
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1932
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13587
Page 11070
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8880
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5661
Valve clearance
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown
(locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC
c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at
TDC of its compression stroke.
NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to
rotation angle.
Page 4751
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 644
Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional Diagrams
Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC
Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ECM/PW
EC-ECM/PW-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Classification: RS05-006
Reference: NTB06-046
Date: June 13, 2006
2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN
CIRCUIT (DTC B1134)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit,
and
The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or
partially,
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not
disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
ACTION
Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in
the Parts Information.
IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be
performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 1686
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7632
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 7930
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 806
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11739
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 6123
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1823
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2510
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 3951
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: ^
When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belts.
^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
^ After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using tool.
REMOVAL 1. Remove undercover with power tool. 2. Remove drive belts. 3. Drain engine coolant.
Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
4. Remove radiator hoses (upper and lower) and cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE
COOLING FAN".
5. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover from front timing chain case, using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
6. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
Page 134
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 548
Page 13225
Front Door Window Regulator: Overhaul
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly.
Page 4437
Page 6668
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 2
Page 9466
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7702
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6891
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 7639
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7766
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Page 426
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 10538
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 5924
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12015
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5191
Page 11107
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 6211
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1019
Page 11224
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14057
Page 6116
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6279
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 7744
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 8507
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9855
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis, and separate it from the clutch
pedal. 2. Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid onto painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
3. Remove the hose clamp and hose from the clutch master cylinder. 4. Remove the clutch tube
using suitable tool. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder nuts, and remove the clutch master
cylinder from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Before installation, check the position of the clevis and push rod. If L is outside standard length,
adjust the position of the clevis and push rod. Length L: 120.5 mm (4.74 inch)
^ After installation, inspect and adjust the clutch pedal as necessary, then bleed the clutch
hydraulic system. Refer to "On Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment", and "Bleeding".
Page 12016
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4471
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 1934
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1845
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11949
Page 4029
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 5147
Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
PG-POWER-09
Page 278
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9389
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2482
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Classification: HA10-006
Reference: NTB10-043
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles.
If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating
normally:
^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation
instructions.
Page 934
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14756
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14032
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the
quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to
"REAR PROPELLER SHAFT".
9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack.
10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11.
Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level
sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector
12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and
the fuel feed hose.
Page 4612
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 9089
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 13525
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 9465
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7624
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9728
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12583
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations
Page 6581
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11891
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9407
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 574
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 6068
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10217
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14489
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9558
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6760
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4)
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 5178
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6603
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7945
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9582
Page 8109
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 969
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3636
Page EM-9
Page 7877
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1316
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3287
Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of
camshaft.
CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a
different diameter from the other three locations.
2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^
If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Valve Lifter Clearance VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with micrometer since valve lifter is in
barrel shape. Standard (intake and exhaust): 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch)
VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER
^ Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with inside micrometer.
Page 2545
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12917
Door Switch Check (Step 4)
Page 11142
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14823
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9059
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9424
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 14068
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 346
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: Recalls Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder
2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles
originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The
District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in
the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS)
housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens,
the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator.
CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front
air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will
receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the
warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining
the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge
Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1216
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7172
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14637
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5347
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 9387
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6100
Page 4530
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 10254
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7131
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 2055
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2790
Drive Belt: Specifications
DRIVE BELT
Page 10210
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7079
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2190
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6295
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 14728
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6054
Page 10421
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to
BRC-142, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: Yaw Rate Sensor/Service and
Repair/HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Page 933
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13636
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2063
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8896
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11535
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 12758
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 8039
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 8175
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4390
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 5662
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC
d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at
TDC of compression stroke.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 402
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 9569
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 8224
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6268
Page 13076
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1028
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 6114
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11731
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 11395
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 5380
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8657
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5334
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11436
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 550
Attachment General Procedure
Page 6812
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 2705
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 1545
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 798
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6916
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
Page 11295
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14796
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 306
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration".
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER
INSTRUMENT PANEL LH".
3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration".
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System - NATS)
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure".
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 13616
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 1159
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 978
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5551
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13523
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs)
Page 6791
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 9935
2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final
drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
FILLING
1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug
hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and
Lubricants".
2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive
assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS". ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 6635
LAN-CAN-11
Page 14380
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10218
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5531
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2933
2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final
drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
FILLING
1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug
hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and
Lubricants".
2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive
assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS". ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Specifications
Piston: Specifications
PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE
Piston Pin Hole Diameter
Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole with inside micrometer. Standard: 21.993 - 22.005
mm (0.8659 - 0.8663 inch)
Piston Pin Outer Diameter
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin with micrometer. Standard: 21.989 - 22.001 mm (0.8657 0.8662 inch)
Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance (Piston to piston pin oil clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) (Piston pin outer diameter) Standard: 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 inch) ^
If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace piston and piston pin assembly
^ When replacing piston and piston pin assembly, refer to "HOW TO SELECT PISTON".
NOTE: ^
Piston is available together with piston pin as assembly.
^ Piston pin (piston pin hole) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service
parts, no piston pin grades can be selected. (Only "0" grade is available.)
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter
^ Using bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper at six different points
on each cylinder. ("X" and "Y" directions at "A", "B" and "C") ("X" is in longitudinal direction of
engine) Standard inner diameter: 95.500 - 95.530 mm (3.7598 - 3.7610 inch) Out-of-round
(Difference between "X" and "Y"): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Taper limit (Difference between "A" and
"C"): 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch)
Page 1015
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14247
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10621
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 3335
CYLINDER BLOCK
Page 588
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 8259
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11303
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7287
Page 1848
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4194
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 7466
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9339
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3635
Page EM-8
Page 1379
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4997
Page 3937
Replace valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case,
replace cylinder head gaskets.
9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC
appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 6502
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1505
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13011
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14053
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5943
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
- When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General
Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link
Connector Schematic
Page 5470
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 5495
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain
Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3129
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 4369
Attachment General Procedure
Page 13857
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5962
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4971
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
Incomplete air bleeding causes the following: ^
Air bubbles in reservoir tank
^ Clicking noise in oil pump
^ Excessive buzzing in oil pump
^ When this happens bleed the air again.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stationary or while the steering wheel is being turned slowly, some
noise may be heard from the oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any
system.
1. Check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Checking Fluid Leakage". 2. Start the engine and turn the
steering wheel fully to the right and left several times.
CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank
frequently and add fluid as needed.
3. Run the engine at idle speed. Hold the steering wheel at each locked position for three seconds.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is
the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. Repeat step 3 several times at about three second intervals. 5. Check for air bubbles, cloudy
fluid and fluid leakage. 6. If air bubbles or cloudiness exists, perform steps 3 and 4 again until air
bubbles and cloudiness do not exist. 7. Stop the engine and check fluid level.
Page 13027
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3686
1. Hammer dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in
order to shorten protrusion length.
2. Install new front oil seal on the front timing chain case.
- Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip. - Install it so that each seal lip is oriented
as shown.
- Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift
[outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 in)]. - Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not
inverted.
Page 10811
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1501
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9905
Differential Cover: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Refer to "DRAINING".
Page 8133
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2495
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6153
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13809
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5280
Service and Repair
Page 6338
Page 11406
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14162
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10751
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to
BRC-142, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: Yaw Rate Sensor/Service and
Repair/HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Page 997
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 13122
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
Page 11888
Page 11665
Optional Splice
Part 1
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 10797
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13577
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2050
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9138
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 7048
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12062
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 12402
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8350
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Page 8161
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1605
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8306
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 6503
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11379
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11474
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 13813
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5928
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2
Page 1538
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6253
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 11447
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8797
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10330
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1849
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 998
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 9)
Page 14000
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10197
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5703
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6103
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1429
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 4492
Page 10767
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s).
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly
Page 7291
Page 9662
Page 12384
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6544
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 4770
Service and Repair
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
radiator. Refer to "RADIATOR".
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible A/C hose and the high-pressure A/C pipe from the
condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser. 6. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets and
remove the condenser.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure A/C pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and
high-pressure flexible A/C hose with new ones, apply compressor oil to them for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
- Replace the mounting grommets as necessary.
Page 9670
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise
Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Tires: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Page 3564
c. Install oil pan (lower).
^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
2. Install oil pan drain plug. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: At least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed, pour engine oil.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and adjust engine oil. Refer to
"ENGINE OIL". 2. Start engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for
10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again. Refer to "ENGINE OIL".
REMOVAL (UPPER)
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine oil when engine is hot.
1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. 3.
Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine oil on drive belts.
4. Drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
5. Remove front final drive (4WD). 6. Disconnect steering gear lower joint shaft bolt and steering
gear mounting nuts and bolts, position out of the way. 7. Remove starter motor. 8. Disconnect A/T
fluid cooler tube brackets and position out of the way. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 9.
Remove oil filter, as necessary.
10. Remove oil cooler. 11. Remove oil pan (lower). Refer to "REMOVAL (Lower)". 12. Remove oil
strainer. 13. Remove transmission joint bolts which pierce oil pan (upper). Refer to
"TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 14. Remove rear cover plate.
15. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown to remove.
Page 2620
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 11793
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 1875
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8623
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3791
- After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
Timing Chain Tensioner
1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket
(EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8.
Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft
sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide
Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover. 2. Remove engine under cover. 3. Partially drain engine coolant. 4.
Remove lower fan shroud. 5. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hose and remove air duct and
resonator assembly.
Page 5726
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5519
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5120
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 5155
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 10610
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 14579
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3999
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2865
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible A/C Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right
mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to
"HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
5. Remove the low-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure
Flexible A/C Hose".
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor
oil to it for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 6526
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 6138
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7928
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 12998
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6501
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4683
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 3666
Page EM-7
Page 12574
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2
Page 6821
Case 7
Front Suspension
Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension
Page 10816
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 5379
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3255
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5820
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8007
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 10685
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection
1. Using a suitable vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inch Hg) to
brake booster. 2. Check output rod length.
Standard dimension when vacuum -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, - 19.69 inch Hg): 15.6 - 15.9 mm (0.614
- 0.626 inch)
INSTALLATION
1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length "B" (in the figure) satisfies the
specified value.
Length "B": 125 mm (4.92 inch)
2. After adjusting "B", temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle.
^ Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel.
3. Connect brake pedal to clevis of input rod. 4. Install brake booster nuts. 5. Install brake piping
from brake master cylinder to actuator and electric unit. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit". 6. Connect
vacuum hose to brake booster. 7. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. 8. Adjust the height
and play of brake pedal. 9. Tighten lock nut of input rod.
10. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 10890
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2056
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10643
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid
Drain and Refill
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
when splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
^ Before servicing, disconnect actuator connector or battery negative cable.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, then loosen each bleed valve using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool and
gradually remove brake fluid.
3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest
foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve.
Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a
few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid
flows out. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 3862
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 4190
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 5140
Page 6670
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 3
System Diagram
System diagram
TYPE 4
Page 9120
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6148
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5417
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10753
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to
BRC-212, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: On-Vehicle Service
Page 6800
Case 5
Page 13575
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6482
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12961
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1239
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11219
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4900
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13556
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 6193
Page 6872
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 12489
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 13651
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5825
Page 8509
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP
canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under
the given conditions.
CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
- Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg,
29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Page 1695
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8130
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10743
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 300
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch
"CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General
Information.
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 9005
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 14377
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8835
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5790
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking
Noises
Stabilizer Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End
Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises
Classification: FA10-003A
Reference: NTB10-072A
Date: October 6, 2010
FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN
6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct
23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All
IF YOU CONFIRM
A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following
actions:
^ turning the steering wheel left or right
^ driving over speed bumps
^ driving on rough roads
^ accelerating or decelerating
AND
The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing.
ACTIONS
Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts
Information section of this bulletin.
^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and
installation instructions.
Page 1820
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11458
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13129
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 7948
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 628
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6415
Illumination
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3886
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 1038
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7626
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13716
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 5371
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13792
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10675
6. Remove back plate.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly. Refer to "Components".
^ Install adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow.
^ Shorten adjuster by rotating it in the opposite direction as shown by the arrow.
NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if parking brake does not function well,
perform break-in operation as follows.
1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". 2. Perform parking brake
burnishing operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following conditions:
^ Vehicle speed 40 km/h (25 MPH) set (forward)
^ Parking brake operating force 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lbs.) set
^ Apply time 30 seconds
CAUTION: ^
To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every
break-in operation.
^ Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of
lining.
3. After burnishing operation, check parking brake pedal stroke. Readjust if it is now longer than the
specified stroke. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT".
Page 10847
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7070
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
- Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated
Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Page 10885
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 11800
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 11774
Page 10971
Service and Repair
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. Refer to "Rear Door Glass". 2. Remove door grommets,
and remove outside handle nuts from the hole. 3. Remove outside handle. 4. Disconnect the
outside handle cable connection. 5. Remove the inside door handle. 6. Disconnect the door lock
and inside door handle cables from the inside door handle. 7. Disconnect the door lock actuator
connector and remove the assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1149
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Front
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
CAUTION:
- Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 2. Remove the
seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly.
- On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor.
3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector.
CAUTION:
- For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector.
- Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector.
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
- Ensure that seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
Page 4845
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2693
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 3932
CAUTION: ^
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1098
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2
Page 7853
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13666
Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads
voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC
SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Page 14639
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14249
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1304
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1581
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 5900
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine undercover using power tools. 2. Remove drive belts. 3. Remove
engine cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN". 4. Remove crankshaft pulley.
5. Remove front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip of new front oil seal. 2.
Install front oil seal.
^ Install front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
^ Press-fit until the height of front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool. Suitable drift: outer diameter 60 mm (2.36 inch), inner diameter 50 mm (1.97 inch).
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft.
^ Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal.
3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal after this step.
Page 4587
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5875
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 8527
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 4362
Page 11158
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5704
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13476
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the seat back trim.
2. Locate the recliner shaft and side link pins on the back of the seat.
3. Confirm the recliner shaft link slot and pin (inner and/or outer side) are misaligned.
Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Classification: BR11-001
Reference: NTB11-021
Date: March 2, 2011
FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes:
^ While moving forward or reverse
^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure)
^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes)
^ At speeds less than 10MPH
^ While traveling straight or turning.
NOTE:
This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to
duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important
to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being
heard is coming from the front or rear brakes.
ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
Page 6364
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 7741
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4843
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1116
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11094
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9418
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs)
Page 4974
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 4005
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1891
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6080
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 6361
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 11007
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5288
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises
Classification: BR06-006D
Reference: NTB06-037D
Date: March 2, 2011
2005 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAKING NOISE FROM BRAKES
The application of Molykote(R) 7439 has been added to the Service Procedure. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Frontier built before: 1N6(*)DO7(**)5C461154 Xterra built before:
5N1AN08(**)5C651886
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before August 15, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
A squeaking noise coming from the brakes.
ACTIONS
Perform repairs as follows:
Front Brakes
1. Replace the front brake pads.
2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims).
Rear Brakes
1. Replace the rear brake pads.
2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims).
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 8158
Page 5627
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 6499
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1944
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 830
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14585
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1706
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2132
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5619
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition
switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5
seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
Page 13548
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 7142
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 4044
8. Remove the upper mount bracket bolts.
9. Remove the two A/C condenser bolts.
10. Remove radiator as follows:
CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch A/C condenser and radiator core when removing.
a. With lifting and pulling radiator in a rear direction, disassemble lower mount from radiator core
support center.
CAUTION: Because A/C condenser is onto the front-lower portion of radiator, moving to rear
direction should be at minimum.
b. Lift A/C condenser up and remove radiator after disengaging the fitting as front-bottom surface.
CAUTION: Lifting A/C condenser should be minimum to prevent a load to A/C piping.
c. After removing radiator, put A/C condenser on radiator core support center to prevent a load to
A/C piping, and temporarily fix it with rope or
similar means.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS".
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7828
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7557
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11064
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4263
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 343
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10952
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 821
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3646
Page EM-19
Page 6017
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7187
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 12108
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts
and bolts must be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and
engine oil full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires
on the ground.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. For the RH side, remove the tailpipe. Refer to EXHAUST
SYSTEM. 3. Support the rear final drive assembly with a suitable jack to relieve the tension from
the rear leaf spring.
^ The axle weight should be supported, but there should be no compression in the rear leaf spring.
4. Remove the shock absorber lower nut and bolt using power tool.
5. Remove the four rear spring clip U-bolt nuts using power tool, then remove the rear spring pad.
6. Remove the rear spring shackle and bushings using power tool.
7. Remove the rear leaf spring front nut and bolt using power tool. 8. Remove the rear leaf spring.
INSTALLATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
On-Vehicle Service
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE".
Page 491
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 11105
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be
performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch
Check
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps
cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates.
1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4.
Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor
(magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 232
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 11301
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4981
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 9425
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8116
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1884
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 540
Page 4280
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 438
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 11109
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Page 9192
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14507
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 4343
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 8011
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10145
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Gear Oil
Type .................................... Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85
or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90.
Page 2485
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6277
Page 2090
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8812
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1208
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8854
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition
switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5
seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
Page 2408
2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs.
^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease.
^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring
leafs.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places)
4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension.
Disclaimer
Page 10831
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9078
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4590
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6675
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 1245
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6014
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7109
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5751
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Description and Operation
Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 4956
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Draining & Filling Fluid
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Draining & Filling Fluid
Changing
DRAINING 1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transmission. 2. Stop the engine.
Remove the transmission drain plug and drain the oil. 3. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it
to the transmission. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near the
filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity. Refer to "
Page 9174
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10172
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Page 7535
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 8927
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 10230
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the
terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 497
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 792
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9205
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8600
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11318
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 7695
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2500
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Component Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6612
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4302
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5138
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7990
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4073
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8115
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7700
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12960
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 1180
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Cowl Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2450
Repair Flow Chart
Page 11391
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Daytime running lamps (Canada only)
- Parking lamps
- Tail lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window
defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped).
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each
control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown.
Page 9186
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9861
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid on painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
2. Remove the clutch hose and copper washer from the operating cylinder.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer.
3. Remove the operating cylinder bolts, and remove the operating cylinder from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Tighten the clutch hose fitting to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Make sure the clutch hose is not bent or twisted.
^ After installation, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to Bleeding procedure.
Page 3833
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10416
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1887
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11274
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9385
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4448
Attachment General Procedure
Page 4299
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1130
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1696
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8624
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10486
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
- Do not reuse piston seal.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal into groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston boot. Cover the piston end with piston boot, and then install
cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a
groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
Page 5255
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 5079
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
Page 6495
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 9548
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3638
Page EM-11
Page 11822
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Description and Operation
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM
uses this signal for engine control.
Page 6534
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 2683
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 10845
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10837
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7622
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9648
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1624
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11758
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component
status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Refer to "Ball Joint".
Page 323
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Page 54
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2180
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5539
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12097
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs
to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch.
Caution:
Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the
highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this.
Page 5810
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7480
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13132
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch
"CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General
Information.
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 2952
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 14470
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Service and Repair
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
ROCKER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Separate engine harness removing their
brackets from rocker covers. 3. Remove harness bracket from cylinder head, if necessary. 4.
Remove ignition coil. 5. Remove PCV hoses from rocker covers. 6. Remove oil filler cap from
rocker cover (left bank), if necessary.
Page 5885
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1868
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9128
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7631
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1839
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1468
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1588
Page 2117
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 7789
Page 4363
Page 7179
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9718
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1783
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3402
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 13797
Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Specifications
Flywheel: Specifications
FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T MODELS)
^ Measure the deflection of flywheel contact surface to clutch with a dial indicator.
^ Measure the deflection at 210 mm (8.27 inch) dia. Standard: 0.45 mm (0.0177 inch) or less.
^ If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel.
CAUTION: When measuring, keep magnetic fields (such as dial indicator stand) away from signal
plate of the rear end of crankshaft.
MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODELS)
CAUTION: Do not disassemble double mass flywheel.
Movement Amount of Thrust (Fore-and-Aft) Direction ^
Measure the movement amount of thrust (fore-and-aft) direction when 100 N (10.2 kg, 22 lbs.)
force is added at the portion of 125 mm (4.92 inch) radius from the center of flywheel. Standard:
1.3 mm (0.051 inch) or less
^ If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel.
Movement Amount in Radial (Rotation) Direction Check the movement amount of radial (rotation)
direction with the following procedure: 1. Install a bolt to clutch cover mounting hole, and place a
torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel center line.
^ Tighten bolt at a force of 9.8 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 87 inch lbs.) to keep it from loosening.
2. Put a mating mark on circumferences of the two flywheel masses without applying any load
(Measurement standard points). 3. Apply a force of 9.8 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 87 inch lbs.) in each
direction, and mark the movement amount on the mass on the transmission side. 4. Measure the
dimensions of movement amounts "A" and "B" on circumference of flywheel on the transmission
side.
Standard: 24 mm (0.94 inch) or less. ^
If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel.
Drive Plate:
M/T Models ..........................................................................................................................................
............................. 88.0 Nm (9.0 kg-m, 65 ft. lbs.)
Page 7968
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to
the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at
the specified range.
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an
oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a
heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C
(1,292 - 1,472 °F).
Page 10559
2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in
Figures 1 and 2.
^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer.
3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order.
Page 4669
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13047
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 6823
Case 9
Case 10
Page 8731
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4664
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Description and Operation
Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power
transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the
proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
Page 10835
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4570
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13653
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7519
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 356
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 4064
Optional Splice
Part 1
Diagrams
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Service and Repair
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door window regulator. Refer to "Front Door Glass".
2. Remove door side grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside
handle escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX
T30) from grommet hole.
CAUTION: Do not forcibly remove the TORX bolts (T30).
TORX bolt 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
3. Separate the key cylinder rod (driver side only) and outside handle rod connection (on the
handle).
4. While pulling the outside handle, remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon.
5. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle.
Page 11462
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Page 9039
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14565
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2058
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4918
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 14080
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1790
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9452
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 10332
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9751
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 3331
NOTE: Use TORX socket (size E14) for bolts No. 1 to 16 (M10 bolt).
Bolts 1 - 16: 35.3 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft. lbs.)
ii. Turn M10 bolts 90° clockwise in numerical order from No. 1 to 16 using Tool.
Tool number KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
CAUTION: Use angle wrench Tool to check tightening angle. Do not make judgement by visual
inspection.
^ After installing the bolts, make sure that crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand.
^ Wipe off completely any protruding liquid gasket on front side of the engine.
^ Check the crankshaft end play. Refer to "CRANKSHAFT END PLAY".
Page 8280
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8258
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Locations
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13743
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2415
2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs.
^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease.
^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring
leafs.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places)
4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension.
Disclaimer
Page 1580
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13394
6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5).
NOTE:
Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal.
7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a
squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close
attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6).
8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of
the decal (see Figure 7).
Page 11183
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 6939
Case 12
Case 13
Page 4244
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Description and Operation
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM
uses this signal for engine control.
Page 5119
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Interior Room Lamp
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10448
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Installation is in the reverse order
of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Page 7965
EC-O2S2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B2
Page 2273
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5630
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 8487
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1609
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Page 14683
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9378
Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7271
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 6587
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6724
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
Page 630
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 8596
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13061
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 11497
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11587
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 5226
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12977
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7273
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 10706
Page 9968
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
Page 1997
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10954
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 280
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7182
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11964
Page 13849
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 872
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
On-Vehicle Service
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II.
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
G Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE".
Page 11693
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7508
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 5452
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12306
Air Duct: Service and Repair
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Page 1514
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9731
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7218
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 8577
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 14690
Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6158
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13026
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4028
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1560
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 8093
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8380
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12359
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Clutch disc-to-pulley
clearance:.....................................................................................................................................0.3 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
Page 4092
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3986
Page 8948
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9971
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
Page 2183
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Classification: EM-10-009
Reference: NTB10-094
Date: August 12, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
WARNING:
Page 608
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7376
Page 8945
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12768
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear
Page 6420
Page 8800
Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations
Page 10529
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Page 14646
Page 8351
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 6029
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6990
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7859
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 12608
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The
sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage.
The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
Page 9325
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9588
Page 2476
Page 1746
Page 5747
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11071
Page 13681
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6826
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 4122
^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free
from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
Page 14382
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5974
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12023
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 925
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 12019
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1123
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 41
NOTE:
For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if:
^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN,
^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm,
THEN
^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the
decal has been heated and rubbed.
9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all
along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the
side rail (see Figure 8).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is
familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on
painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal
firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9).
Page 12235
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 11674
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 697
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 5285
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8246
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. 2. Remove engine undercover
with power tool.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sensor 2 on both banks using Tool.
Tool number: KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2.
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
4. Remove center exhaust tube, main muffler and left front exhaust tube. 5. Remove exhaust
manifold cover (left bank).
Page 3557
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 5963
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14500
Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7885
Page 6081
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 5413
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1955
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4613
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 2324
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9037
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13538
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 5301
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 10370
7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2
harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect
the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to
"Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 7566
Page 9481
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 12009
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 6582
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8885
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5510
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8529
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 243
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 10611
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 4866
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1931
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 652
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 13563
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 6786
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection
Page 7074
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 586
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Specifications
Page 13750
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12611
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 5225
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5149
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 729
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 14520
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4245
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1
Page 8271
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4228
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1399
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5595
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 12523
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11396
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be
performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch
Check
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps
cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates.
1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4.
Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor
(magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 7189
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 14002
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11997
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13680
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14367
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10481
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Rear
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
- Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the
above conditions are observed.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding
sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them.
Page 5548
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10655
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 4672
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2336
Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation
PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is
ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
Page 1383
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7891
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13191
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 13632
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11512
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8138
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2315
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14076
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5922
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7526
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 4006
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9390
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9657
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7960
EC-AF1B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB1
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 10368
8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation".
Page 10802
Page 139
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3955
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket, to mating surface of chain tensioner and water pump
cover, using Tool.
Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
c. Tighten bolts to specified torque.
5. Refill engine coolant system. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT".
^ Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (front). Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this step.
^ After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to
purge air from the high-pressure chamber of chain tensioner. Engine may produce a rattling noise.
This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS".
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant.
Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
PG-POWER-09
Page 8150
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14665
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4936
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 7052
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1867
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14824
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9393
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4389
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 7694
Page 5044
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 408
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 800
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2627
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 4465
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4035
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6797
Case 2
Page 3695
-When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following:
CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do
not loosen bolts (A) as shown).
NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary)
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Page 7226
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11831
Description and Operation
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power
transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the
proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
Page 1710
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10822
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 7040
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8275
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
- If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 2551
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11794
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 8221
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
CAN System (Type 1)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2541
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4555
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8211
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6893
BCM Circuit Inspection
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 12449
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2
Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 9244
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 6751
Case 2
Page 612
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9184
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5817
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8514
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so
that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
NOTE:
- Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD".
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as
shown in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to
zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
Locations
Fuse Block: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 584
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 831
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8940
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7870
Optional Splice
Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2654
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 7066
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
Page 1417
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1910
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6023
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Locations
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
With reservoir ......................................................................................................................................
.......................... 2 3/4 gal. (2 1/4 Imp gal, 10.2 L)
Page 1648
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8451
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
Page 372
Page 14165
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1404
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air
Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 3703
b. Install the primary timing chain.
- Water pump (G). - Install primary timing chain so the mating mark punched (B) on camshaft
sprocket is aligned with the link (A) on the timing chain, while the
mating mark notched (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the link (F) on the timing
chain, as shown.
Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (A) Copper link Blue link
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10662
^ Adjust brake pedal. Refer to "Inspection and Adjustment".
Description and Operation
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through combination meter terminal 8
- to oil pressure sensor terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
- to oil pressure sensor terminal 3
- from combination meter terminal 10.
The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor
- through oil pressure sensor terminal 2
- to combination meter terminal 19.
Page 324
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1443
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5700
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12980
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6624
CAN System (Type 12) Schematic
LAN-CAN
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5505
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9197
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 11035
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 2268
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9273
Page 192
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 4413
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 451
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 5109
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4959
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2006
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Intake Door Motor
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Intake Door Motor
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws
and remove the intake door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11520
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5055
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8749
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows: Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
Page 13161
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 13642
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10654
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1252
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 10193
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
CAN System (Type 1)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10339
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2742
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC
d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at
TDC of compression stroke.
Page 556
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 3724
^ Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
^ Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift
[outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 inch)].
^ Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted.
12. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case.
^ Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown. Tool
number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended
Chemical Products and Sealants".
13. Install front timing chain case as follows:
Page 7699
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2204
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 4087
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5904
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5272
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 81
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Motor Relay
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay.
Page 5877
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 547
Page 10531
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 3149
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 11749
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Page 5925
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9366
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8288
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11618
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Page 2549
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7770
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9925
Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential
Checking Differential Gear Oil
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly
or around it.
Page 8170
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2093
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7461
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Page 2195
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10168
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Diagnostic Aids
Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Front Wiper and Washer System
Service and Repair
Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair
Fixed Antenna Rod Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove antenna rod. 2. Remove rubber seal. 3. Remove cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". 4.
Remove antenna base bolts. 5. Remove audio unit. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Audio
Unit". 6. Disconnect antenna cable from audio unit. 7. Remove antenna base and cable.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may bend
or break during vehicle operation.
Page 8828
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2374
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2106
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4833
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 3778
6. Remove internal chain guide. 7. Remove timing chain (primary).
Caution: After removing timing chain (primary), do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
valves will strike the piston heads.
8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary.
9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
a. Attach stopper pin to the right and left timing chain tensioners (secondary).
NOTE:
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts.
Page 2639
Page 1981
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 10270
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13441
4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied.
Torque screws to:
Page 14052
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7488
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8815
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10850
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7929
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 5248
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9271
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11000
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 12491
Housing Assembly HVAC: Locations
Components
Page 976
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13428
26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm.
7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with
narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in
Figure 5.
8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch
from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the
synchronization tube (see Figure 6).
9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube.
Page 14397
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4214
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1463
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2023
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6521
Page 7498
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9382
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 14914
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments Rear
Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment
- Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure.
Adjustable range: ±15° (In any direction)
Page 14357
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Lamp Switch
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
^ Check continuity.
Page 11136
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 3471
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 4972
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2115
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1234
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1473
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 3391
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 2139
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1551
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5521
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6777
Case 6
Page 3748
Part 2
Timing Chain Tensioner
Page 6794
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 6015
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7996
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2539
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5336
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4985
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9821
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 5979
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 1479
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 1741
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 619
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air
Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 8924
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12336
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the lower glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND
GLOVE BOX". 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws
and remove the blower motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14748
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14255
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 793
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11267
Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways
Seat Bottom Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways
Classification: BT05-050
Reference: NTB05-092
Date: October 7, 2005
RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE
MOVEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual
seats WI Fold Flat Feature)
APPLIED VINS:
Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada:
vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123
IF YOU CONFIRM
An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven
^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above
^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above
ACTION
^ Remove the seat from the vehicle.
^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by
adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13183
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 3787
3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
a. Install crankshaft sprocket.
- Make sure the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front of engine.
Page 4893
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5123
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1034
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3265
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams
EC-IVCB1
EC-IVCB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-IVCB2
Page 6273
Page 11130
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 5008
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11880
Page 2964
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures.
SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C
(0°F)
API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy
Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
Page 5062
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8323
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 6793
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 14)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 11439
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4948
Page 13839
Sensor Action
^ When the front sensor detects daytime conditions, the rear sensor is inactive and the mirror
remains in a "no dimming" mode.
^ When the front sensor detects nighttime conditions, the rear sensor is active and detects any
source of glare (light) coming from the rear (mainly headlights from approaching vehicles). The
mirror will automatically adjust the amount of dimming needed to remove the unwanted glare from
the inside rear view mirror.
NOTE:
Don't let anything get in the way of the front or rear sensors. If anything blocks the sensors, they
may not work correctly.
Auto Dimming Mirror Trouble Shooting
Always verify the customer concern before performing diagnosis.
Auto Dimming Mirror Operational Check
Page 7537
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that
accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the
following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
Page 8574
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 10460
Part 1
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: While bleeding, monitor the master cylinder brake fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress
brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed and using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, loosen the bleed valve to let air out, then tighten bleed valve
immediately.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque.
Refer to "Components (front disc brake), "Components (rear disc brake)". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6 at
each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleed air from the front left,
rear left, and front right
bleed valve, in that order.
Page 2377
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11861
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3842
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams
EC-IVCB1
EC-IVCB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-IVCB2
Page 9349
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4987
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the
partition glass.
5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and
screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
- Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm
(0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
Rear Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch.
4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Page 8928
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14271
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12876
Door Switch Check (Step 4)
Page 6300
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 8478
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3962
Coolant: Application and ID
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION: ^
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water
or distilled water.
^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Page 5789
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7151
Page 7748
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2261
Optional Splice
Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11992
Page 6358
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37,
"CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking
System
Page 7473
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 250
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13044
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4422
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
REAR DOOR
Removal
1. Remove window crank handle or power window switch assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness connector.
2. Remove pull handle cover.
- Remove rear door finisher screw behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove pull handle escutcheon. 4. Lift upward to release clips and remove armrest.
- Remove rear door finisher screws behind armrest.
5. Release the clips and remove rear door finisher.
- Disconnect the rear door tweeter (if equipped).
Installation
Page 818
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13276
Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair
Components
Removal and Installation of Rear Fender Protector
REMOVAL
1. Remove screws. 2. Remove pushpins. 3. Remove rear fender protector.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14169
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. 3. If
NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 2 again.
Page 11306
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13395
NOTE:
For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if:
^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN,
^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm,
THEN
^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the
decal has been heated and rubbed.
9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all
along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the
side rail (see Figure 8).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is
familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on
painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal
firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9).
Page 10322
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5913
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6804
Case 10
Case 11
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 7411
Page 4689
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3663
Page EM-4
Page 8653
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3628
Page EM-1
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 7703
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3251
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
On-Vehicle Service
OPERATING CHECK
With engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal
several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when the vacuum pressure
reaches the standard, make sure the clearance between brake pedal and floor panel decreases.
CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
AIRTIGHT CHECK
^ Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster.
Depress brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Make sure
distance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases.
^ Depress brake pedal while engine is running and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal
stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
Page 13946
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 1173
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 9529
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5168
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 5604
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 3961
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type
Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50%
anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant.
Page 4400
Page 1530
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8082
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3720
e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. There are two type of bolts. Refer to the following for
locating bolts.
Bolt length: Bolt position 20 mm (0.79 inch): 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 16 mm (0.63 inch): Except the
above Rear timing case bolt torque: 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.)
f. After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. ^
If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately
g. After installing rear timing chain case, check the surface height difference between following
parts on oil pan (upper) mounting surface.
Standard Rear timing chain case to lower cylinder block: -0.24 to 0.14 mm (-0.0094 to 0.0055 inch)
^
If not within the standard, repeat the installation procedure.
3. Install water pump with new O-rings. Refer to "INSTALLATION".
4. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC)
^ NOTE: Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose,
it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side): At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft
dowel pin (exhaust side): At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key: At
cylinder head side of right bank.
CAUTION: Hole on small dia. side must be used for intake side dowel pin hole. Do not misidentify
(ignore big dia. side).
5. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark
positions repeatedly during the installation process.
Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2046
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11516
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Cowl Weatherstrip: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4631
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that
accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the
following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
Page 6880
Case 2
Page 13550
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 10992
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10423
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to
BRC-212, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: On-Vehicle Service
Page 11860
Page 8597
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Specifications
Page 7776
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7842
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8489
Page 10892
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10883
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10301
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 5815
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1375
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14211
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C".
2. Disconnect the hazard switch connector.
3. Remove the screws and remove the hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6078
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8417
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8439
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 119
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1532
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9404
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9436
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9082
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 31
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 13957
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 4562
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 469
Page 5689
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5193
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1516
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6242
Page 2870
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal and installation.
Page 12982
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
Trailer Tow Schematic
LT-T/TOW
Page 11221
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 7036
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 12117
2. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. 3. Remove the
shock absorber.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Shock absorber upper and lower
nuts. Refer to "Components".
Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber
as necessary.
Page 7058
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-AF1B1
EC-AF1B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1B2
Page 9661
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7317
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 8605
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8268
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
Trailer Hitch: Recalls Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North
America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September
30, 2005
COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch,
inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch
from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer
separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24,
2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 12988
TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
The trailer power supply is controlled by trailer tow relay 2.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 27
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and
- to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T).
When trailer tow relay 2 is energized, power is supplied
- through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7
- to trailer connector terminal 5.
Page 8453
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP
canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under
the given conditions.
CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
- Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg,
29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Page 8660
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 374
Page 9761
3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. 2. Turn ignition key to lock position. 3.
Set selector lever to "P" position.
4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. 5. Install casing cap to bracket.
Page 13663
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4160
WARNING:
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 1787
Page 12826
6. Turn the ignition OFF.
7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows:
The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment.
^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from
the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON).
^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed.
^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the
sensor is completely installed.
^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing.
8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2).
9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3.
^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused.
10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover.
Page 7497
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14630
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2351
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 9362
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2267
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7177
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11146
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Adjustments
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 4293
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2864
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure A/C Pipe
Removal and Installation for High-pressure A/C Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right
mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to
"HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the low pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Removal
and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe". 6. Remove the high-pressure A/C pipe. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 6254
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 8902
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5561
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3330
Undersize
Lower Cylinder Block
Install lower cylinder block as follows:
NOTE: Lower cylinder block cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together
with cylinder block.
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to lower cylinder block as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: After liquid gasket is applied, rear oil seal installation must be finished within 5 minutes.
Therefore, the following procedure must be performed quickly.
b. Tighten lower cylinder block as follows:
i. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the bolts.
ii. Tighten M8 bolts in numerical order as shown from No. 17 to 24.
Bolts 17 - 24: 22.1 Nm (2.3 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: Wipe off completely any protruding liquid gasket on rear oil seal installation surface.
NOTE: There are more processes to complete the tightening bolts. However stop procedure here
to install rear oil seal.
c. Install rear oil seal. Refer to "INSTALLATION". d. Restart tightening of lower cylinder block bolts
as follows:
i. Tighten M10 bolts in numerical order as shown from No. 1 to 16.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Steering - Power Steering Oil Cooler Service Procedure
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Oil Cooler
Service Procedure
Classification: ST10-006
Reference: NTB10-115
Date: September 27, 2010
FRONTIER AND XTERRA; POWER STEERING OIL COOLER SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINs and DATES
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a power steering oil cooler needs to be replaced for any reason, please refer to the SERVICE
PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
For vehicles built from 10/5/2009 to 11/1/2009, mounting studs are already installed. Skip Step
3-11 in the SERVICE PROCEDURE. Do not order the two (2) hex bolts listed in PARTS
INFORMATION.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1943
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 14758
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 492
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Testing and Inspection
Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Switch
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
Page 8615
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 11998
Page 3831
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3357
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve
lifters at the locations that are out of the standard.
4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation
below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 =
Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F)
^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Intake
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Page 9286
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11138
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4232
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6899
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 10 - 13)
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9472
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12385
Condenser Fan: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14344
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Classification: BR11-001
Reference: NTB11-021
Date: March 2, 2011
FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes:
^ While moving forward or reverse
^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure)
^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes)
^ At speeds less than 10MPH
^ While traveling straight or turning.
NOTE:
This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to
duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important
to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being
heard is coming from the front or rear brakes.
ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
Page 6992
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13425
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE
PROCEDURE
1. Preparation for seat removal.
^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make
sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS.
^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors:
A. Write down all radio station presets.
B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Page 1425
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10004
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
Page 9055
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8983
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1330
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2068
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8084
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6036
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13954
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 6095
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6035
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7161
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11710
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 2144
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3268
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the
intake valve angle at the control position.
Page 5898
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13764
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9982
0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten the drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.)
increments without overtightening. Refer to
COMPONENTS. Tighten until proper rotating torque is achieved.
CAUTION: ^
Do not loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque.
^ Do not exceed specified rotating preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded
a new collapsible spacer must be installed.
^ Do not exceed maximum tightening torque. If maximum tightening torque is reached prior to
reaching the required rotating torque, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace the
collapsible spacer.
6. Check the gear oil level. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". 7. Install the remaining
components in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9429
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5016
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 8728
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7634
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 382
Page 557
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 9354
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 3000
Part 1
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: While bleeding, monitor the master cylinder brake fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress
brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed and using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, loosen the bleed valve to let air out, then tighten bleed valve
immediately.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque.
Refer to "Components (front disc brake), "Components (rear disc brake)". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6 at
each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleed air from the front left,
rear left, and front right
bleed valve, in that order.
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 6986
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 13869
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 6516
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 1032
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 49
6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5).
NOTE:
Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal.
7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a
squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close
attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6).
8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of
the decal (see Figure 7).
Page 14668
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 528
Page 4780
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9015
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6397
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 7432
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 14774
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2489
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Disassembly and Assembly
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly.
Page 11297
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Part 1
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1412
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 559
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 4295
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12624
2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS
Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire
SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
SRS INSPECTION (FOR ROLLOVER)
Page 4224
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12890
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 983
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1209
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Page 3588
Intake Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed from cylinder head, install them and tighten to the specified torque.
Intake manifold studs: 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.)
^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque in two or more steps in numerical order as
shown. Intake manifold bolt and nuts 1st step: 7.4 Nm (0.75 kg-m, 5 ft. lbs.) 2nd step and after:
29.0 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 21 ft. lbs.)
Page 3032
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11241
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6933
Case 6
Page 10549
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear
Part 1
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Remove bolt from the top
mount of cylinder body 3. Swing cylinder body open, and remove pads.
INSTALLATION 1. Push piston into cylinder body
NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the
level of the surface of reservoir tank.
2. Install pads to cylinder body making sure they are firmly attached. 3. Rotate cylinder body up
and install top mount bolt. 4. Check brake for drag. 5. Install wheel and tire assembly.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 7765
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 1621
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Removal and Installation
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Part 1
Part 2
Page 7933
Page 11687
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 975
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8076
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10964
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge
Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 14160
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 12968
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 3790
- If removed, reinstall slack guide.
CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats
when bolts are tightened to specification.
- Remove stopper pin from primary timing chain tensioner.
5. Make sure again that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets and timing chain have not slipped
out of alignment. 6. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed
and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft.
Tool number : (J-48761)
7. Install front timing chain case. Refer to EM-4, Front Timing Chain Case, Installation.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack
in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
Page 5234
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Diagram Information and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14051
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7666
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Page 7942
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6322
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 14801
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5135
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8905
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 3411
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Description and Operation
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through combination meter terminal 8
- to oil pressure sensor terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
- to oil pressure sensor terminal 3
- from combination meter terminal 10.
The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor
- through oil pressure sensor terminal 2
- to combination meter terminal 19.
Page 11720
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6898
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 9)
C200
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair C200
Part 1
Page 4927
Page 7667
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14811
Page 4812
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8066
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6422
Page 13008
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13551
Cowl Weatherstrip: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9837
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Page 10624
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1713
EC-AF1HB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB2
Page 11171
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 4249
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 13518
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 5329
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5345
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10102
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4221
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3777
1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC.
- Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (A) (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator (B).
2. Remove front timing chain case. Refer to EM-1, Front Timing Chain Case. 3. Check timing chain
markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke.
- If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-48761)
- If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing
chains to the sprockets.
4. If removing the secondary timing chains, loosen camshaft sprocket bolts.
5. Compress the primary timing chain tensioner.
1. Loosen clip of primary timing chain tensioner, and release plunger stopper (1). 2. Depress
plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). 3. Keep slack guide pressed and insert
stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in.
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
Page 14598
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7100
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9762
6. Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod.
Page 8592
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6447
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 7714
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9031
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7350
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 6749
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 2740
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine
conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing
noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure
the valve clearance as follows:
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank)
are located as shown.
^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown.
b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft.
Page 6175
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12296
Air Mix Door Motor (Front)
The air mix door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. This motor rotates so that the
air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then
conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the
PBR built into the air mix door motor.
Page 1261
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13658
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8048
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9819
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 5697
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6651
LAN-CAN-27
CAN System (Type 9)
Page 6598
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2325
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2746
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the
engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.
Page 5294
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3367
4. Tighten bolts in two steps separately in numerical order as shown.
1st step: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) 2nd step: 8.33 Nm (0.85 kg-m, 74 inch lbs.)
5. Install oil filer cap to rocker cover (left bank), if removed. 6. Install PCV hose.
^ Insert PCV hose by 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 inch) from connector end.
^ When installing, be careful not to twist or come in contact with other parts.
7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove intake manifold collector.
CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold.
2. Separate engine harness removing their brackets from rocker covers. 3. Remove harness
bracket from cylinder head (right bank). Refer to "CYLINDER HEAD". 4. Remove ignition coil. 5.
Remove PCV hoses from rocker cover. 6. Remove PCV valve and O-ring from rocker cover (right
bank), if necessary.
7. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. 8. Remove rocker cover gaskets from
rocker covers. 9. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and camshaft
bracket (No. 1).
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK)
Page 2371
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7886
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6620
CAN System (Type 8) Schematic
Page 9458
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3167
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires
Classification: WT06-002
Reference: NTB06-076
Date: November 7, 2006
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels
SERVICE INFORMATION
The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during
wheel and tire service.
Tire Changing:
^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside
(internal jaws).
^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel.
^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or
have rubber/plastic protective covers.
Wheel Balancing:
Page 14223
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 11017
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Power Sockets
NOTE: Removal and installation is common for all power sockets.
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2.
Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 951
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13584
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front left wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front left mud
guard. 3. Remove the front left splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a
(R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the high-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal
and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor
oil to it for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 784
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6179
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ohms [at 25 °C (77 °F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. 4. Perform EC-89, "Throttle
Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
5. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 8003
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 144
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 4681
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3841
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13133
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 10167
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 4107
2. Check valve operation.
^ If the malfunctioning condition, when valve seating at ordinary room temperature, or measured
values are out of the standard, replace water inlet and thermostat assembly
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^
Be careful not to spill engine coolant over engine room. Use rag to absorb engine coolant.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS".
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant.
Page 10815
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11471
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 9298
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3288
Standard (intake and exhaust): 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch)
VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE ^
(Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) - (Valve lifter outer diameter), Refer to "Valve
Clearance". Standard (intake and exhaust): 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch)
^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer
diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head.
Page 2062
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3459
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 14789
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10966
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
^ Check continuity.
Page 437
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 842
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8646
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 5032
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 7224
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6638
LAN-CAN-14
Page 1356
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7378
Page 13814
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 10014
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
Page 811
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 871
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to
BRC-142, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: Yaw Rate Sensor/Service and
Repair/HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Page 1876
Page 11344
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5068
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 8786
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 12017
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13999
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11669
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 4851
Fuse and Fusible Link Box
Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 2278
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6840
Case 5
Page 1643
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2487
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12727
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 891
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
Page 1350
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2094
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5891
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6286
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 1497
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5656
Replace valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case,
replace cylinder head gaskets.
9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC
appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble
Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
Page 3163
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 11465
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 10213
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7833
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3747
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Part 1
Page 6476
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9592
Attachment General Procedure
Page 12511
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Oil
Name:...................................................................................................................................................
............ Nissan A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent
Page 1179
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the
quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to
"REAR PROPELLER SHAFT".
9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack.
10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11.
Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level
sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector
12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and
the fuel feed hose.
Page 6941
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4 )
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 7939
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3980
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9856
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the spring pin, using suitable tool. 2. Remove the nipple and reservoir seal from the
cylinder body 3. Loosen the push rod lock nut then remove the clevis and lock nut, if necessary.
NOTE: Clutch pedal height is controlled with the position of the clevis and push rod.
4. Remove the dust cover from the cylinder body. 5. Remove the stopper ring and stopper.
Remove the push rod from the cylinder body while holding it securely to prevent the piston
assembly from
popping out.
6. Remove the piston assembly and return spring.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Inspect for the following, replace parts as necessary ^
Damage, foreign material, wear, corrosion, and pin holes on the cylinder inner surface
^ Damaged or deformed nipple
^ Weak spring
^ Cracked or deformed dust cover
ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber lubricant to the internal surface of the cylinder body, sliding surface of
piston assembly, and the piston cup. Insert the return spring
and piston assembly to the cylinder body.
2. Apply silicone grease to the push rod and install the stopper and stopper ring.
CAUTION: Restrain the push rod while doing this because there is a danger the piston assembly
will fly out of the master cylinder.
3. Install the dust cover to the cylinder body. 4. Install the reservoir seal and nipple to the cylinder
body. 5. Install the clevis to the push rod.
6. Check and adjust the position of the clevis and push rod. After adjusting L, tighten lock nut to the
specified torque.
Length "L" (for QR25DE engine models): 119.5 mm (4.70 inch) (for VQ40DE engine models):
120.5 mm (4.74 inch)
Intake Manifold Collector
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Collector
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain engine coolant when engine is hot.
1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove air cleaner case (upper) with mass air flow sensor and air
duct assembly. 3. Remove electric throttle control actuator as follows:
a. Drain engine coolant, or when water hoses are disconnected, attach plug to prevent engine
coolant leakage. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE
COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
b. Disconnect water hoses from electric throttle control actuator. When engine coolant is not
drained from radiator, attach plug to water hoses to
prevent engine coolant leakage.
Page 11285
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12119
1. Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as
shown.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time.
2. Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the shock absorber mounting insulator
can be turned by hand.
WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the
spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring.
3. Remove the piston rod lock nut.
^ Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly
4. Remove the components from the shock absorber.
^ Keep the spring compressed in the commercial service tool if reusing it for assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown.
2. Install the shock absorber mounting insulator as shown in line with lower shock mount and step
in lower seat.
^ The step in the strut assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle.
Page 5946
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to
check CONSULT II data link connector
(DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link
Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 8144
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve
Closed
Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 7848
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5945
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 452
Disclaimer
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14738
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6228
Page 14716
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7704
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2218
Page 3236
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8953
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14388
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12353
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing and slide it over to
the right. Insert the second new in-cabin
microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Close the lower glove box completely.
Page 13665
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7111
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1535
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13238
6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool.
7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
- If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Page 2830
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 11625
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 10728
Page 6128
EC-MIL/DL-02
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 14615
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 13469
5. Position seat cushion rear bracket out of the way as needed. (See Figure 5)
6. Align shaft linkage on both inner and outer sides by inserting pins into shaft link slots.
NOTE:
^ In some cases, the white bushing I clip may come off the shaft. If this occurred, reinstall the clip
to it's proper position (refer to Figure 1). The seat back will need to be removed to do this.
^ Using the recliner handle lever may assist with aligning pin and shaft linkage.
7. Reinstall seat cushion rear bracket (but do not fully tighten bolts).
8. Place seat on its side.
9. Adjust seat cushion rear bracket. (See Figure 6)
NOTE:
Adjust to the minimum width by pushing both seat sides together while tightening lower bracket
bolts.
Page 4012
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6419
Page 12763
Seat Belt: Locations
Page 6155
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10896
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5200
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2337
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
^ Check continuity.
Page 10477
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 8209
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10777
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II.
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 5209
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6318
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 1803
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7623
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5779
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 263
Page 2047
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 236
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 985
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Electrical Diagrams
EC-ASC/BS
EC-ASC/BS-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ASCBOF
Page 14527
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 11099
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 14870
Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above.
Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to:
^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation
^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot
holes)
A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and
appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks.
^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an
object striking the windshield. This is not covered
under warranty.
Page 8160
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9459
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 3727
Crankshaft bolt torque: 44.1 Nm (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft. lbs.)
c. Put a paint mark on crankshaft pulley aligning with angle mark on crankshaft pulley bolt. Then,
further retighten bolt by 60° (equivalent to one
graduation).
17. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly. 18. Install oil pans (upper and lower). 19. Install rocker covers (right and left
banks). 20. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this
step.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for
checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ^
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
^ Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
^ Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check
for fuel leakage at connection points.
^ Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
^ Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in
the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
^ Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any
oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant.
^ Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. After cooling down
engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified
level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items
Page 10327
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12596
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9300
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Page 3435
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 47
Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal.
1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C).
2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure
1).
^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it.
3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2).
Damaged Decal Removal:
4. Remove the damaged decal as follows:
Page 13052
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 14778
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8559
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 6910
Case 8
Page 14623
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3556
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 14402
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System
4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Runout
1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft.
CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a
different diameter from the other three locations.
2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and
measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Standard: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch)
4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Height
1. Measure the camshaft cam height with micrometer.
Standard: Intake: 45.465 - 45.655 mm (1.7900 - 1.7974 inch) Exhaust: 45.075 - 45.265 mm
(1.7746 - 1.7821 inch) Limit: Intake: 45.265 mm (1.7821 inch) Exhaust: 44.875 mm (1.7667 inch)
2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with micrometer. Standard: No. 1: 25.935 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 inch) No.2,3,4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 inch)
Page 5954
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13692
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11293
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
- Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Page 416
Disclaimer
Page 5132
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11577
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Specifications
Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications
Oil pan drain plug ................................................................................................................................
.................................. 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
Page 11170
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 11585
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 5341
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7838
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3456
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 6064
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6238
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 3813
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2169
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6822
Case 8
Page 6979
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7685
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7140
Repair Flow Chart
Page 5217
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 4686
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 9462
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1758
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 828
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3041
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6606
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10037
^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT.
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications.
Page 14768
Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 2659
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 14591
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9068
Page 13540
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 2451
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 11696
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1954
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Page 4176
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 3981
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown.
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in
series under middle speed condition.
Page 9359
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 772
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2096
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9130
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 987
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 4457
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 2475
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2760
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 3033
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 10888
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14158
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6339
Page 7904
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 12063
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5424
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13834
Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 2
Terminals And Reference Value For Combination Meter
Page 14857
3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until
the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle
and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the
glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped,
disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly.
9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
Page 458
Page 4903
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11222
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 8164
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10407
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4854
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: Recalls Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder
2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles
originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The
District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in
the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS)
housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens,
the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator.
CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front
air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will
receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the
warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining
the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1665
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 7423
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 466
Page 1441
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4886
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7060
EC-AF1HB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB2
Page 329
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 13009
Page 13679
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1751
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11085
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 241
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14642
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9979
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove the brake calipers and rotors. Refer to
"Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
Page 9752
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 8028
Page 3643
Page EM-16
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 5832
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14468
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4235
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7642
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
On-Vehicle Check
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Check
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an
emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All
3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing
child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then
retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt
cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into
the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is
operating properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt
from extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially.
A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any
further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract
to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions
(for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform
the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an
accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace
themselves in the event the retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2.
Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH).
Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop.
The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does
not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does
not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
Page 780
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2825
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From
Front Air Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 9090
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 7396
Page 2586
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 11266
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 4008
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2051
Page 8604
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11247
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 6690
2. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed from the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR" screen of "ENGINE" attached to the check
sheet, and then put a check mark to the check sheet table.
NOTE: In "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen, "UNKWN" is displayed on "ICC", "BCM/SEC"
and "EPS". But put a check mark to "BCM/SEC" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of
reception diagnosis of the check sheet table.
3. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed on the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR"
screen of "A/T", "ALL MODE AWD/4WD",
"ABS" and "IPDM E/R" as well as "ENGINE". And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table.
NOTE: For "A/T", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ICC/e4WD". But, do not put a check mark to their columns of
reception diagnosis of the check sheet table because "UNKWN" is not listed.
- For "ALL MODE AWD/4WD", "UNKWN" is not displayed". Do not put a check mark to it.
- For "ABS", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ICC". But, do not put a check mark to their columns of
reception diagnosis of the check sheet table because "UNKWN" is not listed.
- For "IPDM E/R", "UNKWN" is displayed on "BCM/SEC". Put a check mark to it.
Page 956
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1042
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1525
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6376
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 3785
c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)].
- Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) with the ones on
camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) (4), (5), (7) and (10) (punched),
and install them.
Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (2) Copper link Blue link
Page 5340
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8842
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9613
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 9824
7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2
harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect
the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to
"Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 2674
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 6004
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8659
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3725
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as
shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows:
i Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting
point, make entire front timing chain case contact rear timing chain case completely.
ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while
holding front timing chain case from
front and top as shown.
iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and
top completely.
d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
^ There are four type of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter
1-5: 10 mm (0.39 inch) 6-25: 6 mm (0.24 inch) Bolt position Tightening specification 1-5: 55.0 Nm
(5.6 kg-m, 41 ft. lbs.)
Page 10096
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 3812
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Illumination
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14932
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7054
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Page 11456
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13310
4. Fold the new cup holder closed and push it (snap it) into the center console.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7941
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13932
Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied
- to combination meter terminal 9
- through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2
- through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5
- from combination meter terminal 4.
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Page 3282
CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER ^
Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the
tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter "A" of camshaft bracket with bore gauge. Standard: No. 1: 26.000 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 inch)
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE ^
(Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (Camshaft journal diameter). Standard: No.
1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 inch)
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch)
^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE: Camshaft bracket cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with
cylinder head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play
^ Install dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the end play of dial
indicator when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188
mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) Limit: 0.24 mm (0.0094 inch)
^ Measure the following parts if out of the limit. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 inch)
- Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing Standard: 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 1.0781 inch)
^ Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Page 13596
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 173
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Idle speed ............................................................................................................................................
.................... More than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) 2,000 ................................................................
...................................................................................................... More than 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2,
43 psi) Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)
Page 834
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6652
LAN-CAN-28
Page 2366
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1836
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8431
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14054
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8763
6. Remove bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH).
7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube as follows:
a. Carefully open and remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube by pulling straight.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful with remaining fuel that may go out from fuel tube.
^ Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
^ Do not bump or drop fuel injector.
^ Do not disassemble fuel injector.
8. Disconnect fuel tube (RH) from fuel tube (LH). 9. Loosen bolts, to remove fuel damper cap and
fuel damper, if necessary
INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper as follows:
a. Install new O-ring to fuel tube as shown.
^ When handling new O-rings, be careful of the following caution:
Page 4944
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1772
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14457
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3773
b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows:
i. Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting
point, make entire front timing chain case
contact rear timing chain case completely.
ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while
holding front timing chain case from front
and top as shown.
iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and
top completely.
d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. e. After all bolts are tightened,
retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. - There are two type of bolts
Bolt position Bolt diameter
1 - 5 : 10 mm (0.39 in) 6 - 25 : 6 mm (0.24 in)
Bolt position Tightening specification
1 - 5 : 55.0 N-m (5.6 kg-m, 41 ft-lb) 6 - 25 : 12.7 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
Page 6002
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13876
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6505
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11086
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 617
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10700
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Remove crash zone sensor nuts and shield from support member. 2. Disconnect the crash zone
sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor.
CAUTION:
- Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 8765
b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
^ Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
^ Insert fuel injector so that protrusion "B" of fuel tube matches cutout "B" of clip.
^ Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip.
c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off.
^ Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
4. Connect fuel tube (RH) to fuel tube (LH), and tighten bolts temporarily.
^ Tighten bolts with the specified torque after installing fuel tube and fuel injector assembly.
CAUTION: ^
Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it.
5. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
^ Tighten bolts in two steps in numerical order as shown. Fuel injector tube assembly bolts 1st
step: 10.1 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 7 ft. lbs.) 2nd step: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.)
6. Tighten bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH) with the specified torque. 7.
Connect fuel injector harness connector. 8. Install intake manifold collector. Refer to
"INSTALLATION". 9. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check on Fuel Leakage 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" (with
engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection
points.
NOTE: Use mirrors for checking at points out of clear sight.
2. Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopped, as engine becomes extremely hot.
Page 5343
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7527
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Page 4575
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12277
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
C200
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/C200
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
M226
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/M226
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 171
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Page 10530
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 8996
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4197
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 1691
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4027
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1829
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12926
Disclaimer
Page 2407
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs
to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch.
Caution:
Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the
highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this.
Page 12974
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Front
Front final drive oil 0.85L (1 3/4 pt US, 1 1/2 pt Imp)
C200
Rear final drive oil C200
.................................................................................................................................................... 1.6L
(3 3/8 pt US, 2 7/8 pt Imp.)
M226
M226 ....................................................................................................................................................
............................. 2.0L (4 1/4 pt. US, 3 1/2 pt. Imp)
Page 9708
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4675
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7839
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7931
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4374
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 6016
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7737
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7738
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13706
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Preliminary Inspection
Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear
suspension parts before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. Unladen
conditions means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. Refer to "Inspection". 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to "WHEEL
BEARING INSPECTION". 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each
mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check
each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height.
Refer to "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)".
Page 805
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4794
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6217
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Drive Plate:
A/T Models ..........................................................................................................................................
............................. 88.0 Nm (9.0 kg-m, 65 ft. lbs.)
Page 13858
Page 3876
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 6696
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 6486
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7270
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 2785
Page 3670
Page EM-11
Page 4996
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2127
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9176
Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: Recalls Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder
2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles
originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The
District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in
the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS)
housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens,
the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator.
CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front
air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will
receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the
warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining
the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 8965
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13798
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11081
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3936
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL
PRESSURE RELEASE".
3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake
manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not
required in use of CONSULT-II).
7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole.
^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm
(0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal.
8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these
steps to check each cylinder.
Compression pressure
CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed.
^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine
speed again with normal battery gravity
^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated
with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark
plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be
malfunctioning. Check valves for damage.
Page 5202
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7693
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14371
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11284
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14842
5. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
- Install parts removed.
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the rear window in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Page 11699
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 8985
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5335
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 355
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5289
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8173
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 17
Repair Flow Chart
Page 9040
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 8946
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7288
Page 3661
Page EM-2
Page 8724
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3457
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4618
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Page 11664
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9533
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1195
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5629
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 213
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 11609
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 5824
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6313
Disclaimer
Page 12748
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3884
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 390
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 11551
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 5101
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8544
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 11900
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12683
11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4.
12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor.
13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order.
^ Reuse the original cover.
^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor.
^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb).
14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the
codes:
^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function,
SELF-DIAG [PAST].
15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows:
a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure
5).
b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF.
c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the
Service Manual for diagnosis and repair.
^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this
bulletin.
16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector.
Page 11275
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6714
Case 1
Page 9017
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 9791
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7201
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control
unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 11481
Page 5988
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6033
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 12540
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1280
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 824
Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2929
Part 2
Changing Differential Gear
Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Set a new gasket on drain plug and install it to final
drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING
1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified level near filler plug
hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and
Lubricants".
2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive
assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
COMPONENTS. ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 7710
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8806
13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP
hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel
tank.
15. Remove the lock ring using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-45722)
16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
CAUTION:
- Do not bend the float arm during installation.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then
check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 12708
10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit.
Page 169
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 5537
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11135
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7819
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13720
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 3146
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 5879
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 8678
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 13756
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12520
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY".
2. Remove rear oil seal with a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new rear oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
2. Install rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
^ Press in rear oil seal to the position as shown.
^ Install new rear oil seal using Tool. Tool number: (J-47128)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.
Page 7992
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8443
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2661
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 5176
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5456
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8019
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4115
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket, to mating surface of chain tensioner and water pump
cover, using Tool.
Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
c. Tighten bolts to specified torque.
5. Refill engine coolant system. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT".
^ Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (front). Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this step.
^ After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to
purge air from the high-pressure chamber of chain tensioner. Engine may produce a rattling noise.
This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS".
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant.
Page 912
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 9927
Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 With Electronic Lock Differential
Checking Differential Gear Oil
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly
or around it.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12391
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1958
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1777
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7028
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1682
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14441
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6580
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6125
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 5984
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5031
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 965
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10234
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 7249
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11450
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 776
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9507
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Page 268
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14613
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10063
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection
On-Vehicle Service
APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or
cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft
runout first.
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive
companion flange with your hands.
Propeller shaft runout limit 2WD: 1.02 mm (0.040 inch) or less 4WD: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less
2. If the runout exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion
flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°
and 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft.
3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft
assembly 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle.
Page 5857
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 267
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Part 1
Part 2
Removal and Installation
Page 3744
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5731
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 10265
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2984
recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to
"HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
NOTE: At temperatures below 16 °C (61 °F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not
reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure.
4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a" to evaporator
inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (A/C evaporator
drain hose "g" to shaft seal "k"). Refer to MTC-96, "Components". See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Diagrams/Exploded Views
Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector
probe completely around the following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal
- Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal
- Check the liquid tank
- Check the refrigerant pressure sensor
- Check all around the service valves. Check that the service valve caps are screwed tightly on the
service valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue
from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995).
- Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any
refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes
accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before
inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly
drain hose.
NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe
tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the
suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to
check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found,
perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls
manually.
a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d.
Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower speed to HIGH
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak
detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the
refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in
the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the
recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should
be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then
check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment. 14. Confirm the
refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. 15. Discharge the
A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as
necessary.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 10015
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10502
^ Make sure to install the brake pad spreader spring as shown in Figure 3.
Rear Brakes
1. This step was missing from the OE bulletin.
2. Replace the rear brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit.
^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit).
^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service
information.
IMPORTANT:
Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the inboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 3).
3. Reinstall all other parts removed in reverse order.
Page 12478
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Technician Safety Information
Information Bus: Technician Safety Information
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in Restraint Systems.
WARNING:
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see Restraint Systems.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 10956
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10107
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1745
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1576
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 177
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1025
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4958
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3665
Page EM-6
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 4602
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 11747
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 12779
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 1978
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Rear Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Motor
Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wiper arm and blade. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm,
Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". 2. Remove back door finisher. Refer to "BACK
DOOR TRIM". 3. Remove rear wiper motor cover. 4. Disconnect rear wiper motor harness
connector. 5. Remove rear wiper motor bolts (3), and remove rear wiper motor from back door.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
1. Clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear wiper motor bolts: 6.8 Nm (0.69 kg-m, 60 in-lb
3. Attach wiper arm and blade. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment
of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location".
Page 1370
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 13856
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11308
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Power Sockets
NOTE: Removal and installation is common for all power sockets.
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2.
Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5284
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1673
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6783
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4)
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 5227
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4814
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3424
Drive Belt: Adjustments
DRIVE BELT TENSION
There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted
by the drive belt auto-tensioner.
Page 13103
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 13127
ITEMS OF EACH PART
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 10236
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal".
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
Page 7143
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 13612
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 6772
Case 1
Page 12088
^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the
stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1
above.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 7510
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 1406
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5503
Page 14647
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8136
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 12411
When the A/C switch is pressed, or the mode switch is turned to the defroster position, the front air
control outputs a compressor ON signal to BCM. The BCM then sends a compressor ON signal to
ECM, via CAN communication line.
ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant
pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it
sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of
compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
Description of Control System
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and
outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure:
Page 8879
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11666
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Page 13105
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1894
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14816
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11350
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6466
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2318
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12616
Page 9291
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 465
Page 4822
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1640
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3171
Wheels: Service and Repair
Balancing Wheels
REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 7846
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6168
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14065
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13019
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4771
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11402
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5989
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 671
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 8373
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6178
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed
of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening
angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it
provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Description
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it
provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 11197
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 773
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9616
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 11052
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7320
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 12696
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Occupant Classification System
The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants,
and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system
receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat
cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and
located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant
classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis
sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air
bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator.
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Remove crash zone sensor nuts and shield from support member. 2. Disconnect the crash zone
sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor.
CAUTION:
- Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Page 9804
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4777
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9187
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5734
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5801
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 12267
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 7227
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3198
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut Torque ...............................................................................................................................
....................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft.lb)
Page 8346
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Page 8697
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 988
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-004D
Reference: NTB05-099D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 10067
2WD: 1.02 mm (0.040 inch) or less 4WD: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less
^ While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the joint as shown. If the journal
axial play exceeds the specification, repair or replace the journal parts. Journal axial play: 0.02 mm
(0.0008 inch) or less
^ Check the propeller shaft for dents or cracks. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to "NVH Troubleshooting Chart".
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Page 4123
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. 2. Remove engine undercover
with power tool.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sensor 2 on both banks using Tool.
Tool number: KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2.
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
4. Remove center exhaust tube, main muffler and left front exhaust tube. 5. Remove exhaust
manifold cover (left bank).
Page 4215
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2824
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9845
^ Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. If any are found, repair
flywheel with emery paper.
^ Check the flywheel runout. Refer to "FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T MODELS)".
Page 5365
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6983
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8111
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11430
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1446
Page 7349
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 4842
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2199
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard
..........................................................................................................................................................
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum
...........................................................................................................................................................
961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders
....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14
psi)/300 rpm
Page 5701
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4835
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 7884
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7193
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8262
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2279
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Page 11882
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 9771
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
Control Device Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/T finisher. Refer to "A/T FINISHER". 2. Disconnect the following from the A/T
control device assembly.
^ A/T selector control cable
^ A/T key interlock cable
^ A/T device connector
3. Remove the A/T control device assembly
INSTALLATION
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Page 6814
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 14678
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8978
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6611
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 12728
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 11775
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
The steering system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
1. Remove the power steering oil cooler.
^ Refer to the G>STEERING section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed.
^ Remove the oil cooler from the bracket, but leave the bracket mounted to the radiator core
support (see Figure 1).
> This bracket will remain installed for support of the hood lock cable.
2. Temporarily put the new oil cooler in place with the two existing mounting studs and nuts.
Page 1146
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10715
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 9726
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9796
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 4083
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10114
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11521
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5687
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14022
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 4217
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6853
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 14351
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 12271
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts ^
Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Page 2187
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
LUBRICANT
Capacity (total in system) ml (US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
............................................................................................................................................200 (6.8,
7.0)
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 14574
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10900
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11084
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8406
Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent
control valve.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Page 11371
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4441
Page 3240
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10668
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. 2. Remove right and left rear cables from
equalizer. 3. Remove front parking brake cable bolts from under vehicle. 4. Remove rear half of
center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". 5. Remove four control lever assembly bolts, then
remove control lever assembly.
Page 4378
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 4589
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2769
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 1647
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 7236
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1980
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8908
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11791
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 5516
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9639
Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
Oil Pan
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
2. Remove oil pan and gasket. 3. Check for foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, has some burned smell, or contains
foreign particles then friction material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will
not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick
and can inhibit pump pressure.
CAUTION: If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair. Refer to "A/T
Fluid Cooler Cleaning".
4. Remove magnets from oil pan.
Installation
1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown.
2. Install the oil pan and new oil pan gasket.
CAUTION:
Page 1677
Optional Splice
Part 1
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in
the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and
resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 7830
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9213
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11115
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8141
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 14446
VDC/TCS/ABS
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 4871
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5043
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4179
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 11364
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14339
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4733
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6062
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5304
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 4196
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 7418
Attachment General Procedure
Page 9348
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4853
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3549
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 464
Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
^ Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove with feeler gauge. Standard: Top
ring: 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 inch) 2nd ring: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 inch)
Oil ring: 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.11 mm (0.0043 inch) 2nd ring:
0.10 mm (0.0039 inch)
^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and measure again. If it still exceeds
the limit, replace piston also.
PISTON RING END GAP
^ Make sure that the cylinder bore inner diameter is within the specification. Refer to "Cylinder Bore
Inner Diameter".
^ Lubricate with new engine oil to piston and piston ring, and then insert piston ring until middle of
cylinder with piston, and measure the piston ring end gap with feeler gauge. Standard: Top ring:
0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 inch) 2nd ring: 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130 - 0.0189 inch) Oil ring:
0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.0079 - 0.0197 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.56 mm (0.0220 inch) 2nd ring: 0.68 mm
(0.0268 inch) Oil ring: 0.85 mm (0.0335 inch)
^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and measure again. If it still exceeds
the limit, re-bore cylinder and use oversize piston and piston rings.
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN
Page 11440
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13973
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2292
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2288
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3837
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9397
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 166
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 503
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 9189
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11261
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 4113
b. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) length: approximately 50 mm (1.97 inch)] into water
pumps upper and lower bolt holes until
they reach timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out water
pump.
CAUTION: ^
Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area.
^ Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain.
c. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble water pump.
NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^
Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly
^ Check for rough operation due to excessive end play
^ Replace water pump, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-rings to water pump.
NOTE: ^
Apply engine oil to O-rings
^ Locate O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
Page 229
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 7504
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 6400
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 10818
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 727
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 6500
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1305
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2457
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 5471
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8952
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1556
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10366
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 6746
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 11198
Relay Box: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7581
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11833
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6980
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5829
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8002
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2707
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 14346
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Description and Operation
Variable Induction Control Valve: Description and Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of
the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge
tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve.
Page 13962
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the
quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to
"REAR PROPELLER SHAFT".
9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack.
10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11.
Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level
sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector
12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and
the fuel feed hose.
Page 13927
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 8834
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2501
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8627
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 11455
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6732
Case 2
Page 9479
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4931
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9693
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Page 7646
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11556
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 11631
Page 11160
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5745
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8706
Page 1819
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 6810
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 7165
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3256
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13794
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10314
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 6763
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
BCM Circuit Inspection
Page 12374
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8578
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 8418
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6811
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4177
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 5050
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7247
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5515
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10279
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 12546
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 9817
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the
terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 4519
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 4383
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 14762
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9798
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2283
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8437
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 11678
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13688
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 1778
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1403
Page 14788
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5460
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5508
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7269
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 10788
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8898
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2547
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10731
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3788
b. Install the primary timing chain.
- Water pump (G). - Install primary timing chain so the mating mark punched (B) on camshaft
sprocket is aligned with the link (A) on the timing chain, while the
mating mark notched (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the link (F) on the timing
chain, as shown.
Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (A) Copper link Blue link
Testing and Inspection
Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle
at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator
lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off.
Page 5446
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 13024
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14512
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4810
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8736
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 11388
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System
Removal and Installation
Exhaust System
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the
engine stops.
^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using
tool. Tool number A: (J-43897-18) B: (J-43897-12)
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; install a new one.
^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up
on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them.
^ Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the mounting bolts on
the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts
and bolts to specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
Page 14557
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2708
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 6274
Page 1232
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1420
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5748
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11807
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Inspection After Disassembly
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Body Assembly Inspection Check the power steering oil pump body assembly for damage. If any
damage is found, replace with a new power steering oil pump assembly.
Page 1161
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 13094
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1907
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8484
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6543
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 11604
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 6030
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10456
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II.
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 4045
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant and A/T fluid.
Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any
of them is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to wheel hub. (two or more positions.)
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside the disc edge.]
Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch)
NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring
runout. Refer to "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION".
3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc
rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake
lathe.
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or
exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness: 28.0 mm (1.102 inch)
Repair limit thickness: 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Maximum uneven wear (Measured at 8 positions):
0.015 mm (0.0006 inch)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5480
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 4096
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2696
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Page 3238
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Paint: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 851
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 14039
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10849
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14066
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10166
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 6006
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14118
Page 6087
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1377
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6411
Page 11168
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10982
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8362
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 7660
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9054
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14070
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5464
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 783
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10917
Page 5921
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9679
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 655
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 478
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 1257
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7489
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9831
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 10935
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5693
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 12307
Components
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
Removal
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the defroster nozzle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCTS
Removal
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14366
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5678
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14808
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4746
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 5723
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Page 7257
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Service and Repair
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation
2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type
spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
^
Frequent engine starts
^ Low ambient temperatures
Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: ^
Extended highway driving
^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch)
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Cowl Weatherstrip: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 1965
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2100
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 12132
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT".
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly.
^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play
Page 10972
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove engine undercover, using power tools. 3.
Remove exhaust manifold cover from exhaust manifold (bank 1) to gain access to starter cover
bolts. Refer to "REMOVAL". 4. Remove starter cover bolts and starter cover.
5. Disconnect terminal "1" connector and terminal "2" nut. 6. Remove the two starter bolts, using
power tools. 7. Remove the starter.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 214
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 14266
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12774
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to "REAR SEAT".
2. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle.
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 629
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5161
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7655
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1880
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 6532
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 13595
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5814
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 147
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4239
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3759
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface as 10 mm (0.39 inch) from its
original position.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to
protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it.
17. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown. 18. Remove front timing
chain case as follows:
a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off
case by moving tool as shown (2). Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Do not use screwdriver or something similar.
^ After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a
load.
Page 5492
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2193
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6465
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14353
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is
depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
Page 9137
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13654
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3084
Page 14463
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10344
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8090
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7563
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9542
Component Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 38
Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal.
1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C).
2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure
1).
^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it.
3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2).
Damaged Decal Removal:
4. Remove the damaged decal as follows:
Page 11473
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Page 6951
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 9 - 11)
Page 4282
Page 8230
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12597
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5439
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 4623
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 9235
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7384
Attachment General Procedure
Page 4897
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10356
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7883
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11100
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Daytime running lamps (Canada only)
- Parking lamps
- Tail lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window
defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped).
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each
control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown.
Page 11202
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Removal and Installation
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
Model 2S1330
Page 9537
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1765
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR
Removal
1. Remove window crank handle or power window switch assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness connectors.
2. Remove pull handle escutcheon. 3. Remove pull handle cover and remove screw. 4. Lift armrest
upward to release clips and remove armrest.
- Remove front door finisher screws behind armrest.
Page 1623
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1711
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-AF1B1
EC-AF1B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1B2
Page 5705
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1651
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12039
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams
EC-IVCB1
EC-IVCB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-IVCB2
Page 13919
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 1598
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4701
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 7934
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 779
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10261
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2021
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 763
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the
differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 7688
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3641
Page EM-14
Page 1789
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 12531
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5896
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5434
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 7094
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7471
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9755
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal".
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
Page 14142
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
C200
Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection C200
Checking Differential Gear Oil
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly
or around it.
Page 13866
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13867
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3860
Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 12861
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Occupant Classification System
The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants,
and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system
receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat
cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and
located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant
classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis
sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air
bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator.
Page 12692
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front door sill finisher and lift carpet. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts and
release the clip. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Page 14011
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 6186
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9934
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Lock Differential
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
Page 9134
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4392
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 14161
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 10275
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6869
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 14274
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5545
Page 2103
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9438
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11368
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1265
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8648
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3419
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 13426
NOTE:
Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks.
3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each
corner (see Figure 1).
Page 8933
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10340
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5469
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14474
LT-T/TOW-02
Page 3637
Page EM-10
Page 10990
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5001
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9087
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 5562
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11106
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 8609
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6370
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 9531
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8497
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2313
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6996
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11493
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 7687
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8378
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9732
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1029
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14709
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 960
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 468
Page 8565
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 14705
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13796
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12729
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove
center console. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit
connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing
toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is
correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)".
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 8371
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5384
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2613
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 7061
EC-AF1HB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B1
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6796
Case 1
Page 1321
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5303
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 10069
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
ASSEMBLY
Journal
1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multi-purpose grease on the bearing inner surface.
NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down.
2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install
them. Refer to "Snap".
NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch).
3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke.
4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification.
Joint flex effort: 2.26 Nm (0.23 kg-m, 20 inch lbs.) or less
Page 8796
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 2118
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 14809
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13955
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 8619
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8838
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11294
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4253
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch
- Key switch
- Hazard switch
- Door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH)
- Back door switch
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- Back door key cylinder switch
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 4266
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 2616
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 7673
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 3187
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the
hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to
"Removal and
Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power
tool.
7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Page 3799
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder
2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles
originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The
District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in
the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS)
housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens,
the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator.
CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front
air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will
receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the
warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining
the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 14806
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3222
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Page 7059
EC-AF1B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB1
Page 1258
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Trip Computer: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11924
Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Ball Joint and Lower Ball Joint
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
The ball joints are part of the upper and lower links. Refer to "Removal and Installation (upper
link)", "Removal and Installation (lower link)".
Inspection
Inspection
^ Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the
following exists:
^ Ball joint stud is worn.
^ Ball joint is hard to swing.
^ Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
SWINGING FORCE
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool.
^ Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown.
^ Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown.
2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification.
Swinging force A Measurement point at either cotter pin hole or groove of ball stud) Upper: 8.1 - 79
N (0.83 - 8.1 kg-f, 1.82 - 17.8 lbs.) at hole Lower: 11.4 - 145.5 N (1.16 - 14.84 kg-f, 2.56 - 32.71
lbs.) at groove
TURNING FORCE
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Turning torque B
Page 1637
Page 7610
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9974
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9573
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal".
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
Page 12242
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 3336
CRANKSHAFT
Page 8442
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4099
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Description and Operation
Tachometer: Description and Operation
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 9480
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6684
Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication Line
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an
on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error
detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit
shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN
communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line)
allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit
transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS
operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and "ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)".
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Page 7750
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 11348
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 6937
Case 10
Page 11358
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10910
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 840
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9589
Specifications
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications
Valve Lifter
Available Valve Lifter
Page 952
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7547
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 4531
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 8502
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 5513
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4090
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 6608
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6586
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 156
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13170
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 1606
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8421
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14781
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7176
Page 7173
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6744
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 8035
Page 13799
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8075
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2172
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5065
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 522
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11302
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8701
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7887
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector.
3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10338
Page 7573
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9681
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 14814
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 495
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 401
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 2533
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8855
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 13603
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11245
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 6599
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1774
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9787
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1043
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8743
6. Remove bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH).
7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube as follows:
a. Carefully open and remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube by pulling straight.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful with remaining fuel that may go out from fuel tube.
^ Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
^ Do not bump or drop fuel injector.
^ Do not disassemble fuel injector.
8. Disconnect fuel tube (RH) from fuel tube (LH). 9. Loosen bolts, to remove fuel damper cap and
fuel damper, if necessary
INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper as follows:
a. Install new O-ring to fuel tube as shown.
^ When handling new O-rings, be careful of the following caution:
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11845
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 5775
Page 14936
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor and Linkage
Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage
REMOVAL
1. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2.
Remove the cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". 3. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
4. Remove wiper frame assembly mounting bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 5. Remove
wiper motor to linkage nut and washer from wiper motor pivot. 6. Remove wiper motor from wiper
frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
- Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn
the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install link to wiper motor
pivot with nut and washer. 4. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into
the vehicle. 5. Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper
motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 6. Install cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP".
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1410
Page 8886
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4505
Attachment General Procedure
Page 9455
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9640
^ Be sure the oil drain plug is located to the rear of the transmission assembly.
^ Before installing oil pan bolts, remove any traces of old sealant from the sealing surfaces and
threaded holes.
^ Do not reuse old gasket, replace with a new one.
^ Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing.
^ Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of the gasket.
3. Tighten oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown.
Oil pan bolts: 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch lbs.)
4. Install drain plug to oil pan.
CAUTION: Do not reuse old drain plug gasket replace with a new one.
Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
5. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 11990
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Page 3817
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 11452
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4261
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
- When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General
Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic
Page 128
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14765
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8163
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Drive Belt Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 8352
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 5194
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8249
2. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal.
3. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of
removal. Note the following:
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in direction as shown.
Combination Meters
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3392
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 11554
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 4498
Page 14460
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5613
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 6627
LAN-CAN-03
CAN System (Type 1)
Page 5275
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14253
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4984
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6542
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that
accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the
following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
Page 4868
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12846
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 1537
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14618
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 916
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2348
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10109
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12641
10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit.
Page 8419
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Reference: NTB09-001
Date: January 24, 2009
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT
AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807
NHTSA #: 08V-690
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier
(D40)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra,
and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that
regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water
and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on
roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in
a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle
operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags
in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan
dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor.
Eligible Vehicles
Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles
registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan,
Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the
campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check
Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The
CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues.
Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their
warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected
vehicles begins on January 26, 2009.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2320
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3696
NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and
that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
Page 9750
11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 5265
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8245
^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free
from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
Page 9363
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6863
Case 7
Page 5800
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7372
Page 13655
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5506
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4361
Page 12952
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10989
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10428
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable.
- If the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of
steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See:
Adjustments
Page 4469
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 642
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 1264
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9660
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 785
Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5918
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10539
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 2535
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3721
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin.
b. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH).
^ Align the mating marks on timing chain (secondary) (copper color link) with the ones on camshaft
sprockets (INT and EXH) (punched), and install them.
NOTE: ^
Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
^ There are two types of mating marks, circle and oval types. They should be used for the right and
left banks, respectively.
Right bank Use circle type. Left bank Use oval type.
^ Align dowel pin and pin hole on camshafts with the groove and dowel pin on sprockets, and
install them.
^ On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel
pin on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them.
^ On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove on camshaft sprocket,
and install them.
^ In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin are not fit on mating parts, make
fine adjustment to the position holding the hexagonal portion on camshaft with wrench or
equivalent.
^ Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
^ It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating marks during and after installation. To
make the matching easier, make a mating mark on the top of sprocket teeth and its extended line
in advance with paint.
Page 6756
Case 7
Page 3765
Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and
exhaust gases leaks. ^
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
^ Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
^ Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check
for fuel leakage at connection points.
^ Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
^ Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in
the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
^ Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any
oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant.
^ Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
^ After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to the specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items
Page 1808
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 277
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7155
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5268
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14464
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 12457
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove
the heater core and evaporator pipes grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve bolts: Refer to "Components". A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt: Refer
to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings on then expansion valve and the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then
apply compressor oil to them for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 12576
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table.
Page 6056
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6649
LAN-CAN-25
Page 6644
LAN-CAN-20
Page 8943
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5990
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12305
Page 2000
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11830
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14610
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10207
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11374
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9181
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7204
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch
- Key switch
- Hazard switch
- Door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH)
- Back door switch
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- Back door key cylinder switch
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 919
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7529
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 13594
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10565
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the
rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to
replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis.
^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads.
^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local
environmental regulations to decide which brake
cleaner to use.
^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES.
1. Remove the front brake calipers.
^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information.
Page 13131
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
- When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General
Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link
Connector/Data Link Connector Schematic
Page 3811
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9754
8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation".
Page 1492
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10203
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6885
Case 7
Page 7408
Page 325
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8662
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8950
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2468
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 10893
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 6865
Case 9
Page 2471
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4191
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 9478
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8661
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7095
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3263
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13619
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 9)
Page 7903
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10204
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Front
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher.
3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle.
4. Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector.
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8038
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10202
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8670
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 12720
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Curtain Air Bag
Side Curtain Air Bag
Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining Vehicles with side curtain air
bags are equipped with labels as shown.
Page 11056
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4318
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 5247
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4094
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13871
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3417
Page 9038
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12105
2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs.
^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease.
^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring
leafs.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places)
4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension.
Disclaimer
Page 14599
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9667
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1462
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13819
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation
System Description
FUNCTION
Power is supplied at all times
- through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM terminal 70, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 25, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to key switch terminal 2.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67
- through body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are
required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following.
1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part
of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when
headlamp battery saver control operates (5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC
position) and headlamps do not illuminate.]
Signal is supplied
- from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16
- to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36.
NOTE: Lighting switch (detected by BCM) is in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to "COMBINATION
SWITCH READING FUNCTION".
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 2.
Front door switch LH is case grounded.
BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter CAN
communication lines. When the combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning
chime.
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME
With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door
open, the warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
- through key switch terminal 1
- to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 2.
Front door switch LH is case grounded.
BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination
meter via CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives key warning signal, it
sounds warning chime.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
Page 11279
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4574
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12801
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 8210
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11759
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection".
Page 14656
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 127
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4367
Page 8025
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1160
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 5201
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1892
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11065
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10881
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2508
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the
terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 13442
26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm.
7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with
narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in
Figure 5.
8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch
from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the
synchronization tube (see Figure 6).
9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 488
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Description and Operation
Page 4414
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Information Bus: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Diagnosis Procedure
SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE)
Page 4788
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 10592
3. Remove union bolt and cylinder body bolts, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer for union bolt.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Install tires to the
vehicle.
Page 5186
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7335
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 6150
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3348
Available Piston
Piston Ring
Page 14241
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 3037
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 4548
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard
..........................................................................................................................................................
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum
...........................................................................................................................................................
961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders
....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14
psi)/300 rpm
Page 10875
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5048
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4787
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5242
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10491
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body
Page 7730
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5709
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Page 1921
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13645
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 735
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 1358
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 6413
Page 1687
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6388
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 4594
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 614
Page 1212
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10475
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 14723
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7035
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3875
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Page 8107
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13021
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4869
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1491
Page 13830
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Step 5)
Page 1739
Page 10208
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9320
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9133
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 6531
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 3469
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 3472
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 5822
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6020
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4276
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8255
Page 14810
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13309
3. Inspect the rear finisher of the center console for damage.
^ If there is any damage, replace the rear finisher.
^ This bulletin does not cover rear finisher replacement. Refer to the Service Manual and the
Warranty Flat Rate Manual as needed.
Page 7516
Page 167
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be
performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch
Check
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps
cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates.
1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4.
Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor
(magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 4560
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4444
Page 9895
Disclaimer
Page 7831
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 3631
Page EM-4
Page 12174
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9734
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4289
Page 10909
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6160
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4391
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s)
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine
Mount(s)
Classification: EM11-002
Reference: NTB11-014
Date: February 16, 2011
05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY
APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50:
Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise.
ACTION
Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information
table below
Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 12109
1. Apply soapsuds to all of the rubber bushings. 2. Install the rear spring shackle and rear leaf
spring front nut and bolt. Finger-tighten the nuts. 3. Install the rear spring clip U-bolts on top of the
axle case. 4. Install the rear spring pad, and nuts under the rear spring.
5. Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts diagonally and evenly to specification.
^ Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts so the lengths of all the exposed rear spring clip U-bolt
threads under spring pad are equal in length within a tolerance of 3 mm (0.12 inch), as shown.
6. Install the shock absorber, and finger-tighten the upper and lower nuts. 7. Remove the jack
supporting the rear final drive assembly and bounce the rear of the vehicle to stabilize the
suspension. 8. For the RH side, install the tailpipe. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM. 9. Install the
spare tire.
10. Tighten the rear spring shackle nuts, rear leaf spring front nut, and shock absorber upper and
lower nuts to specification.
^ When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final nut tightening must be carried out
under unladen* conditions with the tires on level ground.
^ (Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated
positions.)
Page 11717
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 4969
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13524
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
Page 1427
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5827
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6527
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 1667
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 5819
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10273
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6209
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10791
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1200
Page 9013
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5999
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9709
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6678
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 10
Page 5786
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 479
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 5983
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC
Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS
Wheel bearing axial end play...............................................................................................................
................................................................ 0 mm (0 in)
Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft.
lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39
(3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29)
Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 45° - 60°
Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg,
lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4)
With used grease seal N (kg,
lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3)
Page 1326
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7124
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 3354
Valve clearance
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown
(locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC
c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at
TDC of its compression stroke.
NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to
rotation angle.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 7970
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the
monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000
rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes
between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above
0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd
gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
Page 7409
Page 7721
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 5933
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is
turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1)
Page 8704
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 610
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3358
Exhaust
Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Available Valve Lifter
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.)
6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn
crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the
specifications by referring to the specified values.
Page 11376
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6701
Case 5
Page 10324
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14657
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a
bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
Page 14695
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1428
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7835
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11748
Page 3508
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 6445
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 9570
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 11994
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 10382
Repair Flow Chart
Page 8897
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8626
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Page 6360
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 3488
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9386
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5124
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5948
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 13650
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5874
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 3654
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 2826
Page 304
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 2930
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil.
Page 656
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Page 8684
Fuel: Service Precautions
Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended)
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 91).
CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst.
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and
systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity.
Page 9033
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10315
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the
differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3698
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin.
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
Page 5558
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11933
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4.
Remove union bolt, and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly
INSTALLATION
1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to
the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit".
NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer.
2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake
tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 14693
Page 11622
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Page 11605
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 8784
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 287
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 291
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch
- Key switch
- Hazard switch
- Door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH)
- Back door switch
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- Back door key cylinder switch
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 11216
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 440
Page 9740
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11816
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2003
Page 7711
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1242
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10905
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8576
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 10106
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13843
Page 13859
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13375
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Page 9343
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9788
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14149
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9319
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11968
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 4030
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Page 6792
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 10 - 13)
Page 11821
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11335
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Clutch Fluid ......................................................................................................................... Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3
Page 1466
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2480
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2484
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7760
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7068
Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor
2.
CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine
and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1
minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Page 13012
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 565
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 11003
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11555
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13959
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3737
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 6362
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 7786
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11468
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 6831
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 9190
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1107
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations
Page 1582
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8801
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3085
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 1106
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 1
Page 12372
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13753
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6467
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Page 13091
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9470
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6190
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6184
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 14508
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2095
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8553
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 1930
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14495
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3781
NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and
that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
Page 4284
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6522
EC-MAIN-02
Page 2595
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 7994
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8433
Page 5887
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 2499
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3260
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 376
Specifications
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
Page 14509
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11677
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Removal and Installation
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Page 12069
Page 13073
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4213
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10336
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3131
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 3963
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
System Check
WARNING: ^
Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ^
Improper attachment
^ Leaks
^ Cracks
^ Damage
^ Loose connections
^ Chafing
^ Deterioration
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
^ Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool.
^ Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number: EG17650301
(J-33984-A) Testing pressure: 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm2, 20 psi)
WARNING: Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could
occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
Page 10895
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2658
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 5300
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 10223
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 154
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6697
Case 1
Page 6868
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
Page 10252
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10195
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7186
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14074
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7856
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3825
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 512
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 13765
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2364
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5864
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 9110
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11802
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 9780
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8926
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13918
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 5311
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7678
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 494
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 1351
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8622
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6655
LAN-CAN-31
Page 5190
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9822
8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation".
Page 2392
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 7127
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 3154
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 7792
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5691
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3558
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove oil filter access in undercover.
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION: ^
Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN Oil Filter or equivalent.
^ Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.
^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to drive belts.
^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.
INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of new oil filter.
3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or
tighten to specification.
Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.)
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL
LEVEL". 2. Start engine, and check there are no leaks of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10
minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL".
Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Page 7532
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6977
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11053
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 9414
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3223
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6461
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 9532
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Page 4582
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12202
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Page 7584
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7126
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 6944
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection
Page 13089
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 14805
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Service and Repair
Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock
it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13620
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 13)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 14)
Page 1816
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11570
Page 5233
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 10591
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear
Part 1
Part 2
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to
"Drain and Refill".
Page 7895
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 13393
A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away
from the side rail (see Figure 3).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with
paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic
body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough
to soften the decal for easy removal.
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
B. Peel away the damaged decal.
C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt.
CAUTION:
DO NOT use lacquer thinner.
New Decal - Apply:
5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4).
Page 10566
2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in
Figures 1 and 2.
^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer.
3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order.
Page 5707
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5511
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14680
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7706
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8665
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10326
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7211
2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT
WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed
and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List
Page 13042
Repair Flow Chart
Page 13107
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1336
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2120
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 1114
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12199
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 10098
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7761
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5842
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10027
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6716
Case 3
Page 5835
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1540
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11246
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 9536
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4680
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3953
b. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) length: approximately 50 mm (1.97 inch)] into water
pumps upper and lower bolt holes until
they reach timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out water
pump.
CAUTION: ^
Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area.
^ Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain.
c. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble water pump.
NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^
Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly
^ Check for rough operation due to excessive end play
^ Replace water pump, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-rings to water pump.
NOTE: ^
Apply engine oil to O-rings
^ Locate O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 5122
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 12951
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11151
Page 10830
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1622
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8735
Fuel Injector: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2632
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Page 371
Page 155
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
CAN System (Type 1)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14864
6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool.
7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
- If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Body Side Doors
1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
Back Door
1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 5968
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7312
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 148
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3770
23. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case.
24. Remove idler pulley, if necessary.
25. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases,
oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating surfaces.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan.
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread.
26. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner
cover (if necessary) and intake valve timing control
covers.
INSTALLATION
Page 6650
LAN-CAN-26
Page 2064
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Service and Repair
Front Bumper: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
NOTE: Removal of engine undercover is not required for front bumper removal only.
1. Remove radiator grille. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove front bumper valance. 3.
Disconnect fog lamp harnesses, if equipped. 4. Remove front bumper assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8122
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13634
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9557
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2528
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 252
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1133
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 3707
6. Disconnect MAF sensor and remove air cleaner case (upper). 7. Remove coolant reservoir hose.
8. Disconnect upper radiator hose from radiator. 9. Disconnect and remove engine cooling fan
(Motor driven type).
10. Remove upper fan shroud. 11. Remove drive belt. 12. Remove drive belt auto-tensioner. 13.
Remove chain tensioner cover. 14. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper (1). b. Depress
plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). c. Keep slack guide pressed and insert
stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in.
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
d. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary).
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- When installing timing chain tensioner (primary), push in plunger and keep it pressed in with
stopper pin.
- Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of
primary timing chain tensioner.
- After installation, pull out stopper pin.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove
the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe)
Page 8307
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 2919
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD
Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE
90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F)
Rear final Drive (except 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ...............................................................
.............................................................................................................. API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-90
gear oil
Rear final Drive (only 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ...................................................................
........................................................................................................ API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140
gear oil
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 10118
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5690
Page 837
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6067
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13608
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 12525
Page 4014
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2663
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 1080
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 11757
9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from
steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components for tightening torques".
CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin.
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment".
Page 9737
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Intake
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data)
....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416
mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch)
Exhaust
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data)
................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432
mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Available Valve Lifter
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC
Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS
Wheel bearing axial end play...............................................................................................................
................................................................ 0 mm (0 in)
Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft.
lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39
(3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29)
Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 45° - 60°
Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg,
lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4)
With used grease seal N (kg,
lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3)
Page 2827
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 11792
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 10304
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 5958
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2089
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12964
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4732
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11217
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 421
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 3566
c. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to the lower cylinder block mating surfaces
of oil pan (upper) to a limited portion as
shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: ^
For bolt holes with A mark, apply liquid gasket outside the hole.
^ Apply a bead of 4.5 to 5.5 mm (0.177 to 0.217 inch) in diameter to area "A".
^ Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
d. Install oil pan (upper).
CAUTION: Install avoiding misalignment of both oil pan gaskets and O-rings.
^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
^ There are two types of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. M8 x 100 mm (3.97 inch): 7,
11, 12, 13 M8 x 25 mm (0.98 inch): Except the above
e. Tighten transmission joint bolts. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY".
2. Install oil strainer to oil pan (upper). 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse
order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and adjust engine oil. Refer to
"ENGINE OIL". 2. Start engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for
10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again. Refer to "ENGINE OIL".
Page 13648
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2005
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9289
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8216
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 13686
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2481
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6905
Case 3
Contaminated Refrigerant
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Contaminated Refrigerant
Contaminated Refrigerant
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
- Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
- Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and
refrigerant supply.
- Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the
contamination may have occurred.
- If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and
containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your
facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product
retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and
local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is
recommended.
- If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact
NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
Page 6845
Case 11
Case 12
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 4004
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1391
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 415
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 6157
Page 13528
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 8603
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6514
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 10200
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4240
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11131
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14667
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2523
Optional Splice
Part 1
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect fog lamp connector. 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
- Be sure to install the bulb securely for watertightness.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3308
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2314
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4204
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13239
1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear
regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f.
Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5.
Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER".
Page 6745
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 2816
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37,
"CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking
System
Page 4250
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control
unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 5886
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13265
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
LAN System Component Parts
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s)
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine
Mount(s)
Classification: EM11-002
Reference: NTB11-014
Date: February 16, 2011
05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY
APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50:
Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise.
ACTION
Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information
table below
Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 9431
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14252
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8308
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Page 12659
5. Disconnect lighting and turn signal switch connector. Then while pressing tabs, pull lighting and
turn signal switch toward driver door to remove.
6. Remove the screws. Then while pressing the tab, pull the spiral cable away from steering
column assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable.
- Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
7. Disconnect the spiral cable connectors.
CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the
steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned
counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel, refer to "INSTALLATION". Make sure
that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6
revolutions from the right end position and ending with the locating pin at the top.
- Reset the steering angle sensor calibration after installing spiral cable. Refer to "Adjustment of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Steering Angle Sensor/Adjustments
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
CAUTION:
- The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
- With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Page 12950
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4990
Page 1235
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Service and Repair
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 5778
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11207
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1735
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Page 7961
EC-AF1HB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB2
Page 5477
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 13928
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 1916
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM
Programming Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 4493
Page 1542
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5936
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to INFORMATION BUS".
Page 6498
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5153
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11355
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4421
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 8499
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8923
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9901
Part 2
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Refer to "DRAINING".
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable and brake tube from the carrier cover.
3. Remove the carrier cover bolts. Then separate the carrier cover from the axle housing using
Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer
to "COMPONENTS".
Page 977
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8140
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 14826
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Removal and Replacement
Front Door Window Regulator: Removal and Replacement
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Front Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power
window switch.
3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the
outside of the door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
- Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
- On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm
(0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Front Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect
the power window switch.
Page 4834
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 4706
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9280
Page 12414
Control Assembly: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C".
2. Remove the four screws securing the front air control to cluster lid C. 3. Remove the front air
control.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5175
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9163
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5245
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8715
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14459
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8826
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5845
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 7141
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Locations
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13862
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13827
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 2)
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 6707
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 618
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3745
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 6622
CAN System (Type 10) Schematic
Locations
Page 11098
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 13403
6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5).
NOTE:
Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal.
7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a
squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close
attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6).
8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of
the decal (see Figure 7).
Page 11494
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 4626
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 9733
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1244
Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4846
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1615
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions.
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Page 9928
2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 8112
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1396
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14448
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10353
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On
Bumps
Classification: RA05-003
Reference: NTB05-117
Date: December 9, 2005
2005-2006 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAK NOISE FROM LEAF SPRING
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak from the rear of the leaf spring wind-up clip when:
^ going over bumps
Or
^ by compressing the rear suspension
ACTION
^ Inspect the inside of the rear leaf spring wind-up clip plastic cover for contact (rubbing) with the
leaf spring.
^ If signs of rubbing are present, apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the leaf spring and
wind-up clip plastic cover.
Page 11286
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11431
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8214
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7483
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6386
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 1526
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13643
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Service and Repair
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater core. Refer to "HEATER CORE". See: Heater Core/Service and Repair 2.
Separate the heater and cooling unit case. 3. Remove the evaporator.
Page 7032
Page 11346
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6351
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Locations
Page 7296
Attachment General Procedure
Specifications
Valve: Specifications
Valve Dimensions
Testing and Inspection
Coolant Reservoir: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP
1. Check reservoir cap relief pressure using Tool.
Tool number: EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Standard: 78 - 98 kPa (0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 psi) Limit:
59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 9 psi) ^
When connecting the reservoir cap to the tester, apply water or coolant to the cap seal surface.
^ Replace the reservoir cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the
open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values.
Page 1590
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Service and Repair
Access Cover: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove bolts using power tool.
2. Lift up on engine room cover firmly to dislodge snap fit mounts.
CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch cover when installing or removing.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1489
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4588
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light
ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 4288
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12061
Page 4695
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10961
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 591
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3856
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 4828
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9832
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 14454
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8037
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Part 1
Page 7195
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14663
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1238
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8583
Accelerator Pedal: Testing and Inspection
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Components
CAUTION:
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Page 7836
Page 5387
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 3231
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6965
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5404
Page 1953
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5490
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1693
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1594
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5005
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12432
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C low-pressure flexible A/C hose and the high-pressure
A/C pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings for installation.
Page 6215
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5578
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 6903
Case 1
Page 4624
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 7611
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10941
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9769
Shifter A/T: Testing and Inspection
Checking of A/T Position
With the selector lever in the "P" position, turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position with the
engine OFF. Confirm that the following conditions apply. ^
The selector lever can be shifted from the "P" position when the brake pedal is depressed.
^ The selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions.
^ There is no excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
^ The actual position of the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift position indicator
and the A/T body.
^ The back-up lamps illuminate only when the selector lever is placed in the "R" position.
^ The back-up lamps do not illuminate when the selector lever is pushed against the "R" position
when in the "P" or "N" position.
^ The engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. The
^ A/T is locked completely when in the "P" position.
Page 3494
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
^ Oil pressure check should be done in "Parking position" (A/T models).
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". 2. Remove undercover with power tool.
3. Disconnect oil pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure sensor, and remove oil pressure sensor.
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure sensor.
5. Install Tools.
Tool numbers ST25051001 (J-25695-1) ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check oil pressure with engine
running under no-load.
NOTE: When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high.
Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)]
If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks a. Remove old liquid gasket
adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor
to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) c. After warming up engine, make sure
there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 12110
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Check the rear leaf spring for any cracks or damage. Replace the rear leaf spring if necessary.
^ Check the rear spring shackle, rear spring clip U-bolts, bumper, and rear spring pad for excessive
wear, cracks, straightness, and damage. Replace any components if necessary.
^ Check all bushings for deformation and cracks. Replace any bushings if necessary.
Page 5753
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1888
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3814
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8501
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2399
Page 4526
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 5594
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds.
Page 14655
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13784
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5319
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11203
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 3114
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Page 12237
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 1809
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 4999
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6922
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 9793
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5114
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7569
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2887
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
System Check
WARNING: ^
Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ^
Improper attachment
^ Leaks
^ Cracks
^ Damage
^ Loose connections
^ Chafing
^ Deterioration
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
^ Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool.
^ Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number: EG17650301
(J-33984-A) Testing pressure: 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm2, 20 psi)
WARNING: Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could
occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
Page 573
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 7046
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4666
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4567
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10793
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13579
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 13613
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 8579
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 9931
Part 2
Changing Differential Gear
Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Set a new gasket on drain plug and install it to final
drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING
1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified level near filler plug
hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and
Lubricants".
2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive
assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
COMPONENTS. ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 7579
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 12386
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6320
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 5534
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1449
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14652
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2555
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1761
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11336
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 606
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
Trailer Hitch: Recalls Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North
America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September
30, 2005
COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch,
inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch
from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer
separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24,
2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1422
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3237
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4696
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8877
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5145
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10199
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1066
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Page 7837
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Diagram Information and Instructions
Condenser Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1211
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13850
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 881
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable.
- If the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of
steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See:
Adjustments
Page 13520
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
Page 6167
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2426
Page 8008
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1653
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6170
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1515
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-004D
Reference: NTB05-099D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 8804
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the
quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to
"REAR PROPELLER SHAFT".
9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack.
10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11.
Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level
sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector
12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and
the fuel feed hose.
Page 5882
Page 3699
b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are
visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to
re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark.
Page 1749
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6574
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2576
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Page 9023
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7229
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14403
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9669
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4898
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 11443
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 336
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10897
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12534
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5360
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8594
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13099
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Service and Repair
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation
2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type
spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
^
Frequent engine starts
^ Low ambient temperatures
Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: ^
Extended highway driving
^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch)
Page 10129
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2316
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5931
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
VDC/TCS/ABS
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
On-Vehicle Service
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE".
Page 13840
All checks must be performed with the ignition ON, and the auto dimming function turned ON
(green LED indicator is ON).
Page 302
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to
check CONSULT II data link connector
(DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link Connector/Data Link Connector
Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 11517
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8488
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7614
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3664
Page EM-5
Page 4902
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4730
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1885
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11001
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8495
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 9547
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11422
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1871
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7916
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 3995
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 929
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 1733
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9323
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5858
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 6106
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11510
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12479
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 9009
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2327
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14156
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7709
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2177
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5415
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1722
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the
monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000
rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes
between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above
0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd
gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
Page 8379
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 249
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4776
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14850
6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool.
7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
- If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Page 61
Repair Flow Chart
Page 4178
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 4174
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 13062
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 887
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s).
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly
Page 9835
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Page 2691
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 14073
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8223
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7522
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 6208
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4287
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4393
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 8711
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1482
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13690
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1870
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 231
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 10998
Page 9122
Page 13253
5. Install the cable securely to the lock. 6. Adjust the hood lock. Refer to "HOOD LOCK
ADJUSTMENT".
Page 5718
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 9889
^ Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. If any are found, repair
flywheel with emery paper.
^ Check the flywheel runout. Refer to "FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T MODELS)".
Page 7424
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 1442
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6754
Case 5
Page 5512
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2989
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 10838
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1118
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8773
8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set
Page 13717
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 1067
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 5708
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3344
Available Piston
Piston Ring
Piston Pin
Page 8108
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7587
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 11868
Page 634
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 6723
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection
Page 6630
LAN-CAN-06
CAN System (Type 2)
Page 1217
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4939
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6788
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
Page 5756
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 8571
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 4811
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5602
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 2909
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Gear Oil
Type .................................... Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85
or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90.
Page 14198
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Description and Operation
Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power
transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the
proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
Page 11172
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 10350
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8575
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 13647
Page 1828
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11700
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12148
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
- When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
- When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
Page 12927
Towing Information: Service and Repair
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
- It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
- Always attach safety chains before towing.
- When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in good order.
If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
- Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
2WD MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and
move the transmission selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to OFF position
and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never
place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock
mechanism.
Page 357
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Balancing Wheels
Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels
Balancing Wheels
REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 8091
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11162
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 2092
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8824
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4993
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11862
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 2334
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1589
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1717
EC-O2S2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B2
Page 12707
5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled.
^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place.
6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector
holder as shown in Figure 4.
^ Remove and discard the old connector holder.
^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it).
7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4.
^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first.
9. Re-set the radio station presets.
Page 11818
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4147
Page 7840
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6069
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 10337
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10842
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13628
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2102
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1174
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Install oil pan (lower). Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
Install oil pan (upper).
Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. There are two types of bolts. Refer to the following for
locating bolts. M8 x 100 mm (3.97 inch) ..............................................................................................
................................................................................ 7, 11, 12, 13 M8 x 25 mm (0.98 inch) .................
........................................................................................................................................................
Except the above
Page 12173
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Page 7311
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 4821
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5453
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9461
Page 9482
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2310
Page 4307
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8486
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3443
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 14608
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11697
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 3548
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Testing and Inspection
Refueling Vapor Cut Valve: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to "FUEL TANK". 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one
side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c.
Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and
check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge
retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to "FUEL TANK". 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel
container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and
check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
Page 14812
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4909
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5614
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 5768
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3902
Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 11228
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12978
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6060
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37,
"CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking
System
Page 11437
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6169
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5774
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8762
a. Remove quick connector cap.
b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into
quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position.
CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts
and goes no further.
d. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as shown.
^ Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
^ Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
^ Avoid fire and sparks.
^ Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
3. Remove PCV hose between rocker covers (right and left banks). 4. Disconnect harness
connector from fuel injector.
5. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown, and remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly
CAUTION: Do not tilt it, or remaining fuel in pipes may flow out from pipes.
Page 3716
^ When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following:
CAUTION: ^
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket.
^ Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts "A" as shown).
28. Remove water pump. 29. Remove rear timing chain case as follows:
a. Loosen and remove bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. b. Cut liquid gasket using
Tool and remove rear timing chain case.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Do not remove plate metal cover of oil passage.
^ After removal, handle rear timing chain case carefully so it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a
load.
30. Remove O-rings from cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1).
Page 11305
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6911
Case 9
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 10487
3. Apply brake fluid to piston, then install piston into cylinder body and insert piston boot side lip
into groove of piston as shown.
CAUTION: Press the piston evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall.
4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
5. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
6. Install cylinder body Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components".
Page 7225
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11243
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 6919
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
Page 8074
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Tires: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Page 6303
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 14484
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Part 1
Part 2
Removal and Installation
Page 11740
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5237
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8841
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12032
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8117
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5154
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 3203
Disclaimer
Page 9332
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6924
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 9 - 11)
Page 12623
Part 2
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION)
For Rollover
Check the SRS components using the given table.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER
1. Replace the following components:
- Diagnosis sensor unit
- (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table.
- Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents,
cracks, deformation).
3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS
Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire
SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER
1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table.
- If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Page 3437
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Page 4986
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 737
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 4133
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. 2. Remove engine undercover
with power tool.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sensor 2 on both banks using Tool.
Tool number: KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2.
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
4. Remove center exhaust tube, main muffler and left front exhaust tube. 5. Remove exhaust
manifold cover (left bank).
Page 3083
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 6942
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 3130
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 12270
^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT.
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications.
Page 9223
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7338
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 14561
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11163
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4920
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 8528
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 5939
ITEMS OF EACH PART
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5093
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1020
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4375
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 12800
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 3912
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 14493
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5156
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 360
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Coil Spring And Strut
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Support the lower link using a
suitable jack. 3. Remove connecting rod upper joints from stabilizer bar using power tool. Refer to
"Components".
^ Swing stabilizer bar down, repositioning it out of the way to access shock absorber lower mount.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 7427
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 4896
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7677
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 6602
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2866
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure A/C Pipe
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the
heater pump connector. 3. Remove the heater pump from the bracket and reposition out of the
way. Do not disconnect the heater hoses from the heater pump. 4. Remove the low-pressure A/C
pipe. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 3482
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2488
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4278
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6774
Case 3
Page 9293
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11459
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4173
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 12910
2. Remove the front tweeter screws. 3. Disconnect the connector, and remove front tweeter from
instrument panel.
INSTALLATION - FRONT TWEETER
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL - REAR DOOR TWEETER (PREMIUM SYSTEM)
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR".
2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws. 3. Remove rear door tweeter from rear door finisher.
INSTALLATION - REAR DOOR TWEETER (PREMIUM SYSTEM)
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear door tweeter screws : 3.5 Nm (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
REMOVAL - SUBWOOFER (PREMIUM SYSTEM)
1. Remove the driver side front seat. Refer to "FRONT SEAT". 2. Remove the subwoofer bolts.
Page 3709
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Part 1
Page 251
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 12014
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6304
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 256
Page 7449
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 7798
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4135
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of
removal. Note the following:
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in direction as shown.
Exhaust Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CAUTION: ^
Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system
threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number:
J-43897-12 J-4389718
^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause
damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on.
REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove engine assembly.
Page 7949
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2527
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9585
Page 4641
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay
Page 7670
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4710
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6013
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12130
^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT.
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications.
Page 4563
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1434
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 11054
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Page 7794
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2811
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 4409
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 4212
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8718
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14063
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4667
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8232
EC-IVCB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 65
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 7292
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 2844
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1628
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4598
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 5901
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1810
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Front
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Front
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign
materials are stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and
cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
Page 6632
LAN-CAN-08
Page 6966
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 5317
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5981
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5087
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 276
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5809
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11533
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 7985
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9653
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6042
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7890
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14724
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4554
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 11461
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 8820
Page 7946
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 921
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8504
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5995
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 2105
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14026
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 8951
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 5812
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6998
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Page 4468
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 10329
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9278
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6239
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 6741
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection
Page 11837
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2042
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9370
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14072
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 2269
Page 13121
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is
turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
Page 10810
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12498
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a)
Page 7801
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11457
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13093
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5428
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6118
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5223
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9820
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 1484
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11367
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12605
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11449
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14376
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 370
Page 4803
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5125
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 7861
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2498
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4019
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4963
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 12346
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the blower motor resistor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8726
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 12841
Page 1731
Optional Splice
Part 1
Description and Operation
Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 7289
Page 6628
LAN-CAN-04
Page 4921
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 8203
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1513
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 113
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9587
Page 6594
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1799
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11962
Page 5451
Page 5429
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8428
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10219
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4619
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 10930
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12104
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs
to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch.
Caution:
Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the
highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this.
Page 9591
Page 7024
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8305
Page 13561
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 10904
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2029
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 5711
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 14031
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH
rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation".
3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank
opening.
- As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately
15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level.
a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the
fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank
through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank,
the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector.
- Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the
quick connector as follows:
- Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
- Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Page 3809
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1365
Page 4034
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair
2. Remove the three screws and remove the heater core cover. 3. Remove the heater core and
evaporator pipe bracket.
4. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION
Page 3036
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14228
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2831
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 6479
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1743
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5104
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7921
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 11843
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5000
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7663
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2270
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Reference: NTB09-001
Date: January 24, 2009
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT
AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807
NHTSA #: 08V-690
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier
(D40)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra,
and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that
regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water
and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on
roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in
a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle
operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags
in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan
dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor.
Eligible Vehicles
Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles
registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan,
Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the
campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check
Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The
CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues.
Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their
warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected
vehicles begins on January 26, 2009.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 903
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5332
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8152
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14875
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
Page 11607
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 6076
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1689
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11004
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2427
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 9972
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 13637
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11433
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13001
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10949
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5196
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5982
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1317
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 13739
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front left wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front left mud
guard. 3. Remove the front left splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a
(R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the high-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal
and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor
oil to it for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 4908
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5012
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Service and Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect both the positive and negative battery terminals.
CAUTION: Disconnect both the positive and negative battery terminals in advance.
2. Remove body side trim panels. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 3. Remove luggage floor trim
upper panels. Refer to "LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM". 4. Remove sun visor assemblies, both LH/RH.
5. Remove sun visor holders LH/RH. 6. Remove cargo hooks. 7. Remove assist grips. 8. Release
the clips and loosen the seat belt escutcheon from the headlining. 9. Remove the center and rear
room lamp assemblies.
10. Remove headlining.
Page 1122
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 816
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2239
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front door sill finisher and lift carpet. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts and
release the clip. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 7043
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 627
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 14152
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector.
3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14494
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8474
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7621
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8446
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 10745
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position
of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
Page 11667
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13404
NOTE:
For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if:
^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN,
^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm,
THEN
^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the
decal has been heated and rubbed.
9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all
along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the
side rail (see Figure 8).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is
familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on
painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal
firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9).
Page 6875
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 5 - 7)
Page 14702
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10962
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10580
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 5367
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5160
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5575
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2133
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7604
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7539
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 6664
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in Restraint Systems.
WARNING:
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see Restraint Systems.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 3188
9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from
steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components for tightening torques".
CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin.
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment".
Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection".
Page 12975
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 637
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 6019
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9502
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Page 5750
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3284
Standard (intake and exhaust): 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch)
VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE ^
(Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) - (Valve lifter outer diameter), Refer to "Valve
Clearance". Standard (intake and exhaust): 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch)
^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer
diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head.
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
Page 10348
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9383
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 6484
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10352
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3645
Page EM-18
Page 10808
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 161
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4622
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses
these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 4545
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 10558
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the
rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to
replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis.
^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads.
^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local
environmental regulations to decide which brake
cleaner to use.
^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES.
1. Remove the front brake calipers.
^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information.
Page 14473
LT-T/TOW-01
Page 13958
Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations
Page 14649
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5541
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3885
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 7160
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8052
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6070
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8385
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4230
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6513
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 11689
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3555
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1800
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6554
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 14451
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3250
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9413
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4283
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3434
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 8041
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Idle speed ............................................................................................................................................
.................... More than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) 2,000 ................................................................
...................................................................................................... More than 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2,
43 psi) Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)
Page 4072
Page 9296
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4060
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13503
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 1136
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 10363
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the
terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
Page 7235
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9220
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12547
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 3684
20. Remove front timing chain case as follows:
a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off
case by moving tool as shown (2).
- Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: - Do not use screwdriver or something similar. - After removal, handle front timing chain
case carefully so it does not twist, bend, or warp under a load.
21. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 22. If necessary, remove water pump cover and
chain tensioner cover from front timing chain case.
- Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
Page 13621
Page 7183
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1272
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (CONSULT-II)
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen.
4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored.
When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Combination Switch Reading Function
Combination Switch Reading Function
For details, refer to Body Control System, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION".
Page 7462
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Page 13816
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3294
^ Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with micrometer since valve lifter is in
barrel shape. Standard (intake and exhaust): 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch)
VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER
^ Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with inside micrometer. Standard
(intake and exhaust): 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch)
VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE ^
(Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) - (Valve lifter outer diameter), Refer to "Valve
Clearance". Standard (intake and exhaust): 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch)
^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer
diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head.
INSTALLATION
1. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) on both sides of cylinder head.
^ Install timing chain tensioner with its stopper pin attached.
^ Install timing chain tensioner with sliding part facing downward on right-side cylinder head, and
with sliding part facing upward on left-side cylinder head.
^ Install new O-rings as shown.
2. Install valve lifters. ^
Install it in the original position.
3. Install camshafts. ^
Install camshaft with dowel pin attached to its front end face on the exhaust side.
Page 6121
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12591
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8473
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5816
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 3726
6-25: 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.)
e. After all bolts tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
14. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown.
Front oil pan bolt torque: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.)
15. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows:
a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to intake valve timing control covers as
shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides).
d. Being careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing
chain case with the holes to install intake
valve timing control covers. ^
Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
16. Install crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal.
^ When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not
circumference).
b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
Page 3577
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
^ Oil pressure check should be done in "Parking position" (A/T models).
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". 2. Remove undercover with power tool.
3. Disconnect oil pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure sensor, and remove oil pressure sensor.
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure sensor.
5. Install Tools.
Tool numbers ST25051001 (J-25695-1) ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check oil pressure with engine
running under no-load.
NOTE: When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high.
Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)]
If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks a. Remove old liquid gasket
adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor
to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) c. After warming up engine, make sure
there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine.
Page 2886
Coolant: Application and ID
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION: ^
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water
or distilled water.
^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Page 822
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7520
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 6918
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection
Page 12049
9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from
steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components for tightening torques".
CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin.
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment".
Page 6832
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 2479
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9725
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 60
Page 10524
2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in
Figures 1 and 2.
^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer.
3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order.
Page 4097
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13188
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 14576
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 11776
^ This will position the two new oil cooler brackets (see Figure 2).
^ There is no need to connect the oil cooler hoses at this time.
3. Using the added brackets, mark the location of the two (2) new holes to be drilled with a suitable
marker (see Figure 3).
4. After marking, dismount and move the new oil cooler out of the way.
5. Place suitable protective covering (approx. 10 x 20cm) in between the condenser and the area to
be drilled (see Figure 4).
^ Support the covering by clamping it to the radiator support bracket see Figure 4).
Page 12275
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the
hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to
"Removal and
Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power
tool.
7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Page 2251
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Occupant Classification System
The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants,
and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system
receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat
cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and
located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant
classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis
sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air
bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator.
Page 668
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 3418
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 4510
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 11381
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4267
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 3668
Page EM-9
Page 942
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Page 11057
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 10367
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures
Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures
Classification: EM09-012
Reference: NTB10-001
Date: January 4, 2010
2005-2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; REVISED VQ40 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN
PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) - VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
- VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the VQ40 engine front timing chain case and timing chains
(primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and
intake collector.
In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain
tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe.
Nissan Service Manuals for 2005-2010 Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles will be updated
with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as
possible.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown in this
bulletin for any VQ40 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related
repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR - FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
Page 7523
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 1825
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4095
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4408
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 11851
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Page 13600
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2071
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 6073
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7795
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 836
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 2054
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1026
Service and Repair
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag
module. Refer to "REMOVAL". 3. Disconnect the steering wheel switches. 4. Remove the steering
wheel center nut.
5. Remove the steering wheel, using Tools.
Tool number: A: - (J-1859A) B: - (J-42578)
CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position.
6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damage is found, replace the
steering wheel.
^ Remove the steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align the spiral cable correctly when installing the steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is
in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right
end position and ending with the locating pin at the top.
CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the cable is installed in an
improper position or if the steering wheel is turned beyond the limited number of turns with the
steering linkage disconnected. (The spiral cable can be turned up to 2.6 turns from the neutral
position to both the right and left.)
Page 13064
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 14352
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9518
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 4481
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 2598
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 12389
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4482
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 8131
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13740
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 4941
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1529
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10516
^ Make sure the shims are installed as shown in Figure 1.
^ Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the outboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 1).
^ Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1
and 2.
^ NEVER interchange the greases used in this bulletin. These greases have completely different
characteristics and properties. They are only compatible
with the specific areas they are intended for.
^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer.
Page 8172
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6057
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12301
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Mix Door Motor
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three
screws and remove the air mix door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10351
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5615
Page 12995
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7133
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 9593
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 1861
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6953
Information Bus: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR ECM
Page 8669
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8166
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11366
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4317
Page 11806
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the
following items are found. ^
Deformed or damaged pulley, bracket, connector or suction pipe.
^ Oil leakage from the suction pipe or connector.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Mount the power steering oil pump in a vise as needed.
1. Remove the connector bolt, connector and copper washers.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washers.
2. Remove the suction pipe and O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring.
3. Remove the pulley. 4. Remove the bracket bolts and bracket.
ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse the copper gaskets
^ Do not reuse the O-ring. Apply a coat of Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent to the O-ring.
Page 11326
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6298
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 5631
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 4585
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
LAN System Component Parts
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9191
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7749
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10112
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9469
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5197
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Specifications
Valve Seat: Specifications
Page 7168
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4805
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7412
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Reference: NTB09-001
Date: January 24, 2009
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT
AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807
NHTSA #: 08V-690
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier
(D40)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra,
and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that
regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water
and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on
roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in
a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle
operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags
in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan
dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor.
Eligible Vehicles
Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles
registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan,
Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the
campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check
Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The
CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues.
Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their
warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected
vehicles begins on January 26, 2009.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13709
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5802
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions.
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Page 9194
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9668
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7337
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 258
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8448
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5497
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8584
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.
a. Pull the connector lock back to unlock the connector from the accelerator pedal position sensor
as shown. b. Pull up on the connector to disconnect it from the accelerator pedal position sensor as
shown.
3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the accelerator pedal
assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Accelerator pedal total pedal: 48 mm (1.89 in) applied stroke "A"
- Check that the accelerator pedal smoothly returns to the original position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to "DTC P2138
APP SENSOR". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble
Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2138
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4659
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 160
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 11239
Repair Flow Chart
Page 14662
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14407
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
For details, refer to "SPIRAL CABLE".
Page 2540
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13659
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10787
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5169
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 5783
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11111
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6771
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 10255
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14528
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (CONSULT-II)
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen.
4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored.
When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Combination Switch Reading Function
Combination Switch Reading Function
For details, refer to Body Control System, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION".
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14497
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10164
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 2053
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4157
Page 1527
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4342
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 6195
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13585
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9620
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5057
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1843
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7047
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8823
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 4181
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 5203
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10879
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 13917
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 14260
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14310
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1904
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 10276
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6743
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 11801
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 12377
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14603
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8476
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3653
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 12029
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1233
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4086
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3086
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Page 7012
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 6683
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3
Input/output signal chart
Locations
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Locations
Page 1129
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13931
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 3182
^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT.
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications.
Page 5626
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 14284
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 6)
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)
Page 6024
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3678
Page EM-19
Page 3865
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 6471
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8817
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6369
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 12541
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1240
Front
Page 7997
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3906
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 14605
Page 8475
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1926
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2198
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 5833
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6974
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6757
Case 8
Page 8676
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6950
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 8)
Page 6925
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 12 - 14)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 11123
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7754
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6973
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7093
Page 8937
Page 10603
REAR DRUM BRAKE
Page 198
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5243
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13590
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1547
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6267
Page 8557
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 7435
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4754
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13571
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 135
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9299
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 14719
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10834
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 2401
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 4610
Page 13549
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 8095
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 604
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4827
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3783
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin.
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
Page 14145
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6698
Case 2
Page 10192
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13478
5. Position seat cushion rear bracket out of the way as needed. (See Figure 5)
6. Align shaft linkage on both inner and outer sides by inserting pins into shaft link slots.
NOTE:
^ In some cases, the white bushing I clip may come off the shaft. If this occurred, reinstall the clip
to it's proper position (refer to Figure 1). The seat back will need to be removed to do this.
^ Using the recliner handle lever may assist with aligning pin and shaft linkage.
7. Reinstall seat cushion rear bracket (but do not fully tighten bolts).
8. Place seat on its side.
9. Adjust seat cushion rear bracket. (See Figure 6)
NOTE:
Adjust to the minimum width by pushing both seat sides together while tightening lower bracket
bolts.
Page 1629
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13017
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1893
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2950
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 2160
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4715
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4183
Page 12024
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7112
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 14254
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9777
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7979
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 645
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
Page 11356
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 963
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4435
Page 1013
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 513
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 2110
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7283
Page 2280
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7860
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 7162
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14083
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 5960
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Cruise Control Switch: Locations
Page 9091
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 1533
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4511
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 8732
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector
circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon
the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
Page 1936
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14846
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM".
a. Disconnect the antenna. b. If the window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with
mating marks. c. Remove the glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump
bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane
adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by
applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if
necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Page 9417
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6769
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 12 - 14)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change
.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
3/8 qt. (4 1/2 Imp qts., 5.1 L) Without oil filter change
...................................................................................................................................................... 5
1/8 qt. (4 1/4 Imp qts., 4.8 L)
Page 4385
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 1690
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4905
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10789
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8656
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Fuse and Fusible Link Box
Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 2618
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 12320
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 7987
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge
Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5763
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as
necessary. Refer to Drain and Refill.
NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle.
3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the
vehicle.
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 12994
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6512
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 9792
Page 11756
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the
hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to
"Removal and
Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power
tool.
7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Page 4698
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 2049
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 8157
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 129
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 279
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6639
LAN-CAN-15
CAN System (Type 5)
Page 11290
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5411
Page 11695
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 13547
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Components
Page 10489
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer for union bolt.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Install tires to the
vehicle.
Disassembly and Assembly
Part 1
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
Page 5283
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14584
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7536
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 5520
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagnostic Aids
Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9818
11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 5514
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7493
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Description and Operation
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM
uses this signal for engine control.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise
Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 14726
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 5231
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5278
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7580
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8986
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 188
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1440
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5859
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 11442
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity ..........................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 0.70 kg
(1.54 lb)
Page 5742
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7438
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 1983
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2088
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5795
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8644
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6384
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 55
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14440
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14157
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12030
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5419
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 788
Page 6491
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12762
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Clutch Fluid ......................................................................................................................... Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3
Page 592
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14394
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8231
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams
EC-IVCB1
EC-IVCB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-IVCB2
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 254
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11074
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10573
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 1756
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5932
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control
unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 6610
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8871
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5843
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10125
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2449
Page 6094
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 13101
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6421
Page 13861
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12330
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 6579
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9269
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6497
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 332
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4673
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1395
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 131
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7050
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4290
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1256
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Service and Repair
Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP
Removal
NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access.
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.
Page 8977
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5349
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 12966
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Page 7417
Page 14437
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7478
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11089
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11961
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Page 14568
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1771
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13060
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 7528
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 3904
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 1228
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10799
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3944
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC
3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86,
"ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments
Page 14270
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9141
Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Description and Operation
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It
responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and
feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator.
Page 7253
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 5204
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 10861
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1400
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6843
Case 8
Page 4915
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11688
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 11249
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Tightening Torques & Sequences
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences
Exhaust Manifold
LEFT BANK ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque ..................................................................................................................................... 14.7
Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
RIGHT BANK ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque ..................................................................................................................................... 14.7
Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Page 2228
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Connect C-III to the vehicle.
3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs.
a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode.
b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function.
^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform
repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure.
^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this
bulletin.
NOTE:
All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with
this procedure.
4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds.
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9180
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 7597
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5354
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6981
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 7661
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6387
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 13793
Page 1108
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 1380
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11225
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4088
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 938
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1329
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 12025
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1357
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7791
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9374
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13881
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14154
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11906
9. Remove the high pressure and low pressure piping from the steering gear assembly, then drain
the fluid from the piping.
10. Remove the bolt from the lower joint of the lower joint shaft, then separate the lower joint from
the steering gear assembly.
CAUTION: ^
Do not damage the lower joint.
11. Remove the nuts and bolts of the steering gear assembly, using power tool, then remove the
steering gear assembly from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
With the steering wheel in the straight ahead position, align the slit of the lower joint with the
projection on the dust cover. Insert the joint until surface A contacts surface B.
^ After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. Refer to
"Front Wheel Alignment".
^ After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to
"Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
^ Bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. Refer to "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ Check that the steering wheel turns smoothly to the left and right locks.
^ Check that the number of turns are the same from the straight-forward position to the left and
right locks.
^ Check that the steering wheel is in the neutral position when driving straight ahead.
Page 6995
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1073
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy.
5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical
connector.
6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal.
Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Classification: RS05-006
Reference: NTB06-046
Date: June 13, 2006
2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN
CIRCUIT (DTC B1134)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit,
and
The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or
partially,
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not
disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
ACTION
Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in
the Parts Information.
IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be
performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13703
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10991
Page 8358
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 13684
Page 4737
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1187
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9368
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6509
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 5767
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5826
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9058
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8805
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
Page 8318
Page 5964
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5906
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5702
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5941
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 158
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4013
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6750
Case 1
Page 4757
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13098
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1493
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13249
Hood Latch: Adjustments
HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT
1. Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock
center (when viewed from vehicle front).
2. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own
weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87
in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N, 7lb).
CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or higher.
3. After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified torque.
Page 391
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 11967
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 162
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Daytime running lamps (Canada only)
- Parking lamps
- Tail lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window
defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped).
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each
control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown.
Page 13000
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9584
Page 8452
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 12308
RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCTS
Removal
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts. 4.
Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the center ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the floor connector duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT AND REAR FLOOR DUCTS
Removal
1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to "FLOOR TRIM". 2. Remove the clips and front and rear floor
ducts.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
GRILLES
Removal
1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to
"INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" and "BODY
SIDE TRIM".
2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14197
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7456
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 4802
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12538
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 14822
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 2231
Page 10469
Check brake pedal for following items. ^
Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper
^ Clevis pin deformation
^ Crack of any welded portion
^ Brake pedal bend
INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the brake pedal.
^ After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Refer to "Inspection
and Adjustment".
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on the reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures
of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: ^
Do not overfill.
^ Do not reuse any power steering fluid.
^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS
AND LUBRICANTS".
Page 8631
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 7558
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1645
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8997
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Service and Repair
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair
CAB AND REAR BODY
Body Mounting
- When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used
for all mounting).
- Unless otherwise noted, the bushings and insulators have paint marks that are to be installed
facing outward.
Page 2332
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8863
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay
Page 1909
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6236
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as
necessary. Refer to Drain and Refill.
NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle.
3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the
vehicle.
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
Page 4861
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1457
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5770
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 220
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 4630
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 2286
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8369
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14370
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4550
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 8500
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7682
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8652
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1684
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8132
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5860
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 12481
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 11487
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11316
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 7602
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3832
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10517
^ Make sure to install the brake pad spreader spring as shown in Figure 3.
Rear Brakes
1. This step was missing from the OE bulletin.
2. Replace the rear brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit.
^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit).
^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service
information.
IMPORTANT:
Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the inboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 3).
3. Reinstall all other parts removed in reverse order.
Page 9659
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 12584
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 9215
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14259
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1740
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4233
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12791
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 5781
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4917
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5894
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3900
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition
switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5
seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
Page 1362
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9388
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2330
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4479
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 7876
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5759
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 8900
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3059
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Page 11066
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7802
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5695
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5290
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2257
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 10852
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5049
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6105
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2393
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 10211
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11127
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Page 5837
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 636
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 8957
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 8895
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1337
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12716
10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit.
Page 326
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2302
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4544
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 10023
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
Page 5026
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 11206
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9021
Page 6851
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Diagnostic Aids
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6342
Page 8032
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6302
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2004
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 8212
Page 7601
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 12928
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Speed: Below 95 km/h (60 MPH) Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles)
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
- Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
- Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
- Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
- Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing
or recovery.
Page 9306
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.
- It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is
malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance............................................................................................................................................
....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Page 3246
Page 2128
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9063
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4992
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Front Timing Chain Case
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Front Timing Chain Case
"The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB-NTB10-001"
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
1. O-ring 2. Collared O-ring 3. Intake valve timing control cover (RH) 4. Idler pulley 5. Drive belt
auto tensioner 6. Intake valve timing control cover (LH) 7. Collared O-ring 8. O-ring 9. Chain
tensioner cover 10. Cooling fan bracket 11. Crankshaft pulley 12. Front oil seal 13. Water pump
cover 14. Front timing chain case 15. O-ring A. Refer to Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1.Remove engine room cover. 2.Drain engine oil.
CAUTION: - Perform this step when engine is cold. - Do not spill engine oil on drive belts.
3. Drain engine coolant from radiator.
CAUTION:
Page 9444
CAUTION: ^
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14243
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
C200
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts
Page 11240
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 7564
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5179
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11432
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5443
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7067
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to
the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at
the specified range.
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an
oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a
heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C
(1,292 - 1,472 °F).
Page 8349
a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper.
b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry.
c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer).
d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour.
8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows:
a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown.
b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4.
c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5.
Page 10196
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14242
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7238
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4089
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9487
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 5361
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7145
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2369
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 738
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 7605
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12345
Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection
Blower Motor Resistor
Check continuity between terminals. There will be resistance, but there should not be an open or
short between any two terminals.
Page 1401
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8802
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Page 4784
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 5150
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14628
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9218
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12524
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8562
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 2162
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 892
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 6536
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 7507
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 2119
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 6982
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 635
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Page 8958
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 3045
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10800
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 10104
Page 1456
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11124
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4175
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Front Side Air Bag
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Front Side Air Bag
Front Side Air Bag
Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags
are equipped with labels as shown.
Page 8180
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5706
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9617
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 8094
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4982
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4600
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Testing and Inspection
Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to "CLUTCH PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 3297
6. Measure the difference in levels between front end faces of camshaft bracket (No. 1) and
cylinder head.
Standard: -0.14 to 0.14 mm (-0.0055 to 0.0055 inch) ^
Measure two positions (both intake and exhaust side) for a single bank.
^ If the measured value is out of the standard, re-install camshaft bracket (No. 1).
7. Check and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to "Valve Clearance". 8. Installation of the
remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove
CAUTION: ^
Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0021 are detected in self-diagnostic results of
CONSULT-II and it is directed according to inspection procedure. Refer to EC-130, "SELF-DIAG
RESULTS MODE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (Consult-II)/Self-Diag
Results Mode
^ Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL". 2. Perform the following procedure so as to
prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking.
a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". b. Disconnect ignition coil and
injector harness connectors.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
4. Crank the engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from camshaft bracket (No. 1)
oil hole. End crank after checking.
WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley,
etc.).
CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from intake valve timing control solenoid valve installation hole
during cranking. Use a shop cloth to prevent the engine components and the vehicle. Do not allow
engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belt or engine mount insulators. Immediately
wipe off any splashed engine oil.
^ Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve if engine oil
does not come out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. Refer to "LUBRICATION SYSTEM".
5. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket
(INT), and then check each oil groove for
clogging. ^
Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to "LUBRICATION SYSTEM".
6. After inspection, install removed parts.
Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and
exhaust gases leaks. ^
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer
Page 14682
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4285
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11686
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8119
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12037
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12006
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2277
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9844
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Inspection and Adjustment After Removal
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc
^ Check the clutch disc for wear of facing. Wear limit (depth to rivet head): 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ Measure the circumference runout at the point indicated. If it is outside the specification, replace
the clutch disc. Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) or less/250
mm (9.84 inch) dia.
^ Measure the backlash of the clutch disc spline at the circumference of the disc. If it is outside the
specification, replace the clutch disc. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer disc edge): 1.0 mm
(0.039 inch)
Clutch Cover
With the clutch cover installed on the vehicle, check the diaphragm spring toe height for
unevenness. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust the height using Tool. Uneven limit of diaphragm
spring toe height: 0.7mm (0.028 inch) Tool number: ST20050240 (-) ^
Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear or breakage is found, replace clutch
cover assembly.
NOTE: ^
Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer.
^ Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down.
^ If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact
surface, repair the surface with emery paper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace the
assembly.
Flywheel
Page 5370
Page 12469
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure A/C Pipe
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the
heater pump connector. 3. Remove the heater pump from the bracket and reposition out of the
way. Do not disconnect the heater hoses from the heater pump. 4. Remove the low-pressure A/C
pipe. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 5189
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8006
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2048
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3780
-When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following:
CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do
not loosen bolts (A) as shown).
NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary)
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Page 6881
Case 3
Page 13873
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Axle Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
Page 14671
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10365
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 2662
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 11434
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14800
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Housing Assembly HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 6819
Case 5
Page 14589
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9556
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 313
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14927
3. Install rear wiper arm and blade so that the blade is parallel with the lower edge of back glass as
shown and tighten wiper arm nut to specification.
Rear wiper arm nut: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)
Page 2902
Disclaimer
Page 3533
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. 1.
Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.
2. Insert oil level gauge and make sure the engine oil level is within the range as indicated on
gauge. 3. If the engine oil is out of range, add oil as necessary.
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
^ Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
^ If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Page 1302
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6214
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4205
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 6884
Case 6
Page 9597
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 10149
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Oil Leakage and Oil Level
Checking
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL
Page 9695
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 13763
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10039
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT".
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly.
^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play
Page 662
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 6144
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9420
Page 5863
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 8057
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 8395
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10983
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 12802
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 5045
Page 7216
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or
change setting value for each item according to the
configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration
items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the
CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be
manually set or changed.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting
vehicle model cannot be memorized.
Page 10490
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from
cylinder body.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston
and piston boot.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, (KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot into piston groove.
Page 9468
Page 4877
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 1131
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2203
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5502
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8279
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7586
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 13336
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 4241
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5529
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 14368
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11169
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6368
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 319
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4127
Exhaust Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CAUTION: ^
Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system
threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number:
J-43897-12 J-4389718
^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause
damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on.
Page 11623
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 219
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 1332
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1027
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6955
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR BCM
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Page 11589
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1748
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 7056
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9437
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1866
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14745
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1148
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5082
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the
monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000
rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes
between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above
0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd
gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
Page 4755
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2854
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9504
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 13114
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 5684
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13453
11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel
or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9.
12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative
cable last), and reset the radio stations.
Disclaimer
Page 515
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 14256
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5549
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 11552
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 13082
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6448
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 2271
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11530
Repair Flow Chart
Page 2467
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7375
Page 9139
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11679
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4529
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 4789
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 546
Page 10267
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 778
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1644
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4766
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13415
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE
PROCEDURE
1. Preparation for seat removal.
^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make
sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS.
^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors:
A. Write down all radio station presets.
B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 13526
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 13085
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8055
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 11591
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 12965
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2817
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 3454
Page 405
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 7873
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4485
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 13685
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4801
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 3585
c. Disconnect harness connector. d. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
CAUTION: ^
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to electric throttle control actuator.
^ Do not disassemble.
4. Remove the following parts:
^ Vacuum hose (to brake booster)
^ PCV hose
5. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown to remove intake manifold collector support. 6.
Disconnect EVAP hoses and harness connector from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve. 7. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. Remove VIAS control
solenoid valve and vacuum tank.
^ Add mating marks as necessary for easier installation.
9. Loosen nuts and bolts in reverse order as shown with power tool, and remove intake manifold
collector.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Intake Manifold Collector ^
If stud bolts were removed from intake manifold, install them and tighten to the specified torque.
Page 8526
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 5146
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the
partition glass.
5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and
screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
- Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm
(0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
Rear Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch.
4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Page 2496
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 991
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 8248
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of
removal. Note the following:
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in direction as shown.
Exhaust Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CAUTION: ^
Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system
threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number:
J-43897-12 J-4389718
^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause
damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on.
REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove engine assembly.
Page 6687
ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II
Page 2615
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 7391
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 11390
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level
LEVEL CHECK
^ Check that the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is within specification, between the MAX and
MIN lines as shown.
^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after the parking brake pedal is released, check the
brake system for any brake fluid leaks.
Page 8680
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 6878
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 12640
5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled.
^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place.
6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector
holder as shown in Figure 4.
^ Remove and discard the old connector holder.
^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it).
7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4.
^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first.
9. Re-set the radio station presets.
Page 13749
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8556
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6975
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5782
Page 10878
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10760
Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle
at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator
lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off.
Page 9346
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 12996
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10042
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the
hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to
"Removal and
Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power
tool.
7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Page 11263
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 2692
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 9019
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13915
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 8906
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2350
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 50
NOTE:
For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if:
^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN,
^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm,
THEN
^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the
decal has been heated and rubbed.
9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all
along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the
side rail (see Figure 8).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is
familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on
painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal
firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9).
Page 7228
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2113
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8151
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14505
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Side Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open
Classification: RS05-006
Reference: NTB06-046
Date: June 13, 2006
2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN
CIRCUIT (DTC B1134)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit,
and
The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or
partially,
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not
disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
ACTION
Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in
the Parts Information.
IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be
performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1472
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 13694
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4394
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 8561
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Diagnostic Aids
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7316
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 10853
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6385
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 6252
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11277
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8492
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1081
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 9823
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal".
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
Page 8814
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9630
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection
A/T FLUID CHECK
Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check ^
Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level.
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Page 5563
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5823
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5699
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11960
Lot Number Locations.
Page 3634
Page EM-7
Page 10116
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9006
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6770
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 2317
Page 4528
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 12448
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy.
5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical
connector.
6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal.
Page 6847
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection
Page 5261
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2281
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 4536
Page 13074
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4962
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Locations
Page 8128
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7588
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 10832
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7888
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 13615
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11)
Page 6311
Page 986
EC-ASCBOF-01
Page 4455
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 9080
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3943
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC
d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at
TDC of compression stroke.
Page 6963
Optional Splice
Part 1
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in
the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and
resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 1694
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9329
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1877
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2266
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11045
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1773
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4376
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 3784
b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are
visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to
re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark.
Page 8772
Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment
Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool
AST tool# 8026
5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to
2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models
- 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool
- Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction
- See Application Chart
- Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set.
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943
This Tool is also available in the following kits:
Page 7940
Page 1712
EC-AF1B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB1
Page 13559
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
Page 1676
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8827
Page 14859
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Testing and Inspection
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 233
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 11825
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10820
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14588
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6860
Case 4
Page 6510
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 5359
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10548
CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the
level of the surface of reservoir tank.
2. Attach pad retainer to torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it sits flush in the torque member,
as shown.
3. Install pads making sure they are firmly attached. 4. Rotate cylinder body down and install lower
sliding pin bolt then tighten to specification. Refer to "Components". 5. Check brake for drag. 6.
Install wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation".
Page 3446
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5420
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2367
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12462
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10656
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 11846
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2706
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Part 1
Contaminated Refrigerant
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Contaminated Refrigerant
Contaminated Refrigerant
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
- Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
- Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and
refrigerant supply.
- Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the
contamination may have occurred.
- If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and
containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your
facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product
retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and
local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is
recommended.
- If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact
NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
Page 4907
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6115
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6161
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1181
13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP
hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel
tank.
15. Remove the lock ring using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-45722)
16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
CAUTION:
- Do not bend the float arm during installation.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then
check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 5785
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14681
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8208
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2039
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 14586
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2741
Valve clearance
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown
(locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC
c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at
TDC of its compression stroke.
NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to
rotation angle.
Page 14775
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1445
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Component Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 132
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1115
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4781
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8737
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 6)
Page 1630
Page 9799
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3452
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 10334
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4779
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12021
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11429
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Component Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6031
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1864
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10508
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the
rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to
replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis.
^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads.
^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local
environmental regulations to decide which brake
cleaner to use.
^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES.
1. Remove the front brake calipers.
^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information.
Page 8602
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2147
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7503
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Page 14398
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11155
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7082
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7989
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8290
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7147
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 1840
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4125
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of
removal. Note the following:
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in direction as shown.
Exhaust Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CAUTION: ^
Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system
threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number:
J-43897-12 J-4389718
^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause
damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on.
REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove engine assembly.
Page 1938
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9658
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3325
Part 2
Page 13672
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
LAN System Component Parts
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8096
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 13755
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9369
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14024
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 5498
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11568
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 5769
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
C200
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair C200
Part 1
Page 6625
LAN-CAN-01
Page 9980
3. Rotate the pinion three or four times using Tool and record the rotating torque.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
4. Remove the drive pinion lock nut, using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000 (-)
5. Put a matching mark on the end of the drive pinion in line with the matching mark B on the
companion flange.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the drive pinion. Do not damage the
companion flange or drive pinion.
6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool.
7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool.
Page 13067
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 2155
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 328
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5094
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7984
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2027
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12986
LT-T/TOW-04
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 5183
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8105
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 3040
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6857
Case 1
Page 8911
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector.
3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4597
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Front
Front final drive oil 0.85L (1 3/4 pt US, 1 1/2 pt Imp)
C200
Rear final drive oil C200
.................................................................................................................................................... 1.6L
(3 3/8 pt US, 2 7/8 pt Imp.)
M226
M226 ....................................................................................................................................................
............................. 2.0L (4 1/4 pt. US, 3 1/2 pt. Imp)
Page 8285
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7083
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14170
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Lamp Switch
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
^ Check continuity.
Page 5115
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3688
b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows:
i. Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting
point, make entire front timing chain case
contact rear timing chain case completely.
ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while
holding front timing chain case from front
and top as shown.
iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and
top completely.
d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. e. After all bolts are tightened,
retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. - There are two type of bolts
Bolt position Bolt diameter
1 - 5 : 10 mm (0.39 in) 6 - 25 : 6 mm (0.24 in)
Bolt position Tightening specification
1 - 5 : 55.0 N-m (5.6 kg-m, 41 ft-lb) 6 - 25 : 12.7 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
Page 5187
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3247
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7255
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10198
Page 490
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 6654
LAN-CAN-30
CAN System (Type 10)
Page 3261
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6197
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11423
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13929
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 4425
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 3267
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
IVT CONTROL
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of
the intake valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and
engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the
shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in
high-speed range.
IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the
ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through
intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
Page 450
Page 2189
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 6207
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Description and Operation
Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation
VOLTAGE GAUGE
The voltage gauge indicates the battery/charging system voltage.
The voltage gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit.
Page 6801
Case 6
Page 7832
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1543
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8909
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Page 1135
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 970
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 14261
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5517
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9126
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8930
Page 10860
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 14372
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 3821
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7208
ITEMS OF EACH PART
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Instruments - Mirror Actuator Availability/Service
Power Mirror Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Mirror Actuator Availability/Service
Classification: BT06-007a
Reference: NTB07-067a
Date: August 9, 2007
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; DOOR MIRROR ACTUATOR AVAILABLE SEPARATELY
This bulletin has been amended. Applied Vehicles has been amended. Please discard all copies of
the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51), 2005-2007 Xterra (N50), 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The left or right side door mirror actuator (power or manual) doesn't work and needs to be replaced
for any reason.
ACTION
Replace only the Actuator Assembly, not the whole mirror.
NOTE:
In manual door mirrors, the "Actuator Assemble" allows the mirror to pivot for manual adjustment.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completeing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mirror:
A. Angle the mirror all the way UP.
Page 5856
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 8664
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12545
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 10024
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
Page 6940
Case 14
Case 15
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 922
Page 5348
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 5395
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4912
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1299
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 11215
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8876
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 191
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 5611
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
ABS
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 2289
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 11389
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 8639
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 14612
Page 3706
- After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
Timing Chain Tensioner
1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket
(EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8.
Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft
sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide
Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover. 2. Remove engine under cover. 3. Partially drain engine coolant. 4.
Remove lower fan shroud. 5. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hose and remove air duct and
resonator assembly.
Page 7648
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8189
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 14818
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2700
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 4964
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6984
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4734
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5459
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection
Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve
specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inch Hg) for 15 seconds
under a vacuum of - 66.7 kPa (- 500 mmHg, - 19.69 inch Hg)
Page 3410
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 5158
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8270
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2524
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3314
^ If replacing connecting rod assembly, refer to "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL
CLEARANCE" to select the connecting rod bearing.
Factory installed parts grading:
^ Service parts apply only to grade "0".
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method by Calculation
^ Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and cap, and tighten connecting rod bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing with inside micrometer. (Bearing oil
clearance) = (Connecting rod bearing inner diameter) - (Crankshaft pin journal diameter) Standard:
0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 inch) (actual clearance) Limit: 0.070 mm (0.0028 inch)
^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, select proper connecting rod bearing according to
connecting rod big end diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter to obtain the specified bearing
oil clearance. Refer to "HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING".
Method of Using Plastigage ^
Remove oil and dust on crankshaft pin journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
^ Cut plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction,
avoiding oil holes.
^ Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and cap, and tighten connecting rod bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
Page 6731
Case 1
Page 10259
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 11826
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1205
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14772
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14424
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1862
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12668
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Connect C-III to the vehicle.
3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs.
a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode.
b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function.
^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform
repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure.
^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this
bulletin.
NOTE:
All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with
this procedure.
4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds.
Front
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
- Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if
necessary. Standard thickness: 11.88 mm (0.468 inch) Repair limit thickness: 2.0 mm (0.079 inch)
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5113
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12334
Blower Motor: Description and Operation
Front Blower Motor Circuit
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Blower speed control system components are:
- Front air control
- Front blower motor resistor
- Front blower motor
- Front blower motor relay
System Operation
Page 462
Page 13402
A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away
from the side rail (see Figure 3).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with
paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic
body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough
to soften the decal for easy removal.
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
B. Peel away the damaged decal.
C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt.
CAUTION:
DO NOT use lacquer thinner.
New Decal - Apply:
5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4).
Page 292
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to INFORMATION BUS".
Page 8235
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt
it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the
coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed.
Page 5165
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6046
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8394
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10633
3. Apply brake fluid to piston, then install piston into cylinder body and insert piston boot side lip
into groove of piston as shown.
CAUTION: Press the piston evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall.
4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
5. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
6. Install cylinder body Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components".
Page 2745
Exhaust
Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Available Valve Lifter
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.)
6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn
crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the
specifications by referring to the specified values.
Page 12131
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts ^
Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Page 6737
Case 7
Page 2644
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe-In
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the
vehicle straight ahead about 5 meters (16 ft.).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub
center as shown. These marks are measuring points.
4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly
ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again
from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward.
6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total
toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B".
Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)".
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length L: Refer to POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Page 11519
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7415
Page 12051
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection".
Page 12363
1. Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head.
2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring
pliers.
Tool number: -(J-38873-A)
4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the
clutch disc down by hand.
5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the
bolt to specification. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Tool number : J-44614
CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly.
Page 8929
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 6165
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 13804
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1469
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10817
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4799
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6575
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7620
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6894
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 8206
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4229
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7341
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 12884
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 8832
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14575
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1941
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 10342
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12805
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Off-Vehicle Check
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor
assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in
the
illustration.
15 degrees or less tilt: Belt can be pulled out. 35 degrees or more tilt: Belt locks and cannot be
pulled out.
If the retractor does not operate within specifications, replace the retractor assembly.
Page 11157
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6896
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 12323
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 7841
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3184
^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT".
Rear Axle Bearing ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly.
^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play
Page 11082
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5279
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 493
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 4759
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9998
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5583
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 4768
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4965
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8570
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 13020
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11634
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster
CAMBER AND CASTER
Page 2335
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14439
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5468
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6647
LAN-CAN-23
Page 1111
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4682
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3458
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 9714
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Air Conditioner Control
Control Assembly: Description and Operation Air Conditioner Control
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Description
The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based
on the position of the front air control temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by
utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from
the following two sensors:
- Intake sensor
- PBR (position balanced resistor).
The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to
control:
- Outlet air volume
- Air temperature
- Air distribution
Operation
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL
The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is changed based on the position of
the temperature switch.
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Blower speed is controlled based on front blower switch settings. When blower switch is turned, the
blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned clockwise,
and decreases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned counterclockwise.
INTAKE DOORS CONTROL
The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (defroster and
floor) switch setting.
MODE DOOR CONTROL
The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode dial.
DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL
The defroster door is controlled by the mode dial (set to defroster).
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
Compressor can only operate with engine running and blower ON (speed 1-4).
Page 6143
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9161
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4747
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 10464
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection
Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from dash lower panel using Tool.
Tool: (J-46532)
2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION: The adjustable pedal must be in the frontmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal
height measurement.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch by turning 45° counterclockwise.
2. Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height.
When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut.
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis.
Lock nut: 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.)
3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in
until threaded ends contact pedal arm. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and
ASCD switch contacting the pedal arm, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1 or C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are within
specification.
5. Check the pedal play
Page 7773
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light
ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 14456
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 12973
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12604
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2145
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 13096
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1534
Page 257
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2083
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14159
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9415
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11480
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 9783
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Axle Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
Page 10844
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6045
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 3901
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 10889
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6895
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
Page 8273
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9434
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13961
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH
rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation".
3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank
opening.
- As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately
15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level.
a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the
fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank
through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank,
the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector.
- Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the
quick connector as follows:
- Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
Page 9590
Page 14624
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10584
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Front Brake Disc/Rotor
Standard thickness (new) ....................................................................................................................
................................................. 28.0 mm (1.102 inch)
Repair limit thickness ...........................................................................................................................
............................................... 26.0 mm (1.024 inch)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
........................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006
inch)
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
..................................................................................................................................... 0.05 mm
(0.0020 inch)
NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring
runout. Refer to "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION".
Rear Brake Disc/Rotor
Standard thickness (new) ....................................................................................................................
................................................. 18.0 mm (0.709 inch)
Repair limit thickness ...........................................................................................................................
............................................... 16.0 mm (0.630 inch)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
........................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006
inch)
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
..................................................................................................................................... 0.07 mm
(0.0028 inch)
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10205
Page 6844
Case 9
Case 10
Page 13477
A. Example of correctly aligned condition (pin inserted into shaft link slot). (See Figures 3)
B. Example of misaligned condition (pin not inserted into shaft link slot) (See Figure 4)
4. Remove seat from vehicle.
NOTE:
Place seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt and scuff marks.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
Page 11844
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13075
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 4864
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6038
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Page 13069
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 12135
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the
hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to
"Removal and
Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power
tool.
7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Page 4875
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9114
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6994
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Completely drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
2. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove the rocker
cover (right bank). 4. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor as necessary
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass hoses and water pipe.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^
Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe
bulge.
^ When inserting water pipe into water outlet, apply neutral detergent to O-ring
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS".
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant.
Page 7962
EC-AF1HB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B1
Page 12648
5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled.
^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place.
6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector
holder as shown in Figure 4.
^ Remove and discard the old connector holder.
^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it).
7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4.
^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information.
8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first.
9. Re-set the radio station presets.
Page 8992
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5254
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 796
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8260
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5230
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3991
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5780
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1908
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 3800
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5961
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9560
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8067
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14343
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12681
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Connect C-III to the vehicle.
3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs.
a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode.
b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function.
^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform
repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure.
^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this
bulletin.
NOTE:
All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with
this procedure.
4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds.
Page 5041
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1976
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Electrical Specifications
Page 11244
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 1371
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12706
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air
bag connectors.
4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure
2.
^ The seat does not need to be removed.
^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit.
CAUTION:
Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes.
Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that
are under the seat.
Page 1791
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12011
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6444
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 14245
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4711
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9973
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
Page 10165
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
- If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 4863
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 124
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8277
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8942
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7231
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12297
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Intake Door Motor
Intake Door Motor Circuit
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Intake door motor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
The intake door control determines the intake door position based on the position of the
recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates
closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed
again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by
the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
Page 6613
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13807
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4300
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14383
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2142
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6011
Page 658
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 6071
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37,
"CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking
System
Page 13652
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7144
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 14614
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5267
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9064
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Testing and Inspection
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection
Inspection After Installation
CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the
damaged part.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist,
deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections.
Replace any damaged parts.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lbs.) with engine running for
approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leaks
from each part.
Page 4486
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Service and Repair
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation
2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type
spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
^
Frequent engine starts
^ Low ambient temperatures
Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: ^
Extended highway driving
^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch)
Page 6047
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4512
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 4961
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7081
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7472
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14590
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8593
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4546
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 4356
Page 7756
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 151
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14659
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6583
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2359
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7393
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 4003
Page 1857
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8283
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8964
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Service and Repair
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair
Fuel Line Disconnect/Connect Procedure
Disconnect the quick connector as follows:
- Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
Quick Connector
Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
Page 10908
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard
..........................................................................................................................................................
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum
...........................................................................................................................................................
961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders
....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14
psi)/300 rpm
Page 5735
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6680
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 11/TYPE 12
Page 9904
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable and brake tube from the carrier cover.
3. Remove the carrier cover bolts. Then separate the carrier cover from the axle housing using
Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer
to "COMPONENTS".
3. Connect the brake tube and parking brake cable to the carrier cover and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to PB-4, "Components". See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair
4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Refer to
"Checking Differential Gear Oil".
Page 10190
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14735
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4816
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3409
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 1591
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13689
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in
the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and
resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 125
Optional Splice
Part 1
ASCD Brake Switch
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD Brake Switch
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 3031
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13605
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3356
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC
3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86,
"ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments
Page 12577
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front kick plate. Refer to "KICK PLATES". 2. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
Refer to "LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER". 3. Remove the front pillar lower finisher. Refer to
"FRONT PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove the assist grip handle 5. Remove the front pillar
upper finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR UPPER FINISHER". 6. Remove the lower glove box.
Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 7. Remove the upper glove box
(cluster lid E). Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL".
8. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
9. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9345
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12012
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14445
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Page 9212
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5423
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2628
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 9710
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7897
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9671
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6909
Case 7
Page 3715
a. Attach suitable stopper pin to the right and left timing chain tensioners (secondary).
NOTE: ^
Use approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) dia. hard metal pin as a stopper pin.
^ For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to "CAMSHAFT". [Removing camshaft
bracket (No. 1) is required.]
b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts.
^ Secure the hexagonal portion of camshaft using wrench to loosen bolts.
CAUTION: Do not loosen bolts with securing anything other than the camshaft hexagonal portion
or with tensioning the timing chain.
c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets.
^ Turn camshaft slightly to secure slackness of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary)
side.
^ Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 inch)-thick metal or resin plate between timing chain and timing chain
tensioner plunger (guide). Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets with
timing chain loose from guide groove.
CAUTION: Be careful of plunger coming off when removing timing chain (secondary). This is
because plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) moves during operation, leading to coming
off of fixed stopper pin.
NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design sprockets for timing chain
(primary) and for timing chain (secondary).
Page 1607
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11288
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4806
Page 14499
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14490
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14786
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 10812
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11838
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12548
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 12839
6. Turn the ignition OFF.
7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows:
The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment.
^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from
the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON).
^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed.
^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the
sensor is completely installed.
^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing.
8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2).
9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3.
^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused.
10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover.
Page 1601
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 9568
11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 8063
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12612
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 7649
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 120
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11307
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9229
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4412
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14264
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6399
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 8982
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5554
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2200
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9538
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7319
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 2789
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 9237
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 14515
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9411
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 3845
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the
intake valve angle at the control position.
Service and Repair
Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock
it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8843
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9274
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 539
Page 13092
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5220
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1656
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 8390
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11540
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 6382
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 3673
Page EM-14
Page 2197
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12689
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 12392
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2135
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 237
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Service and Repair
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation
4X2
Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
CAUTION: ^
When installing an air breather hose, do not to crush or block by folding or bending the hose.
^ When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend portion.
4X4
Page 10485
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad
retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque
member.
Page 5312
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 10803
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1795
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Page 7014
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 7651
Page 3170
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
WHEEL
Inspection
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other
damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as
shown in the illustration. Refer to "Road Wheel".
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness.
Service and Repair
Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Level Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir".
2. Pull washer fluid level switch out of washer fluid reservoir in the direction of the arrow as shown.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9663
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14873
^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together.
^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue.
Disclaimer
Page 10251
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4847
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11463
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 13589
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2926
2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 190
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 7392
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 1655
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 3467
Page 3979
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Locations
Page 2363
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1079
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service and Repair
Amplifier: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Audio Amplifier
REMOVAL
1. Remove passenger side front seat. Refer to "FRONT SEAT".
=>: Vehicle front
2. Remove audio amplifier and kick shield screws. 3. Disconnect the connectors (1) and remove
audio amplifier from the bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12594
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 9322
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9666
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10898
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5676
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1715
EC-O2H2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B2
Page 7318
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2542
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 10541
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 2116
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10235
8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation".
Page 460
Page 5091
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 11174
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 8392
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7913
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Front
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4.
Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to
the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit".
NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer.
2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake
tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill
brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 11438
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Front
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments Front
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
- This vehicle is equipped with adjustable washer nozzles.
- If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed
correctly.
- If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory,
re-aim washer nozzle.
Page 13854
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4377
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Service and Repair
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
^ Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of electric throttle
control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle
Valve Closed Position Learning
^ Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" and "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when
electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 12441
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Page 4231
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7723
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 7845
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 631
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8482
Page 10435
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line
from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Electrical Specifications
Page 6550
Page 10097
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13258
5. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
- Install parts removed.
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the rear window in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 13868
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7644
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1627
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12967
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 696
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14501
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3445
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 10714
Page 4808
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2895
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
A/T Fluid: .............................................................................................................................................
................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J
NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
Page 4180
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 10221
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9008
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8036
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4973
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5714
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 9727
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8658
Page 12808
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - OUTBOARD
1. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and
D-ring anchor bolt. 3. Remove the upper and lower luggage area trim. Refer to "BODY SIDE
TRIM". 4. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly. 5. Remove the seat
belt height adjuster assembly.
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - OUTBOARD
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Ensure that seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - CENTER
1. Remove headlining. Refer to "HEADLINING". 2. Remove seat belt guide plate bolts. 3. Remove
seat belt retractor and belt assembly bolt and nut. 4. Remove seat belt retractor cover. 5. Remove
bolt and remove seat belt retractor and seat belt assembly.
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - CENTER
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4500
Page 13883
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4226
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14504
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8126
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 333
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11995
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Page 10833
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5666
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the
engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.
Page 4199
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 5664
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve
lifters at the locations that are out of the standard.
4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation
below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 =
Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F)
^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Intake
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Page 9829
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 6149
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6493
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7720
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 9691
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 3538
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for
clogging by blowing through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler.
Relief Valve Check relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If
replacement is necessary, remove relief valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new
relief valve in place by tapping it in.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^
Make sure that no foreign objects are adhering to the installation planes of oil cooler and oil pan
(upper).
^ Tighten connector bolt after aligning cutout on oil cooler with protrusion on oil pan (upper) side.
Connector bolt torque: 49 Nm (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft. lbs.)
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level,
and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL" and "ENGINE
COOLANT".
2. Start engine, and make sure that there are no leaks of engine oil or engine coolant. 3. Stop
engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level again.
Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL" and "ENGINE COOLANT".
Page 11668
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1558
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4882
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Release upper clips from front grille. 2. Release the tabs (4) at lower edge and remove front
grille from member.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13744
Page 1611
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 12543
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6124
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6728
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 10)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
Page 3827
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5121
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5605
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 9419
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Locations
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Service and Repair
Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Using a suitable tool (A), remove map lamp lens (1).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around tool to protect the housing and lens.
3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight downward to remove.
Map lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W
Page 5033
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7245
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6194
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 11719
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 9784
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14821
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2346
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2896
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection
A/T FLUID CHECK
Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check ^
Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level.
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Page 12333
Page 8177
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7450
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 5326
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8420
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3807
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7894
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation
ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Control
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control
[HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 4668
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6968
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11518
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7146
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 12752
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 8890
Page 2852
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1753
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9594
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 3468
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 6739
Case 10
Case 11
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 9631
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
Changing A/T Fluid
1. Run the engine to warm up the ATF. 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the bolt for the ATF level
gauge.
4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill
same volume with drained fluid and use the
dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^
To flush out the old fluid from the coolers pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine
idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return
line.
^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is
about the same as the color of the new fluid flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of
new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity.
Transmission fluid type: Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid J ATF Transmission fluid capacity (with
torque converter): 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt)
CAUTION: ^
Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.
^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as
the exhaust manifold.
Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
5. Check the fluid level and condition. Refer to "Checking AT Fluid". If the fluid is still dirty, repeat
steps 2 through 5. 6. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level
gauge bolt. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 5596
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 3473
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner and Idler Pulley
REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the drive belt. 3.
Remove the radiator cooling fan assembly 4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner and idler pulley
using power tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1461
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6834
Check Sheet Part 1
Specifications
A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Classification: HA10-004
Reference: NTB10-044
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied
Vehicles.
If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally:
^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator
assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions.
Page 193
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14338
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Front
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location
REMOVAL
1. Operate the wiper motor and stop it at the auto stop position. 2. Remove the wiper arm mounting
covers. 3. Remove the wiper arm mounting nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
INSTALLATION
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF"
(auto stop). 2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to
clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before tightening nut. 3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper
switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF". 4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within
clearance "L1" and "L2".
Clearance "L1": 24.5 - 39.5 mm (0.965 - 1.555 in) Clearance "L2": 23.5 - 38.5 mm (0.925 - 1.516
in)
- Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of
wiper arm looseness.
- Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper arm nuts: 23.6 Nm 2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb
Page 10451
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 5821
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6842
Case 7
Page 7576
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3286
CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER ^
Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the
tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter "A" of camshaft bracket with bore gauge. Standard: No. 1: 26.000 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 inch)
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE ^
(Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (Camshaft journal diameter). Standard: No.
1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 inch)
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch)
^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE: Camshaft bracket cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with
cylinder head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play
^ Install dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the end play of dial
indicator when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188
mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) Limit: 0.24 mm (0.0094 inch)
^ Measure the following parts if out of the limit. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 inch)
- Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing Standard: 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 1.0781 inch)
^ Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Page 962
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11536
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 11199
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5241
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6429
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7327
Page 2215
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Connect C-III to the vehicle.
3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs.
a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode.
b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function.
^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform
repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure.
^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this
bulletin.
NOTE:
All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with
this procedure.
4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds.
Page 8072
Page 14692
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1327
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6841
Case 6
Page 1127
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8264
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12602
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2040
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8020
Optional Splice
Part 1
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 10.3L (10 7/8 qt. US, 9 1/8 qt. Imp)
Page 1455
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5616
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Page 3166
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 7857
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6930
Case 3
Page 11840
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14442
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8830
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5059
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12535
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9676
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8286
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8606
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6204
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1531
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9717
Page 2321
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5536
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12962
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7572
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 4341
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5796
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2771
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 9786
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 927
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14744
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 195
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8655
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14412
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1596
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5346
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 4025
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1599
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9208
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2967
Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information
Precautions for Engine Oils
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
- Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
- Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
- Do not put oily rags in pockets.
- Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
- Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be
cleaned regularly.
- First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
- Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the
skin.
- Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
- Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
- If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
- Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
- Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical
goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Page 13051
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 5098
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 76
Page 248
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1253
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5865
Page 4800
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5390
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating
with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure.
Page 9375
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3273
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL
PRESSURE RELEASE".
3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake
manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not
required in use of CONSULT-II).
7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole.
^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm
(0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal.
8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these
steps to check each cylinder.
Compression pressure
CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed.
^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine
speed again with normal battery gravity
^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated
with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark
plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be
malfunctioning. Check valves for damage.
Page 14746
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8936
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14384
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5274
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6525
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 2111
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Locations
Service Port HVAC: Locations
Page 5564
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 3674
Page EM-15
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2526
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 791
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10960
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4227
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9224
Page 8134
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4268
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration".
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER
INSTRUMENT PANEL LH".
3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration".
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System - NATS)
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 6412
Page 12789
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 10215
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7834
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5046
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3822
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Cowl Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1971
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7590
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 7555
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9222
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Description and Operation
Engine Load Signal: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 1702
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8549
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 4220
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4237
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4553
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5518
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4774
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2710
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 980
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7578
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2194
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5555
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3863
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 3843
EC-IVCB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 11469
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be
performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch
Check
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps
cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates.
1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4.
Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor
(magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds
then on high speed for 5 seconds.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 6667
- Models with ABLS
- Models with electronic locking rear differential
TYPE 1
System Diagram
System diagram
Page 6009
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5432
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 4137
Exhaust Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CAUTION: ^
Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system
threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number:
J-43897-12 J-4389718
^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause
damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on.
Page 10616
Part 1
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: While bleeding, monitor the master cylinder brake fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress
brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed and using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, loosen the bleed valve to let air out, then tighten bleed valve
immediately.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque.
Refer to "Components (front disc brake), "Components (rear disc brake)". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6 at
each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleed air from the front left,
rear left, and front right
bleed valve, in that order.
Page 13128
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 13878
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6563
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 5002
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2922
2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 6459
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 4633
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
C200
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts
Page 5416
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2016
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11291
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6363
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 4849
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8110
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4020
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6962
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5078
EC-O2S2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 8918
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 14155
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2026
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7374
Page 1747
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11446
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1218
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7899
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4294
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8030
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11097
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 7915
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 12625
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt System
Seat Belt Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any
collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.
Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat
belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision
in which the air bags are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
- The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts,
retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
- The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
- The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for
damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
- Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
- The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the
collision in which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning
chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning
lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag
warning lamp. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (
AIR BAG)".
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide
swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not
bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat
belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt
does not return smoothly, wipe
the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the
belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be
an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in)
or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass
a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several
times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a
clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps
above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light
ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 6646
LAN-CAN-22
Page 13005
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3597
^ Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.
^ Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip.
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8081
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4728
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6695
Check Sheet Part 1
Description and Operation
Speedometer Head: Description and Operation
SPEEDOMETER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination
meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 7783
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3679
Timing Chain: Specifications
Timing Chain
Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. There are two type of bolts. Refer to the following for
locating bolts. Bolt length: Bolt position 20 mm (0.79 inch) .................................................................
............................................................................................................. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 16 mm
(0.63 inch) ............................................................................................................................................
....................................... Except the above Rear timing case bolt torque
............................................................................................................................................... 12.7 Nm
(1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.)
After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
Page 4831
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8165
Page 1827
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1511
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9324
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5476
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9226
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4189
Repair Flow Chart
Page 799
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
CAN Communication
Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an
on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error
detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit
shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN
communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line)
allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit
transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
NOTE: Confirming the presence of the following items helps to identify CAN system type.
- Models with 4WD
- Models with VDC
Page 10476
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 9716
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the
partition glass.
5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and
screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
- Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm
(0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
Rear Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If
equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch.
4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the
glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and
lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Service Precautions
Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be
excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions.
- Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
- When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only
when necessary.
- Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing
damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material
off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst.
Page 13649
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 9598
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 12527
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11711
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 13401
Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal.
1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C).
2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure
1).
^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it.
3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2).
Damaged Decal Removal:
4. Remove the damaged decal as follows:
Page 14763
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1764
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1488
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7991
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Service and Repair
Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)".
2. Remove the release bearing sleeve assembly, holder spring, and withdrawal lever from inside
the clutch housing. 3. Remove the dust cover. 4. Remove the snap spring from the withdrawal
lever.
5. Remove the release bearing from release bearing sleeve using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor
aligning function.
^ Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally.
^ Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked.
INSTALLATION
Page 2645
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Wheel Turning Angle
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on
stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum
inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning
angle.
Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if
the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear
- Steering column
- Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new
ones.
Page 1782
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10345
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14865
1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear
regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f.
Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5.
Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER".
Page 4949
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10859
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11062
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2188
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 327
Page 10262
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11848
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1448
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8125
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5972
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7301
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 1603
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4358
Interior Room Lamp
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9210
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13829
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 13884
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators,
CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when
MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system is ready for
operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
- CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
- SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range
of ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the "ASCD" function.
Page 2311
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 126
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4807
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1700
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7089
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 542
Page 9373
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 398
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 9741
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10999
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 752
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 7107
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 10862
Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation
PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is
ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
Page 4021
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 12344
Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Blower Motor Resistor
The front blower motor resistor is located on the cooling unit. The front blower motor resistor
grounds the front blower motor through a series of 1, 2 or three resistors, depending upon speed
selected. For high speed operation the front blower motor resistor is circumvented and the front
blower motor grounds directly.
Page 9486
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8714
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2512
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 1311
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 6787
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
Page 10466
Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments
Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from dash lower panel using Tool.
Tool: (J-46532)
2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION: The adjustable pedal must be in the frontmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal
height measurement.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch by turning 45° counterclockwise.
2. Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height.
When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut.
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis.
Lock nut: 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.)
3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in
until threaded ends contact pedal arm. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and
ASCD switch contacting the pedal arm, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1 or C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are within
specification.
5. Check the pedal play
Page 425
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 932
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5195
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10397
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 8611
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 6641
LAN-CAN-17
Page 2352
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9978
5. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the front oil seal lips. 2. Install the new front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number: KV38100500 (J-25273)
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ Do not incline oil seal when installing.
3. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the matching mark A of companion flange, then
install the companion flange.
4. Apply gear oil on the screw part of drive pinion and the seating surface of drive pinion lock nut. 5.
Install the new drive pinion lock nut and tighten to the specified torque using Tool. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
Tool number: KV38108300 (J-44195)
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut.
6. Install the propeller shaft.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 10882
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13517
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 3408
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 14081
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11592
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 5362
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8000
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4200
Page 13874
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7788
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11910
Maximum inner socket length L: 84.0 mm (3.31 inch)
Page 1631
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Bulb Replacement
Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement
The vanity mirror lamp bulb is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly.
Page 11166
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 3586
^ Tighten nuts and bolts in numerical order as shown. Intake manifold collector: 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m,
8 ft. lbs.) bolts and nuts Stud bolts: 6.9 Nm (7.0 kg-m, 61 inch lbs.)
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
^ Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of electric throttle
control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
^ Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" and "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when
electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 5557
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3782
1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC)
NOTE: Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it
is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key
: At cylinder head side of right bank.
2. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark
positions repeatedly during the installation process.
Page 10951
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4410
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 8705
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1418
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12849
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front door sill finisher and lift carpet. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts and
release the clip. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 9712
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2625
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 5692
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13243
6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool.
7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
- If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Page 6012
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6473
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6079
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9550
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8292
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7128
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 5947
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or
change setting value for each item according to the
configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration
items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the
CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be
manually set or changed.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting
vehicle model cannot be memorized.
Page 10532
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 11256
Repair Flow Chart
Page 9485
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11698
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5287
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11593
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 1703
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4693
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9690
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 11012
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2358
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 654
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 8440
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8847
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating
with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure.
Page 9136
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 13135
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or
change setting value for each item according to the
configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration
items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the
CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be
manually set or changed.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting
vehicle model cannot be memorized.
Page 8572
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 7407
Page 7018
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6616
CAN System (Type 3) Schematic
CAN System (Type 4) Schematic
Page 10253
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4522
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 9118
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5660
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine
conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing
noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure
the valve clearance as follows:
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank)
are located as shown.
^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown.
b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft.
Page 4364
Page 14396
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2024
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14374
Page 917
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8345
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 152
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13109
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3157
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance)
Page 10790
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 496
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4402
Disclaimer
Page 3211
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
- When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
- When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
Page 7671
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11832
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10933
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11264
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 5546
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10113
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8040
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12815
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Removal and Installation
For removal and installation procedures, refer to Seat Belts, "Removal and Installation of Front
Seat Belt".
Page 7334
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 14016
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 7215
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to
check CONSULT II data link connector
(DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link
Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 2290
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1439
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7606
Service and Repair
Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Page 11080
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14525
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Page 14686
Page 8569
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 4203
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6162
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9810
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7321
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 422
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 11373
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 8904
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7881
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11453
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1755
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12761
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 2731
CAUTION: ^
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13920
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 6240
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 5553
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7582
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3907
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4580
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 6736
Case 6
Page 14563
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9605
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 14477
Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation
System Description
Power is supplied at all times
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
- through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
- through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and
- to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to IPDM E/R terminal 61
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and
- through 30 A fusible link (letter m, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and
- through 30 A fusible link (letter h, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and
- to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T).
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67 and
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
- to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2
- to trailer connector terminal 2 and
- to backup lamp relay terminal 1 (with M/T)
- through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION
The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1.
With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto
light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied from the tail lamp relay
- through 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 29
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1.
When energized, trailer tow relay 1 tail lamp power is supplied
- through trailer tow relay 1 terminal 5
- to trailer connector terminal 4.
TRAILER STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
The trailer stop, turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM. If either turn signal or the
hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them flash. If
the BCM receives stop lamp switch signal, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make
them illuminate.
Left stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- to trailer connector terminal 3
- through BCM terminal 52.
Right stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- to trailer connector terminal 6
- through BCM terminal 51.
Page 8372
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7715
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2596
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector.
3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
ASCD Brake Switch
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD Brake Switch
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 9255
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.
- It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is
malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance............................................................................................................................................
....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Page 2513
8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation".
Page 1022
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9474
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10583
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 14379
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13887
Page 9367
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5063
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8118
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 12539
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14034
13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP
hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel
tank.
15. Remove the lock ring using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-45722)
16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
CAUTION:
- Do not bend the float arm during installation.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then
check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 10343
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 6929
Case 2
Page 8788
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 6218
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11090
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5282
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4319
Disclaimer
Page 10829
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6972
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9881
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Install the release bearing to release bearing sleeve using suitable tool, as shown.
^ Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas.
^ Apply grease to the specified points as shown.
^ Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and
holder spring frictional surfaces.
^ Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to ball pin contact surface of the withdrawal lever and inner
slots of the release bearing. The grease surface should be level with the surrounding area.
^ Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to the release bearing frictional surface. After grease
application, Install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation.
CAUTION: ^
Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides
smoothly by operating withdrawal lever.
^ Be careful not to bring any grease into contact with the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface,
or flywheel surface.
^ When assembling, make sure that both ends of the snap spring touch the end face of the
withdrawal lever.
^ Be careful with the orientation of the installation.
Page 8505
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2988
Refrigerant: Service and Repair HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes,
nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified
service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or
SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs,
ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
Page 11571
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 5917
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4662
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2148
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation
ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Control
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control
[HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Page 9984
3. Rotate the pinion three or four times using Tool and record the rotating torque.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
4. Remove the drive pinion lock nut, using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000 (-)
5. Put a matching mark on the end of the drive pinion in line with the matching mark B on the
companion flange.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the drive pinion. Do not damage the
companion flange or drive pinion.
6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool.
7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286)
ABS
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 4932
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 1381
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5080
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to
the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at
the specified range.
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an
oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a
heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C
(1,292 - 1,472 °F).
Page 9344
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4026
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2768
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 10701
Repair Flow Chart
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2477
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12042
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the
intake valve angle at the control position.
Page 5752
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14529
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
For details, refer to "SPIRAL CABLE".
Page 13049
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 790
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Service and Repair
Rear Bumper: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear bumper fascia LH/RH front screws at wheel opening. 2. Remove rear bumper
fascia lower stay bolts and side step plate bracket LH/RH. 3. Release rear bumper fascia clips and
remove rear bumper fascia LH/RH. 4. Remove license lamps and harness. 5. Remove rear bumper
to frame bolts and remove rear bumper. 6. Remove drafter duct from lower side of LH quarter
panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Apply sealant to clips securing rear bumper side step plate during installation.
Page 2037
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 607
Page 9157
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7197
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2
Page 5772
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 118
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2633
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4966
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7669
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1699
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2349
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2530
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5975
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 504
Disclaimer
Page 9254
Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the
combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with
power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness
connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the
following procedure.
8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug
and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and
check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Page 172
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 12599
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13598
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 12214
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 9665
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9103
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6926
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 211
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 13063
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 7481
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 679
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay
Page 10220
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10540
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 10126
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 3913
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 4326
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
Trailer Hitch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North
America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September
30, 2005
COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch,
inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch
from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer
separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24,
2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 7778
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1951
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12038
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2138
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8004
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 423
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 3315
CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft.
^ Remove connecting rod bearing cap and bearing, and using scale on plastigage bag, measure
the plastigage width.
NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the
"Method by Calculation".
CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING
^ When connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with
connecting rod bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for
the tightening procedure.
Standard: There must be crush height.
^ If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Undersize
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance
Page 10256
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3859
Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 5970
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6555
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 2472
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8601
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4824
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9077
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13916
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4725
Page 9142
Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Perform "VIAS SOL
VALVE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the given conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the given conditions.
Page 8202
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5051
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11258
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 5737
Page 10237
7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2
harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect
the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to
"Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 13660
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 14272
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged
Roof Rack Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged
Classification: BT06-026A
Reference: NTB06-093A
Date: January 5, 2010
2005 - 2010 XTERRA AND FRONTIER; ROOF RACK DECAL DAMAGE
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and the Parts Information have been
updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard the earlier version of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The "NISSAN", "FRONTIER", or "XTERRA" roof rack decal(s) need to be replaced for any reason.
ACTIONS
1. Use a heat gun to carefully remove the damaged decal.
2. Clean the side rail or air dam surface.
3. Apply a new decal listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the roof rack, rails, or air dam for damaged decals.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service\ Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Page 242
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9123
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7583
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7525
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 11537
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 2601
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 8811
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11278
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 199
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5892
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8758
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay
Page 8391
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13418
26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm.
7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with
narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in
Figure 5.
8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch
from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the
synchronization tube (see Figure 6).
9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube.
Page 14258
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13811
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9921
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD
Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE
90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F)
Rear final Drive (except 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ...............................................................
.............................................................................................................. API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-90
gear oil
Rear final Drive (only 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ...................................................................
........................................................................................................ API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140
gear oil
Page 9041
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 5296
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1635
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12397
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6735
Case 5
Page 7302
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 7390
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11612
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 13742
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4850
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
C200
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair C200
Part 1
Page 146
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6229
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 13137
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 12048
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the
hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to
"Removal and
Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power
tool.
7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Page 4889
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8998
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5688
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6439
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 283
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1
Page 1600
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10396
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1346
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2382
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Page 7494
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 827
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 7474
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1512
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6935
Case 8
Page 345
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10796
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9473
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12542
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8159
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 407
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 12749
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 5622
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 8672
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4719
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12001
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8479
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1460
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3714
23. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner
cover and intake valve timing control covers. 24. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as
follows:
a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper. (1) b. Insert plunger
into tensioner body by pressing slack guide. (2) c. Keep slack guide pressed and hold plunger in by
pushing stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove. (3)
d. Remove bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary).
25. Remove internal chain guide, tension guide and slack guide.
NOTE: Tension guide can be removed after removing timing chain (primary).
26. Remove timing chain (primary) and crankshaft sprocket.
CAUTION: After removing timing chain (primary), do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately,
or valves will strike the piston heads.
27. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
Page 5757
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 13736
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5103
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10807
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11946
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5182
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 2675
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 14153
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13818
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10404
Repair Flow Chart
Page 11966
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Page 3022
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14718
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4684
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 1424
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13562
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 8925
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8365
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 2309
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7200
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM".
- Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE
PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -".
- Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
- Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER".
Page 7379
Page 1046
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 17 and 18 with pushing
each switch.
Page 2086
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1815
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9026
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5828
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3283
Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of
camshaft.
CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a
different diameter from the other three locations.
2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^
If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
Valve Lifter Clearance VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with micrometer since valve lifter is in
barrel shape. Standard (intake and exhaust): 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch)
VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER
^ Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with inside micrometer.
Page 12451
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table.
Page 8939
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6188
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 930
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1878
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11370
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5374
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8250
Exhaust Manifold ^
If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud
torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step.
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CAUTION: ^
Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system
threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number:
J-43897-12 J-4389718
^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause
damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on.
Page 2304
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1320
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6176
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Electrical Diagrams
EC-ETC1
EC-ETC1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ETC3
Page 923
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9276
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4329
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 9781
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9188
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12406
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9398
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 10663
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION: ^
Master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
^ Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary.
Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder
sub-assembly body.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: ^
Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
^ Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder
sub-assembly. Refer to "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL
PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet.
2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly.
Page 13851
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7034
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11815
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5425
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9713
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14933
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6648
LAN-CAN-24
CAN System (Type 8)
Page 11343
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 623
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14336
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7371
Page 5570
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so
that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
NOTE:
- Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD".
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as
shown in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to
zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
Page 335
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 11419
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6759
Case 11
Case 12
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 7274
Page 11055
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13048
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 14406
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (CONSULT-II)
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen.
4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored.
When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Combination Switch Reading Function
Combination Switch Reading Function
For details, refer to Body Control System, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION".
Page 4082
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10769
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Installation is in the reverse order
of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Page 7827
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 3897
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Page 10440
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position
of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
Page 13904
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2759
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 8044
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 6827
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
BCM Circuit Inspection
Page 12488
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 4741
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1632
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5369
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8174
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7175
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 3013
Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 13506
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Valve opening temperature
........................................................................................................................................................
80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) Maximum valve lift
....................................................................................................................................................... 8.6
mm / 95°C (0.339 inch / 203°F) valve closing temperature .................................................................
................................................................................................................ 77°C (171°F)
Page 6914
Case 13
Case 14
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 11116
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 11260
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 13693
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5462
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 11145
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 5620
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 2262
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4098
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 7154
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1872
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1785
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 6098
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 979
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 10636
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from
cylinder body.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston
and piston boot.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, (KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot into piston groove.
Page 4989
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9079
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1841
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14117
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 544
Page 7551
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5766
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 14458
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6117
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13429
11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel
or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9.
12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative
cable last), and reset the radio stations.
Disclaimer
Page 5873
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 6021
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11965
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 6074
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13810
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10801
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2010
Page 14390
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9567
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the
terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 14030
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Page 14572
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13065
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 14488
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5249
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13102
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8056
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 6971
Page 7691
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7156
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 11671
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8287
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6663
Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings
Precautions For Harness Repair
Precautions For Harness Repair
CAN SYSTEM
- Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33
in).]
- Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become
separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.)
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
CAN SYSTEM
- Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
- Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
- Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect negative battery terminal before checking the
circuit.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II
CONVERTER.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
- If YES, GO TO 2.
- If NO, GO TO 5.
2. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the
self-diagnosis results?
- If YES, GO TO 3.
- If NO, GO TO 4.
3. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. 4.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN
communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis
results.
5. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW".
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Page 11427
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1933
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 10973
Terminal "2" nut : 10.8 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Be sure to tighten terminal "2" nut carefully.
Page 7808
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the
signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and
low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 1323
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From
Front Air Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 8837
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12340
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Motor Relay
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay.
Page 3239
Page 2877
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid
Drain and Refill
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
when splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
^ Before servicing, disconnect actuator connector or battery negative cable.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, then loosen each bleed valve using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool and
gradually remove brake fluid.
3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest
foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve.
Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a
few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid
flows out. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
Page 7487
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 845
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8363
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11939
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Page 10661
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
Brake Master Cylinder
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If
brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Disconnect harness connectors for
fluid level sensor and pressure sensor. 3. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, disconnect
brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly nuts and master
cylinder assembly
INSTALLATION ^
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION: ^
Refill using recommended brake fluid. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 117
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8888
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6917
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
TCM Circuit Inspection
Page 10026
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Page 3652
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 12760
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 9650
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 603
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6177
EC-ETC3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 10857
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For Children) System
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For
Children) System
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
Page 8721
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways
Seat Bottom Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves
Sideways
Classification: BT05-050
Reference: NTB05-092
Date: October 7, 2005
RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE
MOVEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual
seats WI Fold Flat Feature)
APPLIED VINS:
Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada:
vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123
IF YOU CONFIRM
An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven
^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above
^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above
ACTION
^ Remove the seat from the vehicle.
^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by
adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 3623
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 2776
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 9232
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12854
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 11491
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 1917
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5818
Page 13604
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7553
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8710
Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11692
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11870
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5449
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 185
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14414
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4782
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9655
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 7254
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6053
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10598
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 2217
11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4.
12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor.
13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order.
^ Reuse the original cover.
^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor.
^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb).
14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the
codes:
^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function,
SELF-DIAG [PAST].
15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows:
a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure
5).
b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF.
c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the
Service Manual for diagnosis and repair.
^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this
bulletin.
16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector.
Page 3321
Connecting Rod: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences
Rod Bearing Cap
Tighten connecting rod bolts. Connecting rod bolt
..........................................................................................................................................................
19.6 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.)
Then tighten all connecting rod bolts 90° clockwise.
Page 6438
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1966
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6850
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
Page 2020
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7077
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1901
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7986
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3296
^ Install camshaft brackets (No. 2 to 4) aligning the stamp marks as shown.
NOTE: There are no identification marks indicating left and right for camshaft bracket (No. 1).
^ Apply liquid gasket to mating surface of camshaft bracket (No. 1) as shown on right and left
banks. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants".
5. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in the following steps, in numerical order as shown.
Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1: (bolts 7 - 10): 1.96 Nm (0.2kgf-m,17 inch lbs.) Step 2: (bolts 1 - 6):
1.96 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3: 5.88 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4: 10.4 Nm (1.1
kg-m, 92 inch lbs.)
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge
Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11626
Page 13646
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3996
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2534
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11128
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2263
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11043
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 10298
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Page 1386
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 1017
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7184
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2585
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 4206
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 587
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 4904
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5266
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11357
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 13597
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3353
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine
conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing
noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure
the valve clearance as follows:
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank)
are located as shown.
^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown.
b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft.
Page 4578
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7167
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7697
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12375
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5422
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7294
Page 8547
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 12040
EC-IVCB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 12360
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation
Magnet Clutch Circuit
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The front air control controls A/C compressor operation based on intake temperature and a signal
from ECM. The ECM may not allow A/C compressor operation if refrigerant pressure sensor value
is too high.
Low Temperature Protection Control
The front air control will turn the A/C compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by
the intake sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than 3.5 °C (38.3 °F), the A/C compressor
turns ON. The A/C compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than 2.5 °C (36.5
°F).
Page 6733
Case 3
Page 5047
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14567
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13068
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 12171
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative
Seat Latch: Customer Interest Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative
Classification: BT05-029a
Reference: NTB05-069a
Date: July 26, 2005
2005 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER; FRONT SEAT MANUAL RECLINER INOPERATIVE
This bulletin amends NTB05-069. This version amends Step 9 to include the bolt torque
specification.
Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S):
2005 Frontier (D40), Xterra (N50), Pathfinder (R51) (Applies to Non-Fold Flat front seat ONLY)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The driver and/or passenger seat does not recline or tilt forward when lifting up on the recliner
handle.
ACTION
^ Re-align the recliner linkage which may have slipped out of position (off pin). (See Figure 1)
^ Adjust the seat cushion rear bracket to prevent the above.
IMPORTANT
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 13662
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10601
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10354
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11586
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 1447
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 4604
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 13880
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6789
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 11842
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 5504
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3677
Page EM-18
Testing and Inspection
Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection
FUEL SYSTEM
Checking Fuel Lines
Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,
loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
Page 10771
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
Page 1504
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2631
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 138
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14183
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 8723
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2019
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12400
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2655
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 954
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1270
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 5733
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11387
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3839
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4524
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 11002
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8485
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6967
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9283
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11230
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1970
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 12553
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Motor Relay
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay.
Page 8218
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10449
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Rear Oil Seal
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). 3. Remove
rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case
assembly (4WD models).
Installation
1. Install new rear oil seal into the extension case (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models)
until it is flush with component face, using suitable
tool or Tool. Tool number: ST33400001 (J-26082)
CAUTION: ^
Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
^ Do not reuse rear oil seal.
Page 4495
Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
Page 4149
^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are
located (see Figure 1 and 2 above).
> The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield.
> If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply.
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for
example).
Page 1510
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9506
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 9535
Page 12393
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12609
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 7734
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2612
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 2736
Replace valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case,
replace cylinder head gaskets.
9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC
appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
Page 5327
Page 4826
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6889
Case 12
Case 13
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 1763
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13070
Page 1039
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11110
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 5993
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 7952
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3169
Disclaimer
Page 7959
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-AF1B1
EC-AF1B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1B2
Page 1368
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4093
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12362
5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the
drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small
adapter.
Tool number: KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under
the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove.
6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing
screws and remove the magnet coil.
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive
grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be
cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
Page 511
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 13872
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1923
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2626
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Page 2370
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1231
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. 2. Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector. 3.
While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and release from the
steering column.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Page 6656
LAN-CAN-32
Page 1860
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Audible Warning Device: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection For Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Step 1)
Inspection For Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 14560
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7629
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 774
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7914
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 958
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11709
Page 12300
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Motor
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel side finisher. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 2.
Remove the lower instrument cover. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect
the mode door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the mode door
motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Procedures
Timing Cover: Procedures
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
Removal and Installation
NOTE: ^
This section describes removal/installation procedure of front timing chain case and timing chain
related parts without removing oil pan (upper) on vehicle.
^ When oil pan (upper) needs to be removed or installed, or when rear timing chain case is
removed or installed, remove oil pans (upper and lower) first. Then remove front timing chain case,
timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case in this order, and installation is in the reverse
order of removal. Refer to "TIMING CHAIN".
^ Refer to "TIMING CHAIN" for component parts location.
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to
"FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine oil on drive belts.
4. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
5. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN 6. Separate engine
harnesses removing their brackets from front timing chain case. 7. Remove drive belts. 8. Remove
power steering oil pump from bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9.
Remove power steering oil pump bracket.
10. Remove alternator. 11. Remove water bypass hose, water hose clamp and idler pulley bracket
from front timing chain case.
12. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers.
^ Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing,
keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected.
Page 6278
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 10733
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14023
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 8874
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Reservoir: Testing and Inspection
VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. 2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of
vacuum tank. 3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B.
Page 5368
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6712
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 5238
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6306
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 9351
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1996
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7995
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Testing and Inspection
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING RADIATOR
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. ^
Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
^ When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan
shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically
downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if
any stains no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with
the air hose pointed vertically downward.
^ Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.8 inch).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. 6.
Check for leaks.
Page 7210
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 13747
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10127
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10887
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5530
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8914
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 14787
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
License Plate Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Check Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Step 1)
Check Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Steps 1 (Continued) - 3)
Page 10798
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14651
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3717
31. Remove O-rings from cylinder block. 32. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) from
cylinder head if necessary
a. Remove camshaft brackets (No. 1). b. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) with stopper
pin attached.
33. Use scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases, and
opposite mating surfaces.
^ Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread.
34. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner cover
and intake valve timing control covers.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Timing Chain
Page 5069
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2082
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9036
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6212
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1451
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2007
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13644
Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5037
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4709
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13930
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 993
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 4954
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11362
Page 11506
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6174
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7033
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 288
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control
unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 1544
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4775
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14467
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9596
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 3034
Relay Box: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14476
LT-T/TOW-04
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 8708
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9165
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8444
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4071
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11068
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6715
Case 2
Page 4453
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 5854
Repair Flow Chart
Page 67
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position
of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
Page 12394
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12379
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14079
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 12034
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8995
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11072
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4345
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 2829
9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab.
10. Install the bracket on the frame rail.
NOTE:
The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in.
11. Torque the bolt to:
11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb)
NOTE:
Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt.
Page 1709
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9331
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7793
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5651
CAUTION: ^
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1355
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3816
Page 5131
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6888
Case 10
Case 11
Page 6874
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 6454
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 9808
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1117
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1260
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9372
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3760
19. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 20. Remove water pump cover and chain
tensioner cover from front timing chain case, if necessary Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
21. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case.
22. Remove timing chain and related parts. 23. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid
gasket from front and rear timing chain cases and oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating
surfaces.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan.
^ Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread.
Page 8322
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 10501
^ Make sure the shims are installed as shown in Figure 1.
^ Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the outboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 1).
^ Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1
and 2.
^ NEVER interchange the greases used in this bulletin. These greases have completely different
characteristics and properties. They are only compatible
with the specific areas they are intended for.
^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer.
Page 13963
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
Page 4277
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9000
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating
with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure.
Page 9471
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6164
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Draining & Filling Fluid
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Draining & Filling Fluid
Changing
DRAINING 1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transmission. 2. Stop the engine.
Remove the transmission drain plug and drain the oil. 3. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it
to the transmission. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near the
filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity. Refer to "
Page 10906
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8123
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2931
3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
FILLING
1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug
hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and
Lubricants".
2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive
assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS". ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 7733
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8913
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Description and Operation
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM
uses this signal for engine control.
Page 11454
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14347
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13582
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4443
Page 3355
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the
table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC
d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at
TDC of compression stroke.
Page 4065
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5208
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10609
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 4017
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3769
20. Remove front timing chain case as follows:
a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off
case by moving tool as shown (2).
- Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: - Do not use screwdriver or something similar. - After removal, handle front timing chain
case carefully so it does not twist, bend, or warp under a load.
21. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 22. If necessary, remove water pump cover and
chain tensioner cover from front timing chain case.
- Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
Page 3368
1. Apply liquid gasket using Tool to joint part among rocker cover, cylinder head and camshaft
bracket (No. 1) as follows:
Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
NOTE: The figure shows an example of left bank side [zoomed in shows camshaft bracket (No. 1)].
a. Refer to the figure "a" to apply liquid gasket to joint part of camshaft bracket (No. 1) and cylinder
head. b. Refer to the figure "b" to apply liquid gasket to the figure "a" squarely.
2. Install new rocker cover gasket to rocker cover. 3. Install rocker cover.
^ Check if rocker cover gasket is not dropped from installation groove of rocker cover.
4. Tighten bolts in two steps separately in numerical order as shown.
1st step: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) 2nd step: 8.33 Nm (0.85 kg-m, 74 inch lbs.)
5. Install new O-ring and PCV valve to rocker cover (right bank), if removed. 6. Install PCV hose.
^ Insert PCV hose by 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 inch) from connector end.
^ When installing, be careful not to twist or come in contact with other parts.
7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6492
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7850
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises
Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises
Classification: BR06-006D
Reference: NTB06-037D
Date: March 2, 2011
2005 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAKING NOISE FROM BRAKES
The application of Molykote(R) 7439 has been added to the Service Procedure. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Frontier built before: 1N6(*)DO7(**)5C461154 Xterra built before:
5N1AN08(**)5C651886
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before August 15, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
A squeaking noise coming from the brakes.
ACTIONS
Perform repairs as follows:
Front Brakes
1. Replace the front brake pads.
2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims).
Rear Brakes
1. Replace the rear brake pads.
2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims).
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 11147
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear wiper arm. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment
of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and
the glass with mating marks. 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors. 4. Remove the
high mount stop lamp.
Page 1100
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table.
Page 5830
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12976
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6091
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5957
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1779
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3710
Part 2
Removal and Installation
NOTE: ^
This section describes procedures for removing/installing front timing chain case and timing chain
related parts, and rear timing chain case, when oil pan (upper) needs to be removed/installed for
engine overhaul, etc.
^ To remove/install front timing chain case, timing chain, and its related parts without removing oil
pan (upper), refer to "FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE".
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to
"FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine oil on drive belts.
4. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
5. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN". 6. Separate engine
harnesses removing their brackets from front timing chain case. 7. Remove drive belts. 8. Remove
power steering oil pump from bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9.
Remove power steering oil pump bracket.
10. Remove alternator. 11. Remove water bypass hose, water hose clamp and idler pulley bracket
from front timing chain case.
12. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers.
^ Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing,
keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected.
Page 5060
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 10722
Page 9056
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 11126
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14658
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 8106
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 873
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to
BRC-212, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: On-Vehicle Service
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 13789
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Service and Repair
Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock
it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11010
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Service and Repair
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the
front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a
frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack
resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle
passengers are securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat
belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining
force.
Page 11488
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Specifications
Fuel: Specifications
Fuel Requirements
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(research octane number 91).
CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst.
Using a fuel other than that specified could
adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty
coverage validity.
Page 11823
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 358
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 9555
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8215
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8727
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14471
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2442
Page 14519
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3164
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 14478
TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
The trailer power supply is controlled by trailer tow relay 2.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 27
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and
- to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T).
When trailer tow relay 2 is energized, power is supplied
- through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7
- to trailer connector terminal 5.
Page 3763
i Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting
point, make entire front timing chain case contact rear timing chain case completely.
ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while
holding front timing chain case from
front and top as shown.
iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and
top completely.
d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
^ There are four type of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter
1-5: 10 mm (0.39 inch) 6-25: 6 mm (0.24 inch) Bolt position Tightening specification 1-5: 55.0 Nm
(5.6 kg-m, 41 ft. lbs.) 6-25: 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.)
e. After all bolts tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
5. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown.
Front oil pan bolt torque: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.)
6. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows:
a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves.
Page 5712
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 8973
Page 2069
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs)
Page 6591
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12828
Page 2704
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 8798
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 6618
CAN System (Type 6) Schematic
Page 2085
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1254
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11179
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 14620
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 9371
Page 4632
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 6915
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4)
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 7619
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13106
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4697
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Page 1784
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13723
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 9)
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 7202
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is
turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
Page 8359
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Adjustments
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 8994
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8368
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 803
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5992
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 11140
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13691
Page 14378
Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14282
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 4 (Continued))
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 5)
Page 1407
Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14502
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4366
Page 9272
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1959
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6025
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7078
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8703
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8404
Canister Vent Valve: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.
7. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Page 11420
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8894
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 12027
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8608
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5507
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12467
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure A/C Pipe
Removal and Installation for High-pressure A/C Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right
mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to
"HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the low pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Removal
and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe". 6. Remove the high-pressure A/C pipe. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 5244
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4106
Thermostat: Service and Repair
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Completely drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
2. Remove air duct and air cleaner case.
3. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) and oil cooler hose from water inlet and thermostat assembly.
4. Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly. Replace them as a unit, if
necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
Page 10740
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line
from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Page 13181
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 7676
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12332
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 9913
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the
differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 5162
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 4503
Page 7150
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 9364
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7755
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3252
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7025
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Instruments - Auto Dimming Mirror/Compass Service
Compass: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Auto Dimming Mirror/Compass Service
Classification: EL05-016
Reference: NTB05-062
Date: July 21, 2005
FACTORY INSTALLED AUTO DIMMING MIRROR AND COMPASS SERVICE INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 Armada (TA60) 2004 Titan (A60) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra
(N50) 2003 - 2005 Murano (Z50) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2002 - 2005 Altima (L31) 2004 - 2005
Maxima (A34) 2004 - 2005 Quest (V42) 2003-2005 350Z (Z33)
SERVICE INFORMATION
This bulletin supplements the diagnostic and repair information in the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM) for the factory installed auto dimming mirror with compass.
When servicing the factory installed auto dimming mirror or compass, refer to the information in this
bulletin along with the repair information contained in the ESM. The factory installed auto dimming
mirror with compass is manufactured by Gentex. It can be identified by looking for "GNTX"
stamped in the back of the mirror case along with patent and other information. Also, the factory
installed mirror has the compass display on the mirror face as shown in Figure 1.
Auto Dimming Mirror Operational Description
^ The automatic dimming mirror uses two photoelectric sensors to detect front and rear light
conditions.
^ Based on input from these sensors, the mirror is adjusted to eliminate unwanted glare.
^ The amount of adjustment is dependant on the amount of light detected by the rear sensor in
relationship to the ambient light (surrounding light) detected by the front sensor.
^ The mirror will automatically return to a "no dimming" mode whenever the vehicle is placed in
REVERSE to ensure an improved view when backing up.
Page 12969
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13427
4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied.
Torque screws to:
Page 7964
EC-O2H2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B1
Page 8813
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1698
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4504
Page 4819
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13824
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to BCS-11,
"CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE". See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Testing and Inspection/Reading and
Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
4. Touch "BUZZER" or "BCM".
5. Select "DATA MONITOR" or "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
Page 12118
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Page 8021
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8201
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 825
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level
LEVEL CHECK
^ Check that the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is within specification, between the MAX and
MIN lines as shown.
^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after the parking brake pedal is released, check the
brake system for any brake fluid leaks.
Page 6682
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 545
Page 5593
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 1251
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 936
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 7203
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
Page 7570
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9805
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 14926
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location
REMOVAL
1. Operate the rear wiper motor and stop it at the auto stop position.
2. Remove rear wiper arm cover by gripping bottom edge and rotating cover up. Remove mounting
nut, and remove the wiper arm.
INSTALLATION
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF"
(auto stop).
2. Clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness.
Page 9011
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 114
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
VDC/TCS/ABS
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
On-Vehicle Service
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE".
Page 13470
Torque bolts to 8.5 N-m (0.86 kg-m, 6.26 ft-lb.)
This will prevent the recliner linkage from slipping out of position.
10. Re-install seat and seat back trim.
11. Confirm recliner operates properly. Check manual slide function for effort/binding.
Disclaimer
Page 8481
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13206
5. Release clips and remove front door finisher.
- Disconnect lock cable and handle cable from pull handle/lock lever assembly. Refer to "FRONT
DOOR LOCK".
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11058
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6049
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8483
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Testing and Inspection
Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection
Hood Lock Control Inspection
CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own
weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87
in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by
approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood
opener returns to the original position.
3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points as
shown.
Page 8077
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5738
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13136
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 14082
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 297
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 8405
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the given conditions.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.
4. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
5. Perform step 3 again.
Page 5494
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7963
EC-O2H2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B2
Page 762
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 4716
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7469
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7439
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 6323
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 10851
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4281
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3612
Part 2
Page 13817
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 5980
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4078
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
C200
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts
Page 6820
Case 6
Page 928
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5919
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2131
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4473
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4891
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 14820
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9074
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 317
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7351
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 1033
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6301
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 314
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4387
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 8891
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5977
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10836
Page 4234
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 2296
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 10943
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3285
Camshaft: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Runout
1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft.
CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a
different diameter from the other three locations.
2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and
measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Standard: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch)
4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Height
1. Measure the camshaft cam height with micrometer.
Standard: Intake: 45.465 - 45.655 mm (1.7900 - 1.7974 inch) Exhaust: 45.075 - 45.265 mm
(1.7746 - 1.7821 inch) Limit: Intake: 45.265 mm (1.7821 inch) Exhaust: 44.875 mm (1.7667 inch)
2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with micrometer. Standard: No. 1: 25.935 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 inch) No.2,3,4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 inch)
Page 971
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2553
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5010
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7149
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Service and Repair
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation
2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type
spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
^
Frequent engine starts
^ Low ambient temperatures
Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: ^
Extended highway driving
^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch)
Page 981
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5793
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 11829
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1999
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7030
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8176
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8679
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 698
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove
center console. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit
connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing
toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is
correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)".
Page 6588
Page 4436
Page 4825
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Service and Repair
Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front grill. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove the front fender protector (LH).
Refer to "FENDER PROTECTOR". 3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and
unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hood ledge. 4. Remove the bolts, and the hood
release handle. 5. Separate the grommet from the lower dash panel. Pull the hood lock cable out
through the passenger compartment.
CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Pull the hood lock cable through the lower dash panel hole into the engine room.
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keep the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more.
2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the grommet, and push the grommet into the lower dash
panel hole securely. 3. Install the hood release handle. 4. Apply sealant to the grommet (at * mark)
properly.
Page 14487
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 964
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8934
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
LAN System Component Parts
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5388
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8875
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8794
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 10038
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts ^
Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Page 4262
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch
"CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General
Information.
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 6171
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8309
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 9321
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8967
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5907
Page 14617
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7381
Page 11195
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14626
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11941
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set
Classification: EL07-027D
Reference: NTB07-069D
Date: November 30, 2010
FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3
The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended.
Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder
(R51)
APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8
405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273
2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614
APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007*
*IMPORTANT:
Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are
covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel
gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are
working on is instead covered under that Campaign.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative.
And/Or
The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis.
ACTIONS:
Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 999
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 13)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 14)
Page 6490
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7613
Page 5110
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 14287
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Removal
1. Disconnect license plate lamp harness. 2. Depress tab to remove license plate lamp from rear
bumper.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1796
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6657
LAN-CAN-33
CAN System (Type 11)
Page 5170
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 11165
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6289
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 330
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7042
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11407
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 9060
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3722
c. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specifications.
^ Secure camshaft using suitable at the hexagonal portion to tighten bolts.
d. Pull stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary).
6. Install tension guide.
7. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
a. Install crankshaft sprocket.
^ Make sure the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front of engine.
b. Install timing chain (primary).
Page 13586
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 514
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Testing and Inspection
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection
Inspection After Installation
CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the
damaged part.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist,
deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections.
Replace any damaged parts.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lbs.) with engine running for
approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leaks
from each part.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9340
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12253
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 8193
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13675
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1249
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13860
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10858
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 8959
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 14503
Page 3243
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4764
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7104
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9236
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13468
A. Example of correctly aligned condition (pin inserted into shaft link slot). (See Figures 3)
B. Example of misaligned condition (pin not inserted into shaft link slot) (See Figure 4)
4. Remove seat from vehicle.
NOTE:
Place seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt and scuff marks.
Page 1517
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 2134
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13618
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 7328
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 1419
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5426
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 487
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 3762
3. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case, if removed.
^ Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown. Tool
number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended
Chemical Products and Sealants".
4. Install front timing chain case as follows:
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as
shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows:
Page 7051
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9221
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2184
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7869
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12536
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1045
Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads
voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC
SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Page 5096
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5097
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1471
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 947
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 10518
^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel lug nuts to 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb).
CAUTION:
Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. Uneven or high torque applied to the
lugs may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and
excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears.
4. Burnish the brake pads.
A. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
B. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
C. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
D. Repeat A, B and C (above) ten times to complete the burnishing process.
5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the brake squeaking noise is gone.
Page 12257
Disclaimer
Page 10170
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Page 7589
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 11923
Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Link
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lower Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Lower Link Bushing Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary.
Page 1162
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 13766
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 12041
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
IVT CONTROL
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of
the intake valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and
engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the
shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in
high-speed range.
IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the
ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through
intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
Page 7380
Page 7031
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6122
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7241
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2709
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 9043
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 9027
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5986
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2272
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13002
Page 7762
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9173
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 982
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10439
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position
of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 1101
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front kick plate. Refer to "KICK PLATES". 2. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
Refer to "LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER". 3. Remove the front pillar lower finisher. Refer to
"FRONT PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove the assist grip handle 5. Remove the front pillar
upper finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR UPPER FINISHER". 6. Remove the lower glove box.
Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 7. Remove the upper glove box
(cluster lid E). Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL".
8. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
9. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1672
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4
Page 6985
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9175
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5724
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9035
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 973
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7336
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 9281
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4236
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1210
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 601
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6154
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9057
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5444
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4995
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6312
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 4219
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4862
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5017
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Page 4876
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 5576
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 14517
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8954
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 10985
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4663
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 961
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12213
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 7900
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2151
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4617
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 9427
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14677
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12246
Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation
Rotation
^ Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to "PERIODIC
MAINTENANCE".
^ Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires.
CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times
in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
Wheel nut torque: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.)
Page 14837
INSTALLATION
1. Install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom
rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f.
Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank
assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly.
3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset
the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7.
Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR".
Page 5677
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8740
Page 7090
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8970
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 572
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2735
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL
PRESSURE RELEASE".
3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake
manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not
required in use of CONSULT-II).
7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole.
^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm
(0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal.
8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these
steps to check each cylinder.
Compression pressure
CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed.
^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine
speed again with normal battery gravity
^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated
with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark
plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be
malfunctioning. Check valves for damage.
Page 14739
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11672
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring
Squeak On Bumps
Classification: RA05-003
Reference: NTB05-117
Date: December 9, 2005
2005-2006 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAK NOISE FROM LEAF SPRING
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak from the rear of the leaf spring wind-up clip when:
^ going over bumps
Or
^ by compressing the rear suspension
ACTION
^ Inspect the inside of the rear leaf spring wind-up clip plastic cover for contact (rubbing) with the
leaf spring.
^ If signs of rubbing are present, apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the leaf spring and
wind-up clip plastic cover.
Page 1634
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9062
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7781
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2365
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6294
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Service and Repair
Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Level Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir".
2. Pull washer fluid level switch out of washer fluid reservoir in the direction of the arrow as shown.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Reference: NTB09-001
Date: January 24, 2009
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT
AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807
NHTSA #: 08V-690
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier
(D40)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra,
and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that
regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water
and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on
roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in
a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle
operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags
in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan
dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor.
Eligible Vehicles
Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles
registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan,
Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the
campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check
Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The
CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues.
Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their
warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected
vehicles begins on January 26, 2009.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 4484
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 13100
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14521
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 150
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14286
Terminals And Reference Values For BCM Part 2
Terminals And Reference Values For IPDM E/R
Page 12714
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air
bag connectors.
4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure
2.
^ The seat does not need to be removed.
^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit.
CAUTION:
Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes.
Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that
are under the seat.
Page 3755
Part 2
Timing Cover
Page 7847
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1846
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8831
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 344
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2514
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal".
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
Page 7194
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9381
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2306
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1610
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9435
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2154
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9527
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 414
Page 3420
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 8086
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2943
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 7718
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1638
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4611
EC-MAIN-02
Page 6092
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5942
2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT
WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed
and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List
Page 2028
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7575
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4998
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7023
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 3148
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 7500
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5398
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7784
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2996
8. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this
lubricant to "new" compressor through the
suction port opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
lubricant at this time.
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor.
Page 11139
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4769
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5442
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1199
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13712
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 4951
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5674
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4649
Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the
combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with
power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness
connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the
following procedure.
8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug
and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and
check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Page 6672
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 5
Page 8969
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14779
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7736
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13130
2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT
WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed
and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List
Page 8247
6. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor 1 (left bank) using Tool.
Tool number: (J-44626)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1.
^ Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
7. Remove three-way catalyst (left bank). 8. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as
shown.
NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal.
9. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
Page 8968
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Classification: BR11-001
Reference: NTB11-021
Date: March 2, 2011
FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes:
^ While moving forward or reverse
^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure)
^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes)
^ At speeds less than 10MPH
^ While traveling straight or turning.
NOTE:
This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to
duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important
to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being
heard is coming from the front or rear brakes.
ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
Page 1584
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13960
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Page 8839
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4586
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Interior Room Lamp
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7214
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 4569
Page 8319
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 7433
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 6456
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 10877
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8618
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 2522
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1387
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 4328
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 13182
Cowl Weatherstrip: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2845
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 11841
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Testing and Inspection
Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Switch
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 11630
Page 7240
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Page 11069
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 12949
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13162
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Illumination
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13745
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13345
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1518
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the
figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Page 9952
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the
differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 7243
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4790
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 4942
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9836
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 14449
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12598
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Locations
Page 9675
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11148
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5148
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 260
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8335
C200
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts
Page 4050
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown.
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in
series under middle speed condition.
Page 802
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8989
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4911
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1498
Page 6028
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation
ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Control
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control
[HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Page 8698
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7971
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
- Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated
Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8272
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3423
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
Checking Drive Belts
Drive Belt Routing
WARNING: Be sure to perform the inspection when the engine is stopped.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet) when inspecting the drive belt. 2. Visually
check the entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks.
Page 5741
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 13695
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5418
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4968
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7599
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10503
^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel lug nuts to 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb).
CAUTION:
Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. Uneven or high torque applied to the
lugs may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and
excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears.
4. Burnish the brake pads.
A. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
B. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
C. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
D. Repeat A, B and C (above) ten times to complete the burnishing process.
5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the brake squeaking noise is gone.
Page 7166
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11319
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 7947
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 290
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
Page 13578
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Testing and Inspection
PCV Valve Hose: Testing and Inspection
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with
compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
Page 4347
Page 1642
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6948
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 6740
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
Page 1373
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 9797
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9124
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Fuse and Fusible Link Box
Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6018
Page 13964
13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP
hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel
tank.
15. Remove the lock ring using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-45722)
16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
CAUTION:
- Do not bend the float arm during installation.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then
check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 4472
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 6762
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
TCM Circuit Inspection
Page 9672
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5628
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 11087
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7180
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Intake
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data)
....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416
mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch)
Exhaust
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data)
................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432
mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Available Valve Lifter
Page 4786
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7492
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Completely drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
2. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove the rocker
cover (right bank). 4. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor as necessary
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass hoses and water pipe.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^
Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe
bulge.
^ When inserting water pipe into water outlet, apply neutral detergent to O-ring
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS".
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant.
Page 8449
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9483
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14743
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6048
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10206
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1121
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3403
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 5967
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7484
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 13192
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 2673
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 4727
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8013
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 5501
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4739
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 5454
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1112
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3718
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates and roller links of timing chain. Replace
timing chain as necessary.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The figure below shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and
that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
1. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) to cylinder head if removed. Refer to
"INSTALLATION".
a. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) with stopper pin attached and new O-ring. b. Install
camshaft brackets (No. 1). Refer to "INSTALLATION".
2. Install rear timing chain case as follows:
a. Install new O-rings onto cylinder block.
Page 7347
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4158
^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above.
Page 12499
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of
A/C lubricant leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of
refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional
leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component.
CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected
leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles
(J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows
preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain
opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean
shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth
with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to
prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak
repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
NOTE:
- Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze,
windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure
the surfaces to be checked are clean.
- Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
- Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any
substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has
seized and must be replaced.
1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52
kg/sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye
injector (J-41459).
CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a)
fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with
the service procedures.
3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the
engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running),
inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye
(J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC- 134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye
injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector
(J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20
minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C
system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take
from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an
A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE:
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or
equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set
properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Page 10005
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2676
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 3941
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine
conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing
noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure
the valve clearance as follows:
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank)
are located as shown.
^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown.
b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft.
Page 2378
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6201
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11408
Page 9618
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 6645
LAN-CAN-21
CAN System (Type 7)
Page 10022
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7251
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3830
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5732
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8291
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12587
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11683
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Page 4464
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 9328
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5949
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 5052
Page 8384
Diagram Information and Instructions
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2802
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing and slide it over to
the right. Insert the second new in-cabin
microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Close the lower glove box completely.
Page 5004
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2778
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 8422
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1639
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6717
Case 4
Page 13640
Page 409
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 11963
Page 2130
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1278
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5535
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4573
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4075
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1384
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 794
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2416
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7192
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2176
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4818
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1922
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11834
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10804
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5064
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8049
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
VDC/TCS/ABS
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8883
Page 2178
Page 5698
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3895
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 14559
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13519
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Service and Repair
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 3466
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Page 8671
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8294
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the
given conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the
given conditions.
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 4067
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8382
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6738
Case 8
Case 9
Page 7538
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 10119
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Specifications
Page 7513
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
Page 2793
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
2. Rotate the drive belt auto-tensioner in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as
shown, using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the tool accidentally
comes off.
3. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 100
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 9785
Page 13194
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 305
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 8010
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9333
Page 5500
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4599
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 6589
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3
Page 4193
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Page 7171
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8999
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 14318
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7627
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1737
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 2635
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 5072
EC-AF1B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB1
Page 2643
1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge
and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the adjusting bolts in the front
lower link.
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber then check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) minutes with each graduation of one adjusting bolt. Refer
to table for examples of lower link adjusting bolt effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to Components.
Page 11996
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 8089
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4760
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4066
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5777
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6688
HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE
1. Unit names displayed on CONSULT-II. 2. "No indication" : Put a check mark to it if the unit name
described in step 1 is not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen of CONSULT-II.
(Unit communicating with CONSULT-II via CAN communication line) "-" : Column not used (Unit
communicating with CONSULT-II excluding CAN communication line)
3. "NG" : Display "NG" when malfunction is detected in the initial diagnosis of the diagnosed unit.
Replace the unit if "NG" is displayed.
"-" : Column not used (Initial diagnosis is not performed.)
4. "UNKWN" : Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not transmit the data normally. Put
a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed
on CONSULT-II. "-" : Column not used (Transmit diagnosis is not performed.)
5. "UNKWN" : Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not receive the data normally. Put
a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on
CONSULT-II. "-" : Column not used (It is not necessary for CAN communication trouble diagnosis.)
NOTE: CAN communication diagnosis checks if CAN communication works normally. (Contents of
data are not diagnosed.)
- When the initial conditions are reproduced. Refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When
Initial Conditions Are Reproduced".
- When the initial conditions are not reproduced. Refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When
Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced".
Page 8317
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Page 8414
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 6765
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Service and Repair
Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Level Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir".
2. Pull washer fluid level switch out of washer fluid reservoir in the direction of the arrow as shown.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 270
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3455
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 7039
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 728
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 7598
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 12452
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front kick plate. Refer to "KICK PLATES". 2. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
Refer to "LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER". 3. Remove the front pillar lower finisher. Refer to
"FRONT PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove the assist grip handle 5. Remove the front pillar
upper finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR UPPER FINISHER". 6. Remove the lower glove box.
Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 7. Remove the upper glove box
(cluster lid E). Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL".
8. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
9. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9119
Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2458
Page 14785
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4919
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10231
11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 9546
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12751
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 2532
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 14802
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1952
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14660
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3245
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5686
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 4225
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 4858
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 996
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 14369
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 12518
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 1
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission Gear Oil
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 4 1/4 qt (3.98L)
Page 1830
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2537
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 669
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See:
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating
temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned)
are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that
accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the
following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
Page 8643
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 163
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 3667
Page EM-8
Page 2074
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 4952
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6734
Case 4
Page 9297
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1369
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8666
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 485
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 6003
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9809
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6383
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 2087
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2017
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10433
Page 14350
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13479
Torque bolts to 8.5 N-m (0.86 kg-m, 6.26 ft-lb.)
This will prevent the recliner linkage from slipping out of position.
10. Re-install seat and seat back trim.
11. Confirm recliner operates properly. Check manual slide function for effort/binding.
Disclaimer
Page 2025
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2205
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Page 11849
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8935
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1490
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1)
Page 6332
Page 14461
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3516
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 14915
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Nozzle
1. Remove back door finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR TRIM". 2. Disconnect rear washer hose from
rear washer nozzle. 3. Release retaining clips and remove washer nozzle.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Inspect rear washer nozzle for proper spray pattern, adjust as necessary. Refer to "Rear
Washer Nozzle Adjustment".
Page 13865
Page 8376
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s)
Engine Mount: Customer Interest Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s)
Classification: EM11-002
Reference: NTB11-014
Date: February 16, 2011
05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY
APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50:
Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise.
ACTION
Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information
table below
Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 10669
6. Remove the front cable grommet and cover from control lever assembly 7. Remove front cable
to control lever assembly bolt. 8. Remove the control lever assembly adjusting nut, then remove
front cable.
CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it.
9. Remove the rear disc rotors. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc
Rotor".
10. Remove parking brake shoes, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. 11. Remove right and
left rear cable bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables.
INSTALLATION ^
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it.
^ Adjust parking brake. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT".
Page 5221
Optional Splice
Part 1
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5111
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10103
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13059
Repair Flow Chart
Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or
A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are
located in the heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on
the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace
the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are
damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. Open the lower glove box and press in on the sides so that it will open completely allowing it to
hang by the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the heater and cooling unit housing.
Page 13974
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9042
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 8205
Page 2150
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13007
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5389
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 14040
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14799
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 5755
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 955
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 13111
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11558
Page 301
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent
valve from dropping into cylinder. 2. Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. 3.
Remove valve lifters.
4. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool.
CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
Tool numbers : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109220 ( - ) ^
Compress valve spring using Tool attachment, adapter. Remove valve collet with magnet hand.
5. Remove valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number: KV10107902 (J-38959)
INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
2. Press in valve oil seal to height "H" using Tool to specified height.
Tool number: (J-39386)
NOTE: Dimension "H" height measured before valve spring seat installation.
Intake and exhaust: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 inch)
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 4566
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1960
Page 6299
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 8388
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 13903
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3366
7. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. 8. Remove rocker cover gaskets from
rocker covers. 9. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and camshaft
bracket (No. 1).
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK)
1. Apply liquid gasket using Tool to joint part among rocker cover, cylinder head and camshaft
bracket (No. 1) as follows:
Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
NOTE: The figure shows an example of left bank side [zoomed in shows camshaft bracket (No. 1)].
a. Refer to the figure "a" to apply liquid gasket to joint part of camshaft bracket (No. 1) and cylinder
head. b. Refer to the figure "b" to apply liquid gasket to the figure "a" squarely.
2. Install new rocker cover gasket to rocker cover. 3. Install rocker cover.
^ Check if rocker cover gasket is not dropped from installation groove of rocker cover.
Page 9484
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7656
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6634
LAN-CAN-10
Page 5624
Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 8555
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 11470
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Testing and Inspection
Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle
at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator
lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off.
Page 9338
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7633
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1874
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9621
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Page 10266
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7603
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14817
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2030
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating
with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure.
Page 781
Page 6205
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6107
Removal and Installation
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: ^
Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent.
^ When installing, do not get grease from the main drive shaft onto the clutch disc friction surface.
^ If the flywheel is removed, align the dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to
"ASSEMBLY".
REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)".
2. Remove the clutch cover bolts using power tool. Remove the clutch cover and clutch disc.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and main drive shaft spline.
CAUTION: Do not allow grease to contaminate the clutch facing.
2. Install clutch disc and clutch cover. Pre-tighten the bolts and install Tool. Then tighten the clutch
cover bolts evenly in two steps in the order
Page 2486
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4124
6. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor 1 (left bank) using Tool.
Tool number: (J-44626)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1.
^ Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
7. Remove three-way catalyst (left bank). 8. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as
shown.
NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal.
9. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
Page 11345
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Page 9460
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10674
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely disengaged.
1. Remove the rear disc rotor. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and
shoes. 5. Remove pin retainer, then disconnect the parking brake cable from the toggle lever.
Page 7444
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1972
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 39
A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away
from the side rail (see Figure 3).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with
paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic
body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough
to soften the decal for easy removal.
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
B. Peel away the damaged decal.
C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt.
CAUTION:
DO NOT use lacquer thinner.
New Decal - Apply:
5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4).
Page 5293
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1989
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose.
3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting
their joints.
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^
Do not shock it.
^ Do not disassemble it.
^ Do not touch its sensor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^
If anything found, replace air duct.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
Page 9169
Page 11498
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10856
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9182
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 9073
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 13541
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 62
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line
from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Page 8199
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4192
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 4892
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 2109
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Description and Operation
Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power
transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the
proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
Page 5685
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8065
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13751
Page 7230
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 2112
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14061
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14391
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4629
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 12442
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 1915
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 11101
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 7441
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 14827
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10732
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1430
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 1553
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 281
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1986
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 8647
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5320
Page 1470
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13842
Driving from rural (wide open) areas to crowded city areas, or if an aftermarket (i.e., non original
equipment) antenna with a magnetic base is attached to the vehicle. Calibrate the mirror compass
if the display shows only one direction or a limited number of directions.
Page 13698
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9266
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10110
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13702
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7443
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 620
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14761
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13759
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7955
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Page 14199
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2994
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Oil
Name:...................................................................................................................................................
............ Nissan A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1697
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5157
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 299
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
- When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General
Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link
Connector/Data Link Connector Schematic
Page 3808
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 3719
b. Install new O-rings to cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1).
c. Apply liquid gasket using Tool to rear timing chain case back side as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: ^
For "A" in the figure, completely wipe out liquid gasket extended on a portion touching at engine
coolant.
^ Apply liquid gasket on installation position of water pump and cylinder head very completely.
d. Align rear timing chain case with dowel pins (right and left) on cylinder block and install rear
timing chain case.
^ Make sure O-rings stay in place during installation to cylinder block, cylinder head and camshaft
bracket (No. 1).
Page 8293
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor
by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the
flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation
according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine
control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine
conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is
regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/OFF duty to control the flow
rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the
ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
Page 10903
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13722
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4)
Label Location
Page 2538
Page 9072
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 814
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 216
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 8058
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve
Closed
Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Locations
Page 2009
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7967
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
Page 6808
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6066
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 3111
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 2536
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10269
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9196
EC-PHSB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 3864
Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31)
Page 9519
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the
differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 7879
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 10637
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body
Page 8450
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11513
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 9377
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3690
a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal.
- When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not
circumference).
b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt in two steps.
Step 1 : 44.1 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
c. Remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-48761)
9. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly.
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack
in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
Timing Chain
Page 6573
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4360
Page 8607
Page 4557
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 6088
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8739
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 12)
Page 1341
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 4327
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 7284
Page 10447
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation (C200), or "Removal and
Installation" (M226).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 5433
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Description and Operation
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through combination meter terminal 8
- to oil pressure sensor terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
- to oil pressure sensor terminal 3
- from combination meter terminal 10.
The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor
- through oil pressure sensor terminal 2
- to combination meter terminal 19.
Page 10899
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 8971
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 11415
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13732
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5028
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 14767
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6474
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13449
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE
PROCEDURE
1. Preparation for seat removal.
^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make
sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS.
^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors:
A. Write down all radio station presets.
B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Page 8713
Page 7779
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9951
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 289
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is
turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
Page 3042
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9248
Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the
combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with
power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness
connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the
following procedure.
8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug
and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and
check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Spark should be generated.
Page 12172
Page 6708
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6)
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 7932
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 397
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Brake Booster
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster
Removal and Installation
Brake Booster
REMOVAL
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. Replace
clevis pin if it is damaged.
^ Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined
during installation, dash panel may damage the threads.
^ Attach the check valve in the correct direction.
1. Remove actuator and electric unit. Refer to "Removal and Installation (ABS), "Removal and
Installation" (ABLS), "Removal and Installation"
(VDC/TCS/ABS), or "Removal and Installation" (HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS).
2. Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder. 3. Remove brake master cylinder. 4. Remove
vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to "VACUUM LINES". 5. Remove brake pedal attachment
snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 6. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal
assembly. 7. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel.
Page 9020
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 804
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10738
Page 3019
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 6703
Case 7
Case 8
Page 12670
11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4.
12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor.
13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order.
^ Reuse the original cover.
^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor.
^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb).
14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the
codes:
^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function,
SELF-DIAG [PAST].
15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows:
a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure
5).
b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF.
c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the
Service Manual for diagnosis and repair.
^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this
bulletin.
16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector.
Page 1312
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3436
8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket.
9. Finger tighten the two front bolts.
10. Finger tighten the two side bolts.
11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence:
^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb).
^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb).
12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4).
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner.
^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner.
13. Install a new drive belt.
^ Do not reuse the existing belt.
14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal.
Page 9167
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 14807
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9108
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 259
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7248
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2326
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5228
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6954
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR TCM
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
CONTROL UNIT
Page 5100
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7747
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11050
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 4756
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5479
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 7775
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12544
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The
sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage.
The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 13855
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3998
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 924
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11354
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 170
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
- CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM
MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Page 2107
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13828
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 5 - 6)
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate
Page 13522
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Remove crash zone sensor nuts and shield from support member. 2. Disconnect the crash zone
sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor.
CAUTION:
- Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 10121
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7530
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 7937
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 5224
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1974
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12506
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 2282
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14720
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8027
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8803
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH
rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation".
3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank
opening.
- As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately
15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level.
a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the
fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank
through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank,
the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector.
- Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the
quick connector as follows:
- Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
Page 3274
Replace valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case,
replace cylinder head gaskets.
9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC
appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
Page 6927
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 10355
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7707
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11096
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4292
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11691
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3818
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1668
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 4576
Page 11282
Page 8612
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9233
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9230
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5277
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2170
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2846
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4894
Page 4520
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 7692
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7517
EC-MAIN-02
Page 8893
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 12082
^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the
stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1
above.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13357
B. Then pull the mirror at the bottom corners as shown in Figure 1.
^ This will unsnap the mirror from the actuator.
NOTE:
If it is a heated mirror, disconnect the 2 electrical terminals from the mirror.
2. Remove 3 screws and remove the actuator.
Page 7617
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds
Classification: BR11-001
Reference: NTB11-021
Date: March 2, 2011
FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes:
^ While moving forward or reverse
^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure)
^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes)
^ At speeds less than 10MPH
^ While traveling straight or turning.
NOTE:
This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to
duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important
to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being
heard is coming from the front or rear brakes.
ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
Page 8931
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2357
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6592
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 8620
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 6506
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 5074
EC-AF1HB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B1
Page 5383
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6671
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 10222
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5357
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9341
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14283
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 5 (Continued))
Page 9380
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8976
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9615
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 1281
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10201
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1636
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9711
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8069
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1172
7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT:
^ Use a new seal (0-Ring).
^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6.
8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows:
a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders.
b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly.
Page 10631
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad
retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque
member.
Page 8396
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8493
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12947
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1044
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3113
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 11750
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Page 7898
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From
Front Air Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 9347
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12005
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 12381
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 7097
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1586
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1132
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The
sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage.
The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
Page 5493
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1718
EC-O2S2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 992
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 14616
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8219
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 613
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13022
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1248
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11416
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11059
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10044
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
C200
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Axle
Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
M226
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Axle
Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/M226
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 1290
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14804
Page 9626
Disclaimer
Page 5472
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 726
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 14348
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3692
1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC.
- Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (A) (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator (B).
2. Remove front timing chain case. Refer to EM-1, Front Timing Chain Case. 3. Check timing chain
markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke.
- If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-48761)
- If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing
chains to the sprockets.
4. If removing the secondary timing chains, loosen camshaft sprocket bolts.
5. Compress the primary timing chain tensioner.
1. Loosen clip of primary timing chain tensioner, and release plunger stopper (1). 2. Depress
plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). 3. Keep slack guide pressed and insert
stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in.
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
Page 14120
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Page 14740
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Locations
Page 4407
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 6061
Page 11323
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 2354
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2660
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 3697
1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC)
NOTE: Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it
is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key
: At cylinder head side of right bank.
2. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark
positions repeatedly during the installation process.
Page 8738
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 12256
^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the
outside surface of chrome type wheels.
Wheel Alignment:
^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels.
^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be
used to cover the metal mounting hooks.
Page 6147
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 826
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14747
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11569
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 8910
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 10708
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5713
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next
step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 795
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13514
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 4561
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4275
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2124
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 1805
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7132
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 339
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14731
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8393
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13458
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Assembly
REAR SEAT
Removal and Installation
SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
Removal
1. Tilt seat cushion forward. 2. Lift cushion lock handles. 3. Remove seat cushion assembly
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11943
Page 14526
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 8702
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8434
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6798
Case 3
Page 6210
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13216
INSTALLATION
1. Install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom
rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f.
Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank
assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly.
3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset
the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7.
Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR".
Page 890
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 2141
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13678
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13718
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 5474
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Interior Room Lamp
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9125
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 14187
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately.
For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER".
Page 7339
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 4344
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 4211
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 14469
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3874
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 6496
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 10744
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position
of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
Adjustments
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 6446
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 598
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9116
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1458
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 9076
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2617
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 1895
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 8628
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 5978
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 8840
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7719
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11444
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10819
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4736
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8742
a. Remove quick connector cap.
b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into
quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position.
CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts
and goes no further.
d. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as shown.
^ Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
^ Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
^ Avoid fire and sparks.
^ Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
3. Remove PCV hose between rocker covers (right and left banks). 4. Disconnect harness
connector from fuel injector.
5. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown, and remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly
CAUTION: Do not tilt it, or remaining fuel in pipes may flow out from pipes.
Page 5133
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8009
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7607
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1797
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11281
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12533
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5680
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14147
Page 1780
Page 4136
2. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal.
3. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of
removal. Note the following:
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in direction as shown.
Page 1626
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12490
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 1413
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 2101
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3642
Page EM-15
Page 4330
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 2181
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4002
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8477
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1793
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4885
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2173
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9350
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11548
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 9336
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6271
Page 11177
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 1014
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11777
CAUTION:
Do NOT damage the condenser fins when positioning the protective covering and clamp.
6. Drill 1/4 inch (6mm) holes at the marked locations (see Figure 5).
^ For further protection, slip a piece of suitable hose over the drill bit (see Figure 6).
7. Remove any burrs with sand paper or suitable tool.
8. Apply Zinc-Rich Primer (see PARTS INFORMATION) within 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch) in and
around the drilled area, allow to dry.
^ Place suitable covering in front of the condenser prior to applying Primer.
9. Apply Bitumen Wax (see PARTS INFORMATION) within 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch) in and around
the drilled area, allow to dry.
^ Follow instructions on the label of Bitumen Wax.
^ Place suitable covering in front of the condenser prior to applying Bitumen Wax.
^ Wipe off any excess.
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Pressure plate
Pre-tighten the bolts and install Tool. Then tighten the clutch cover bolts evenly in two steps in the
order shown. First step ........................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Final step ........................................
..................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (2.6
kg-m, 19 ft. lbs.)
Page 12911
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the subwoofer.
INSTALLATION - SUBWOOFER (PREMIUM SYSTEM)
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10649
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4.
Remove union bolt, and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly
INSTALLATION
1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to
the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit".
NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer.
2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake
tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench or suitable
tool. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 8381
Canister Vent Valve: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9553
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3292
^ Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with micrometer. Standard: No. 1: 25.935 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 inch) No.2,3,4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 inch)
CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER ^
Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the
tightening procedure.
^ Measure the inner diameter "A" of camshaft bracket with bore gauge. Standard: No. 1: 26.000 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 inch)
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE ^
(Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (Camshaft journal diameter). Standard: No.
1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 inch)
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch)
^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE: Camshaft bracket cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with
cylinder head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play
^ Install dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the end play of dial
indicator when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188
mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) Limit: 0.24 mm (0.0094 inch)
Page 9551
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11508
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 8949
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5491
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1889
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4671
Page 5771
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12321
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 6816
Case 2
Page 5784
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3039
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 11942
Page 1754
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4718
Page 3804
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6621
CAN System (Type 9) Schematic
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4077
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9719
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9337
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 436
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 9030
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1927
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2260
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4856
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10716
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 159
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11578
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 3233
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12983
LT-T/TOW-01
Page 524
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 4967
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4043
Radiator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high-pressure engine coolant escaping from radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly
turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all
the way.
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine cover with power tool. 2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to
"ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly. 4. Remove reservoir tank hose. 5. Removal
radiator hoses (upper and lower) and reservoir tank hose.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belts.
6. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN 7. Disconnect A/T fluid
cooler hoses. (A/T models)
^ Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
Page 13767
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 786
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8764
CAUTION: ^
Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it.
b. Install spacer to fuel damper. c. Insert fuel damper straight into fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
^ Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value: 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lbs.)
^ Insert fuel damper until "B" is touching "A" of fuel tube.
d. Tighten bolts evenly in turn.
^ After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between fuel damper cap and fuel tube.
2. Install new O-rings to fuel injector, paying attention to the following.
CAUTION: ^
Upper and lower O-rings are different. Be careful not to confuse them. Fuel tube side: Blue Nozzle
side: Brown
^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert O-ring straight into fuel injector. Do not twist it.
3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube as follows:
a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. Insert clip so that protrusion "A" of fuel
injector matches cutout "A" of clip.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
^ Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring.
Page 1592
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4112
a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper. (1) b. Insert plunger
into tensioner body by pressing slack guide. (2) c. Keep slack guide pressed and hold plunger in by
pushing stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove. (3)
d. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side
is loose.
e. Remove bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary).
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case.
7. Remove water pump as follows:
a. Remove three water pump bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by
turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until
timing chain looseness on water pump sprocket becomes maximum.
Page 9674
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14033
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
- The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed.
- Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (semitransparent colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
Page 7451
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 6989
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9285
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Service and Repair
Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PIPING
Removal and Installation
Carefully observe the following during clutch tube removal and installation.
CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid onto painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
^ When installing the clutch hose to the bracket, align the clutch hose metal fittings with the bracket
positioning emboss, then install the lock plate to secure.
CAUTION: ^
Do not damage the clutch hose.
^ Make sure the clutch hose is not bent or twisted.
^ Tighten the clutch tube and hose fittings to the specified torque.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse the copper washer.
^ Do not damage the clutch tube fittings or clutch tube.
^ After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to "Bleeding".
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 2701
Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 6882
Case 4
Page 13079
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5729
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4000
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8947
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4688
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10839
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5499
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5358
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11479
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 12120
3. Tighten the new piston rod lock nut to specification. Refer to "Components".
^ Use a new piston rod lock nut for assembly.
Inspection After Disassembly
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly ^
Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
^ Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
^ Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or
cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary.
Coil Spring ^
Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
^ Check the free spring height. Front spring free height 2WD: 345.4 mm (13.6 inch) 4WD: 356 mm
(14.0 inch)
Page 3823
Page 7037
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13180
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 9162
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations
Page 2511
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Page 4502
Page 8263
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4195
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 5574
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 6970
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2171
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8316
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 9433
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 11108
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
- CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM
MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Page 14760
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3687
CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. - Press-fit straight
and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal.
3. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case, if removed.
- Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Tool number : WS39930000
4. Install idler pulley, if removed. 5. Install front timing chain case as follows:
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as
shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Tool number : WS39930000
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 14049
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7571
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5893
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4676
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14164
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2515
7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2
harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect
the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to
"Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 2642
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster
CAMBER AND CASTER
Page 1549
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 568
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 7746
Page 8423
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13504
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 7511
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 9903
Differential Cover: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Locking Differential
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Refer to "DRAINING".
Page 4762
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9652
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14577
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1831
Page 9552
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1973
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8171
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 381
Diagrams
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8436
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1935
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1881
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10946
Page 7872
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6897
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6)
Page 10335
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5056
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 5682
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6908
Case 6
Page 4625
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 1353
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14524
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System
4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 5313
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9106
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12722
- After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no
malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 632
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11384
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5229
Page 9694
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 8546
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air
Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 5836
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3179
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 13116
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 1546
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1354
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14151
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9010
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6010
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Front Suspension
Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension
Page 1031
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6818
Case 4
Page 12682
6. Turn the ignition OFF.
7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows:
The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment.
^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from
the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON).
^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed.
^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the
sensor is completely installed.
^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing.
8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2).
9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3.
^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused.
10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover.
Page 937
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4222
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9170
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6008
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7521
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 13746
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5108
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 5295
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6676
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 8/TYPE 9
Page 9739
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9065
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5915
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5381
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6631
LAN-CAN-07
Page 11475
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5730
Page 14851
1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear
regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f.
Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5.
Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER".
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector.
3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14643
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12671
Page 753
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Page 5944
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch
"CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General
Information.
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear wiper arm. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment
of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and
the glass with mating marks. 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors. 4. Remove the
high mount stop lamp.
Page 8892
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6398
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 4723
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6395
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Testing and Inspection
Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to "CLUTCH PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 11675
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2036
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8712
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11579
Page 3789
Mating mark (F) Yellow link Copper link
- When it is difficult to align mating marks (A) with (B) and (E) with (F) of the primary timing chain
with each sprocket, gradually turn the
camshaft to align it with the mating marks.
- During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary
timing chains.
4. Install internal chain guide.
Page 6141
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8944
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13704
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5749
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3974
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown.
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in
series under middle speed condition.
Page 5450
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9580
Page 5385
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 10814
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3528
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures.
SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C
(0°F)
API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy
Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
Page 13186
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
Page 316
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3846
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt
it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the
coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed.
Page 12788
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 11027
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6679
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 6887
Case 9
Page 11819
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9018
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 3425
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
2. Rotate the drive belt auto-tensioner in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as
shown, using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the tool accidentally
comes off.
3. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys.
Page 14571
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9600
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 9294
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1203
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9168
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13844
IMPORTANT:
If your dealership uses "magnetic hats" for vehicle identification, remove the hat from the vehicle
before performing the following steps. Do NOT put the hat back on the vehicle after the procedure
is completed.
Disclaimer
Page 7796
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3883
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Service and Repair
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil and engine coolant are hot.
REMOVAL
NOTE: When removing oil cooler only, step 1 is unnecessary.
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator and cylinder block. Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT" and
"DISASSEMBLY".
NOTE: Perform this step when removing water pipes.
2. Remove oil filter.
CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on drive belts.
3. Disconnect water hoses from oil cooler.
^ When removing oil cooler only, pinching water hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant
spilling.
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
4. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler.
CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil to rubber parts such as drive belts and engine mounting insulator.
5. Remove water pipes, as necessary
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 12655
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables
and wait at least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove
center console. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit
connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing
toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is
correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)".
Page 7196
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1
Page 11242
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 7027
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1730
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 525
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 5264
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11418
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Page 549
Page 3453
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Page 8051
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 14438
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1340
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 4605
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 9887
shown. First step: 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Final step: 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 19 ft. lbs.) Tool
number: ST20630000 (J-26366)
3. Install the manual transmission. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD
models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle
(For 4WD models)".
Page 9384
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10806
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 435
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 6528
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 13485
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1464
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 6837
Case 2
Page 9028
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12098
2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs.
^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease.
^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring
leafs.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places)
4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension.
Disclaimer
Page 7757
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3738
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 7739
Page 12593
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 907
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9977
Part 2
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the propeller shaft.
2. Put matching mark on the end of the drive pinion. The matching mark should be in line with the
matching mark A on companion flange.
CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
NOTE: The matching mark A on the final drive companion flange indicates the maximum vertical
runout position.
3. Remove the drive pinion lock nut using Tool.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J-44195)
4. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool.
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 6824
Case 11
Case 12
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 9601
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 4848
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14580
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1175
Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations
Page 9305
Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the
combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with
power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness
connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the
following procedure.
8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug
and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and
check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Page 7574
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 935
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9250
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove air cleaner
case (upper), air duct and resonator assembly. (At the left bank side, remove ignition coil) 3. Move
aside harness, harness bracket, and hoses located above ignition coil. 4. Disconnect harness
connector from ignition coil. 5. Remove ignition coil.
CAUTION: Do not shock it.
INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove intake manifold collector with power tool. 2. Move aside
harness, harness bracket, and hoses located above ignition coil. 3. Disconnect harness connector
from ignition coil. 4. Remove ignition coil.
CAUTION: Do not shock it.
INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6442
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 340
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13588
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2362
Page 9614
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2196
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7958
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Tightening Torques & Sequences
Intake Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences
Intake Manifold
^ If stud bolts were removed from cylinder head, install them and tighten to the specified torque.
Intake manifold studs
.................................................................................................................................................... 11.0
Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.)
^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque in two or more steps in numerical order as
shown. Intake manifold bolt and nuts 1st step .....................................................................................
..................................................................................... 7.4 Nm (0.75 kg-m, 5 ft. lbs.) 2nd step and
after
.......................................................................................................................................................
29.0 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 21 ft. lbs.)
Page 12147
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Page 6507
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 9214
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9549
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9528
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5914
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1732
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6202
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Page 616
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9545
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9032
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9172
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7759
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2587
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9249
CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.
- It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is
malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance............................................................................................................................................
....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Page 11889
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 2073
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 2818
14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N
999MP-9G001P).
15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt.
16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
Disclaimer
Page 14587
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8153
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2593
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 1409
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 14558
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1963
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12286
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut Torque ...............................................................................................................................
....................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft.lb)
Page 11835
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1798
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4538
Disclaimer
Page 3630
Page EM-3
Page 2600
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 5862
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 11342
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6093
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4296
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14685
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7926
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6753
Case 4
Page 5457
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1041
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11227
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3232
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11445
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8026
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9873
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nuts from inside the engine compartment. 2.
Disconnect the clutch interlock switch and ASCD clutch switch, then remove the wiring harness
from the pedal assembly. 3. Remove the snap pin and clevis pin. 4. Remove the pedal bracket bolt
and then remove the clutch pedal assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^
Inspect the clutch pedal for bends, damage, or cracked welds. Replace if necessary
^ Make sure that the assist spring and return spring have not lost their spring. Replace if
necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation, inspect and adjust the clutch pedal as necessary Refer to "On-Vehicle Inspection
and Adjustment".
NOTE: Tighten the clutch interlock switch and ASCD clutch switch lock nuts to the specified torque
after inspecting and adjusting the clutch pedal assembly.
Page 1869
Page 3259
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5542
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9467
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4616
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 4474
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 8932
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6173
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13791
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8121
Page 14688
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6172
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7395
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 10821
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 1091
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 8182
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13601
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4496
Page 11532
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 9287
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 11989
Lot Number Locations.
Page 212
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 7698
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 14419
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C".
2. Disconnect the hazard switch connector.
3. Remove the screws and remove the hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6127
EC-MIL/DL-01
Page 11500
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11871
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10880
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4015
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6052
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5671
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 10300
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Page 4988
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 643
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Page 14218
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HEADLAMP BULB
Removal
NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access.
1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Rotate the headlamp bulb
retaining ring counterclockwise and remove. 4. Pull the headlamp bulb straight out from the
headlamp assembly.
CAUTION:
- Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching
the glass portion could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance.
- Do not leave headlamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the assembly just
before replacement bulb is installed.
- After installing the bulb, be sure to install the retaining ring securely for watertightness.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8699
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4606
Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional Diagrams
Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC
Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ECM/PW
EC-ECM/PW-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 7205
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to INFORMATION BUS".
Page 4499
Page 13953
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 4890
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7026
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11539
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 6423
Attachment General Procedure
Page 11154
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7382
Page 10258
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 4442
Page 1863
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3982
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
COOLING FAN MOTOR
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
Page 7701
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 14244
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11132
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10843
Page 8156
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5269
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1408
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
Trailer Hitch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North
America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September
30, 2005
COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch,
inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch
from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer
separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24,
2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System
Removal and Installation
Exhaust System
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the
engine stops.
^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using
tool. Tool number A: (J-43897-18) B: (J-43897-12)
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; install a new one.
^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up
on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them.
^ Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the mounting bolts on
the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts
and bolts to specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^
With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
Page 11361
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5743
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5431
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 14708
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8972
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14399
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7752
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5897
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 8673
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Locations
Page 10957
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 835
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7927
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10986
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder
2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles
originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The
District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in
the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS)
housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens,
the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator.
CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front
air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will
receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the
warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining
the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 5871
Repair Flow Chart
Page 2599
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 9231
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7969
Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor
2.
CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine
and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1
minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Page 3399
Page 11181
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
- CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM
MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Page 602
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9544
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6932
Case 5
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 9595
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 4906
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 13800
Page 8494
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7844
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8023
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 9166
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2191
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8143
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 13374
Paint: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-003 Date: 050112
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-003 Date: 050112
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Page 6437
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 4148
^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above.
Page 1247
Page 10987
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5876
8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7.
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM.
9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness:
^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a).
^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b).
^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place).
Page 7705
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 6418
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 4809
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4264
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to
check CONSULT II data link connector
(DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers
and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector
Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 1679
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8080
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13031
Trip Computer: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Strategies
SEGMENT CHECK
The board computer segment display can be checked by entering combination meter
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION".
Diagnosis Procedure
Page 14679
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9396
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1030
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 12588
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8087
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a
bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
Page 11820
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4722
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 4497
Page 11945
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 1641
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7630
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1806
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 1328
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14923
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear
ADJUSTMENT
INSTALLATION
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF"
(auto stop).
2. Clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness.
3. Install rear wiper arm and blade so that the blade is parallel with the lower edge of back glass as
shown and tighten wiper arm nut to specification.
Rear wiper arm nut: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4018
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14150
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in
the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and
resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 9211
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8645
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7425
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 12050
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component
status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Refer to "Ball Joint".
Page 11317
Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 9193
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 8234
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the
intake valve angle at the control position.
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 13713
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Page 1236
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds.
Page 13244
1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear
regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f.
Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5.
Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER".
Page 12697
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are
an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to
"REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat
cushion.
Page 2460
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance
Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust
neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 12530
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11051
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5721
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs)
Page 13359
6. Press (snap) the sections of mirror in place in the order (1, 2, 3, 4) shown in Figure 6.
^ A "snap" can be heard when pressing each section to verify it has been fitted correctly.
7. Use a plastic trim tool to gently lift the lower corners of the mirror to confirm that it is securely
snapped into place.
^ If the mirror unsnaps when you're doing this check, go back to step 6, above.
NOTE:
Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J46534 (an "essential tool") is available from TECH-MATE.
Disclaimer
Page 3241
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4804
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 9654
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4246
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2
Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 9794
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7956
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9962
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4773
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9071
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4331
Page 3128
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 7524
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 14273
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 8822
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7777
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10303
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 5727
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6780
Case 9
Page 5543
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5205
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14644
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1939
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Page 838
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4870
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3861
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 11152
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6601
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 1625
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 10599
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 7217
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 1450
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2244
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 844
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 688
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.
- It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is
malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance............................................................................................................................................
....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Page 13877
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5582
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11011
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8506
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 275
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10264
Page 6428
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 3253
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11143
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 593
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14001
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8124
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 4022
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3158
Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation
Rotation
^ Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to "PERIODIC
MAINTENANCE".
^ Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires.
CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times
in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
Wheel nut torque: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.)
Page 13271
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
Components
Removal and Installation of Front Fender Protector
REMOVAL
1. Remove screws. 2. Remove pushpins. 3. Remove front fender protector.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2264
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 13516
Cowl Weatherstrip: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5430
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 4815
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14050
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4720
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12501
recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to
"HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
NOTE: At temperatures below 16 °C (61 °F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not
reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure.
4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a" to evaporator
inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (A/C evaporator
drain hose "g" to shaft seal "k"). Refer to MTC-96, "Components". See: Diagrams/Exploded Views
Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector
probe completely around the following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal
- Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal
- Check the liquid tank
- Check the refrigerant pressure sensor
- Check all around the service valves. Check that the service valve caps are screwed tightly on the
service valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue
from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995).
- Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any
refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes
accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before
inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly
drain hose.
NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe
tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the
suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to
check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found,
perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls
manually.
a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d.
Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower speed to HIGH
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak
detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the
refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in
the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the
recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should
be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then
check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment. 14. Confirm the
refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. 15. Discharge the
A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as
necessary.
Page 7708
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 9044
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and
ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air
Volume Learning
Page 10827
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8360
Page 1579
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9997
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
Page 7029
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4159
^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are
located (see Figure 1 and 2 above).
> The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield.
> If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply.
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for
example).
Page 6389
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 571
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft bracket bolts
Step 1: (bolts 7 - 10)
...................................................................................................................................................... 1.96
Nm (0.2kgf-m,17 inch lbs.) Step 2: (bolts 1 - 6)
.......................................................................................................................................................
1.96 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3 ..............................................................................................
.............................................................................. 5.88 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4 ...............
.............................................................................................................................................................
10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.)
Page 1035
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8228
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5061
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12331
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 3786
NOTE:
- Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
- There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used
for the right and left banks, respectively.
Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5).
- Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets,
and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft
front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft
sprocket, and install them.
- On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft
sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not
fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly
turning camshaft(s).
- Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final
tightening will be done with all timing chains installed.
e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary).
Page 1654
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5625
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 14498
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6530
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 3894
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 6764
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 910
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1837
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 9888
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Inspection and Adjustment After Removal
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc
^ Check the clutch disc for wear of facing. Wear limit (depth to rivet head): 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ Measure the circumference runout at the point indicated. If it is outside the specification, replace
the clutch disc. Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) or less/250
mm (9.84 inch) dia.
^ Measure the backlash of the clutch disc spline at the circumference of the disc. If it is outside the
specification, replace the clutch disc. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer disc edge): 1.0 mm
(0.039 inch)
Clutch Cover
With the clutch cover installed on the vehicle, check the diaphragm spring toe height for
unevenness. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust the height using Tool. Uneven limit of diaphragm
spring toe height: 0.7mm (0.028 inch) Tool number: ST20050240 (-) ^
Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear or breakage is found, replace clutch
cover assembly.
NOTE: ^
Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer.
^ Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down.
^ If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact
surface, repair the surface with emery paper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace the
assembly.
Flywheel
Page 5681
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7980
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13046
5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5).
^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips.
6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below).
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6).
^ Install new BCM.
^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6).
7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced,
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6).
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 6855
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 1847
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10523
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the
rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to
replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis.
^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads.
^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local
environmental regulations to decide which brake
cleaner to use.
^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES.
1. Remove the front brake calipers.
^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information.
Page 8899
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13701
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8031
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2546
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 3227
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 273
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6710
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection
Locations
Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Locations
Page 1905
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8508
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 609
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12373
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7087
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2376
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4783
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7055
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4873
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10984
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
RUNNING BOARDS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove screws and remove mud flaps (if equipped). 2. Remove bolts and remove running
board rail from running board brackets. 3. Remove bolts and nuts, then remove running board
brackets from chassis.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6101
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9800
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5090
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9195
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 5927
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1
Page 2192
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 4210
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 12595
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6524
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 6334
Page 14385
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Service and Repair
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: ^
Put a "CAUTION INFLAMMABLE" sign in the workshop.
^ Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a C02 fire extinguisher.
^ Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work
area.
^ To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine coolant when engine is hot.
1. Remove intake manifold collector.
CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold.
2. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side.
^ Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number: (J-45488)
Page 8068
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5409
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5356
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8642
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9604
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 11550
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 6367
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 9539
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11828
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6936
Case 9
Page 4596
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1
Page 3393
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Page 7999
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5281
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7084
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5330
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 4945
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1126
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9282
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3997
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5180
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7717
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9109
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10150
^ Make sure that oil is not leaking from the transmission or around it.
^ Check oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
^ Set a gasket on the filler plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the
specified torque. Refer to Case Components.
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 9085
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13943
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 14513
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9534
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9183
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10157
^ When shift lever assembly is shifted to each position, make sure there is no binding or
disconnection in either boot.
^ When shifted to each position, make sure there is no noise, bending, and backlash. Especially
when shift lever assembly is shifted to 5th, 6th without pressing downward, check for bending.
^ When shift lever assembly is shifted to 1st, 2nd side and 5th, 6th side, confirm shift lever
assembly returns to neutral position smoothly.
^ In any position other than reverse, confirm that shift lever assembly can be pressed downward.
^ With shift lever assembly pressed downward, confirm that it can be shifted to reverse.
^ When shifted from reverse to neutral position, confirm shift lever assembly returns to neutral
position smoothly with spring power.
^ Without shift lever assembly pressed downward, confirm that it cannot be shifted to reverse.
Page 7148
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 9457
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11741
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1685
Page 1397
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Page 8083
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 4126
2. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown.
NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal.
3. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of
removal. Note the following:
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in direction as shown.
Page 1012
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10581
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 1366
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4713
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14819
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 11557
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 6829
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
Page 14569
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7181
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-004D
Reference: NTB05-099D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1752
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11300
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 3290
2. Remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (right and left banks) from cylinder head back side.
CAUTION: ^
Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks.
^ Do not disassemble.
^ Do not allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip.
^ Do not place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valves.
^ Discard intake valve timing control solenoid valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation.
4. Remove camshaft brackets.
^ Mark camshafts, camshaft brackets and bolts so they are placed in the same position and
direction for installation.
^ Equally loosen camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in reverse order as shown.
Page 8397
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3515
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 9456
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1163
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 4960
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
On-Board Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection
LEAK INSPECTION
^ Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake
tube connections.
Page 1475
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 14602
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12364
6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance: 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect
the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. Refer to "DRIVE BELTS".
10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done
by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of
transmitted torque.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 7740
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 823
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Interior Room Lamp
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11549
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 6778
Case 7
Page 2885
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type
Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50%
anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant.
Page 7905
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Page 4943
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2375
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1331
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 298
2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT
WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed
and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List
Page 5107
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 2400
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 11091
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4068
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12590
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1011
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4615
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 1201
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6817
Case 3
Page 9421
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13721
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 1308
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1998
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7567
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6216
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4865
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14909
Washer fluid reservoir screws: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
Page 657
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3
Page 14060
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11129
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6109
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 12896
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 10608
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 2788
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 7938
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11283
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
C200
Differential Cover: Service and Repair C200
Part 1
Page 5773
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7780
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 14733
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5076
EC-O2H2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B1
Page 13560
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Page 9602
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 5185
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1241
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 5372
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7874
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1834
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10148
Fluids and Lubricants Oil" capacity. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
2. After refilling the oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to the filler plug, then install it to the
transmission.
Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 576
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1394
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4359
Page 11610
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 7013
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 12382
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3909
Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20)
Page 3685
23. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case.
24. Remove idler pulley, if necessary.
25. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases,
oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating surfaces.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan.
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread.
26. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner
cover (if necessary) and intake valve timing control
covers.
INSTALLATION
Page 5683
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 13725
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10542
Brake Pad: Specifications
Front brake
Pad Length x width x thickness ......................................................................................................
111.0 x 73.5 x 11.88 mm (4.73 x 2.894 x 0.468 inch)
Rear brake
Pad Length x width x thickness ........................................................................................................
83.0 x 33.0 x 11.0 mm (3.268 x 1.299 x 0.433 inch)
Page 5467
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6595
Page 6458
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 7854
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13832
Display Item List
Page 10305
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage.
Page 4860
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8304
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Page 14905
Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir".
2. Slide retaining ring upward to release front and rear washer motor. 3. Pull out the front and rear
washer motor and remove from the washer tank.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14596
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 599
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 14734
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1824
Page 7496
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Specifications
Transfer Case: Specifications
TX15B ..................................................................................................................................................
..................... 2.0 Liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt)
Page 12739
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The Top Tether Strap Child Restraint system is not serviceable.
Page 10268
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 1178
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH
rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation".
3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank
opening.
- As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately
15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level.
a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the
fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank
through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank,
the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector.
- Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the
quick connector as follows:
- Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION:
Page 7045
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 12721
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a
direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. 2. Disconnect front and rear side curtain air bag module connectors.
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors".
3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag
module.
CAUTION:
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90 °C (194 °F).
- Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors".
Page 10635
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to
"Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer for union bolt.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Install tires to the
vehicle.
Disassembly and Assembly
Part 1
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
Page 2685
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 2265
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1555
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1705
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 3235
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6748
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 7565
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2379
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 660
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 9554
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2777
5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1.
^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6.
^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12.
6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield
out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool.
7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See
Figure 2.
Page 2331
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4251
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is
turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
Page 13173
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 6725
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
Page 4395
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 14381
Page 3183
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Axle Parts ^
Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Page 7101
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 1716
EC-O2H2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B1
Page 5985
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10347
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10907
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 2550
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12395
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 14732
Page 13757
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 424
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 2174
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10932
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3693
6. Remove internal chain guide. 7. Remove timing chain (primary).
Caution: After removing timing chain (primary), do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
valves will strike the piston heads.
8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary.
9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
a. Attach stopper pin to the right and left timing chain tensioners (secondary).
NOTE:
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts.
Page 4132
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Page 3622
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Testing and Inspection
Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle
at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator
lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off.
Page 7815
Page 10828
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 5899
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11690
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10794
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7103
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 10997
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4070
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13696
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2
Page 12136
9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from
steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components for tightening torques".
CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin.
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment".
Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection".
Page 4011
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP
Removal
NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access.
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.
Page 6059
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7600
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1994
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1134
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 13202
6. Remove the front gasket and rear gasket.
7. Remove the door lock assembly TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 00 in-lb)
8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle
bracket and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
INSTALLATION
Installation in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1557
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3168
^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the
outside surface of chrome type wheels.
Wheel Alignment:
^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels.
^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be
used to cover the metal mounting hooks.
Page 7785
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4674
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14701
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2531
Page 11248
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 10792
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5923
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 3675
Page EM-16
Page 7665
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6742
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
BCM Circuit Inspection
Page 8181
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 115
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1503
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 11377
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Canister Vent Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 4023
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5744
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Testing and Inspection
Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection
FUEL SYSTEM
Checking Fuel Lines
Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,
loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
Page 510
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 9066
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14600
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6590
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10171
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234,
"COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case.
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 12798
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 2812
2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1).
^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top.
3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1).
4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and
remove the hose (see Figure 2).
Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve.
Page 10766
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation" (C200), or "Removal and
Installation" (M226).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 7983
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1402
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14280
License Plate Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Strategies
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function
description. Refer to "System Description". 3. Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-96,
"Preliminary Check". See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 4. Check symptom and repair
or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Do the parking, license and tail lamps operate normally? If
YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. 6. Inspection End.
Page 14444
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8591
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5509
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 7044
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 1585
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4887
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12799
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 3329
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING
^ When lower cylinder block is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main
bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening
procedure. Standard: There must be crush height.
^ If the standard is not met, replace main bearings.
MAIN BEARING
Page 5813
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Testing and Inspection
Fuel Filler Cap: Testing and Inspection
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/sq.cm, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.3 kPa (-0.061 to -0.034 kg/sq.cm,-0.87 to -0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
Page 14611
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13187
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 14696
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 736
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 6782
Case 12
Case 13
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 11292
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6488
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 745
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 5222
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6761
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
Page 966
Page 4223
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Description and Operation
Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 9779
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6203
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1822
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10947
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8651
Page 5458
Page 14373
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12035
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 651
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 1485
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11399
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
- CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM
MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Page 9198
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 8988
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 13330
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 13214
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Front Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power
window switch.
3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the
outside of the door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
- Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
- On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm
(0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Front Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect
the power window switch.
Page 8282
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4537
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 11486
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6838
Case 3
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124
Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement
Reference: NTB09-001
Date: January 24, 2009
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT
AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807
NHTSA #: 08V-690
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier
(D40)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra,
and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that
regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water
and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on
roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in
a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle
operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags
in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan
dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor.
Eligible Vehicles
Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles
registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan,
Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the
campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check
Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The
CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues.
Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their
warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected
vehicles begins on January 26, 2009.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 11173
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Daytime running lamps (Canada only)
- Parking lamps
- Tail lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window
defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped).
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each
control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown.
Page 4742
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 6366
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 12603
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 9115
Page 6928
Case 1
Page 9689
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 11414
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 337
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13164
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 12026
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 6920
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 1309
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1719
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
Page 10249
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6198
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11208
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4950
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13190
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
Page 11144
Page 8120
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3547
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Locations
Air Duct: Locations
Page 14277
Under this condition, the parking, side marker, license and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5
minutes, then the parking, side marker, license plate and tail lamps are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
Page 4411
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 13815
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 3400
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 6615
CAN System (Type 1) Schematic
CAN System (Type 2) Schematic
Page 11159
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5926
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Disconnected
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 6270
Page 4913
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8402
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11365
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9606
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5655
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL
PRESSURE RELEASE".
3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake
manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not
required in use of CONSULT-II).
7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole.
^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm
(0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal.
8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these
steps to check each cylinder.
Compression pressure
CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed.
^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine
speed again with normal battery gravity
^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated
with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark
plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be
malfunctioning. Check valves for damage.
Page 1378
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4852
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9981
Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION: Do not damage axle housing.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the new oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of the
new oil seal. Install the new front oil seal into the
axle housing using Tool. Tool number: ST15310000
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ Do not incline oil seal when installing.
^ Apply multi-purpose grease onto oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of oil seal.
2. Align the matching mark of the drive pinion with the matching mark B of the companion flange,
then install the companion flange.
3. Install the washer (if required), and new drive pinion nut. Tighten the nut until there is zero
bearing end play using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000 (-)
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer.
4. Rotate the drive pinion using Tool. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in
step 4 above during removal plus an additional
Page 5315
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 12607
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7936
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10936
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6352
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 3632
Page EM-5
Page 2329
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7893
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Page 2787
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 889
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Installation is in the reverse order
of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the
sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200
REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Page 10809
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5872
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 1924
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7657
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8225
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1171
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 558
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 888
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation (C200), or "Removal and
Installation" (M226).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures
Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures
Classification: EM09-012
Reference: NTB10-001
Date: January 4, 2010
2005-2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; REVISED VQ40 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN
PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) - VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
- VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the VQ40 engine front timing chain case and timing chains
(primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and
intake collector.
In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain
tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe.
Nissan Service Manuals for 2005-2010 Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles will be updated
with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as
possible.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown in this
bulletin for any VQ40 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related
repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR - FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
Page 6906
Case 4
Page 11167
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6709
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 10)
Page 9969
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 5987
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12769
Page 11621
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 5239
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8491
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10925
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 8674
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 406
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 5291
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9540
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10571
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 48
A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away
from the side rail (see Figure 3).
CAUTION:
Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with
paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic
body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.).
Important Points
^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough
to soften the decal for easy removal.
^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts.
^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not
hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle
moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal.
B. Peel away the damaged decal.
C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt.
CAUTION:
DO NOT use lacquer thinner.
New Decal - Apply:
5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4).
Page 6978
Page 1602
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 650
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 5445
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1987
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 5776
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13003
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6063
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
ISC SYSTEM
Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air,
which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating
of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft
position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the
target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the
engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine
conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power
steering and cooling fan operation, etc.).
Page 9756
7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2
harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect
the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to
"Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 14496
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir
REMOVAL
1. Remove front fender protector RH. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Front Fender
Protector".
2. Remove front and rear washer hoses from washer motor; allow washer fluid to drain. 3.
Disconnect front and rear washer motor and washer fluid level switch connectors.
4. Remove clip, then remove filler neck from washer fluid reservoir.
5. Remove washer fluid reservoir screws and remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir filler neck,
and check for water leaks. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1734
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 7561
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9571
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 4242
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12916
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 12200
Page 13606
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Electrical Diagrams
EC-ASC/BS
EC-ASC/BS-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ASCBOF
Page 6341
Page 8447
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3043
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. 2. Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector. 3.
While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and release from the
steering column.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3838
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM".
- Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM".
- Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE
- Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP".
- Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME".
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING LAMPS".
- Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Mode Door Motor
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Mode Door Motor
Mode Door Motor Circuit
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Mode door motor
- PBR (built into mode door motor)
- Intake sensor
System Operation
The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, D/F, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of
the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is
applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing
the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage
applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door
position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged
from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which
activates the mode door.
Page 11077
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1376
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7455
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 5376
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
Page 14795
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9432
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2914
^ Make sure that oil is not leaking from the transmission or around it.
^ Check oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
^ Set a gasket on the filler plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the
specified torque. Refer to Case Components.
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 7501
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 10484
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and cylinder body from torque
member.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: REfill with new brake fluid. Refer to Fluids and Lubricants.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts and torque member to caliper, if removed. Refer to
Components.
3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to Components.
CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wiper any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder
body attachment surfaces.
- Do not reuse cylinder body torque member bolts.
4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, If removed, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to Components.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt.
- Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers.
5. REfill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. 6Installtall wheel and tire.
Refer to Rotation.
Disassembly and Assembly
Page 10434
Repair Flow Chart
Page 6518
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
Page 9238
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11400
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Page 6758
Case 9
Case 10
Page 13831
Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "DATA MONITOR" screen. 4. If
"SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the item you desire to monitor. If "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all control items are
monitored.
5. Touch "START". 6. During monitoring, touching "RECORD" can start recording the monitored
item status.
Display Item List
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. 4. During the
operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
Page 378
Page 974
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14835
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Front Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power
window switch.
3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the
outside of the door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
- Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
- On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm
(0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Front Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect
the power window switch.
Page 11515
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Page 5758
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Page 2554
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6848
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
BCM Circuit Inspection
Page 1757
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3302
Available Valve Lifter
VQ40DE
Page 10043
9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from
steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components for tightening torques".
CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin.
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment".
Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection".
Page 7088
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13066
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 3465
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 1411
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11464
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Daytime running lamps (Canada only)
- Parking lamps
- Tail lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window
defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped).
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each
control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown.
Page 7609
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7394
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 1495
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9720
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8071
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7164
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8198
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2284
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12827
11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4.
12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor.
13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order.
^ Reuse the original cover.
^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor.
^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb).
14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the
codes:
^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function,
SELF-DIAG [PAST].
15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows:
a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure
5).
b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF.
c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the
Service Manual for diagnosis and repair.
^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this
bulletin.
16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector.
Page 6677
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 13812
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1721
Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor
2.
CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine
and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1
minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Page 1262
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7244
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7732
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagnostic Aids
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 13025
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7178
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 303
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or
change setting value for each item according to the
configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration
items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the
CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be
manually set or changed.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation".
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting
vehicle model cannot be memorized.
Page 5298
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4758
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 3877
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 8217
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 14836
3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until
the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle
and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the
glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped,
disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly.
9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
Page 10271
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5099
Page 7803
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1964
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7797
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 4306
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 7268
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1912
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 567
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 9334
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1170
3. Unwind the harness.
4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows:
a. Press in on the lock tab.
b. Slide the sender unit off.
C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor.
5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order.
Page 12072
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10587
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any
non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub. (2 or more positions.)
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside disk edge.]
Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.07 mm (0.0028 inch)
NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification before measuring
runout. Refer to "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc
rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake
lathe.
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or
exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness: 18.0 mm (0.709 inch) Wear limit: 16.0 mm (0.630 inch) Maximum uneven wear
(measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch)
Page 12575
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C
evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 2469
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7413
Page 8987
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6269
Page 4665
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8162
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5632
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 7475
Page 1896
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP
canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under
the given conditions.
CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
- Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg,
29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Page 9782
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8722
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3015
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 8490
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6571
Information Bus: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 2043
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1339
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Service and Repair
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 320
Page 14661
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5192
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1967
Page 388
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 6120
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7405
Page 11803
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Page 5421
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8629
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 9801
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 523
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 7858
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 7110
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10841
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5164
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13045
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 9877
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Install the release bearing to release bearing sleeve using suitable tool, as shown.
^ Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas.
^ Apply grease to the specified points as shown.
^ Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and
holder spring frictional surfaces.
^ Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to ball pin contact surface of the withdrawal lever and inner
slots of the release bearing. The grease surface should be level with the surrounding area.
^ Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to the release bearing frictional surface. After grease
application, Install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation.
CAUTION: ^
Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides
smoothly by operating withdrawal lever.
^ Be careful not to bring any grease into contact with the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface,
or flywheel surface.
^ When assembling, make sure that both ends of the snap spring touch the end face of the
withdrawal lever.
^ Be careful with the orientation of the installation.
Page 7353
Page 4621
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Page 7477
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7696
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4874
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 957
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 2356
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1688
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 23
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 7512
Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional Diagrams
Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC
Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-ECM/PW
EC-ECM/PW-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
ISC SYSTEM
Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air,
which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating
of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft
position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the
target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the
engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine
conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power
steering and cooling fan operation, etc.).
Page 11287
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7310
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 8825
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3234
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 14829
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11008
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9463
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1421
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14067
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7440
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 8981
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5027
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 12528
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8432
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10902
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10770
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 4994
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 5940
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 8188
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Page 13614
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 13185
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 2099
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12958
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14729
Power Window Motor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Locations
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6913
Case 11
Case 12
Page 9209
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8001
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1437
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1587
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5841
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 12004
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9619
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Page 1678
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 228
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Page 3422
Drive Belt: Specifications
DRIVE BELT
Page 1583
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1268
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System
4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 4678
Page 12979
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13179
Page 6700
Case 4
Page 13574
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7824
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 7505
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 6051
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14268
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9295
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5015
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8990
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3815
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7647
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3910
Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24)
Page 7653
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13806
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Service and Repair
Antenna Amplifier: Service and Repair
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp.
NOTE:
- If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly
and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show "LOCK MODE" or "CHAIN OF
IMMU-KEY".
- Initialization is not necessary only when NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one.
Page 9477
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Classification: EM-10-009
Reference: NTB10-094
Date: August 12, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
WARNING:
Page 2969
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. 1.
Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.
2. Insert oil level gauge and make sure the engine oil level is within the range as indicated on
gauge. 3. If the engine oil is out of range, add oil as necessary.
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
^ Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
^ If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses
these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 4114
2. Install water pump.
CAUTION: Do not allow timing chain case to nip O-rings when install water pump.
^ Make sure that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.
^ Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
3. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
a. Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of timing chain tensioner (primary)
and from installation area of rear timing chain
case.
b. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side
is loose. c. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) with its stopper pin attached.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case.
d. Remove stopper pin. e. Make sure again that timing chain and water pump sprocket are
engaged.
4. Install chain tensioner cover and water pump cover as follows:
a. Before installing, remove all traces of old liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover
and chain tensioner cover using scraper. Also
remove traces of old liquid gasket from the mating surface of front timing chain case.
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Page 5344
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 13050
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 14750
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 611
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10545
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
Part 1
- Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if
necessary. Standard thickness: 11.0 mm (0.433 inch) Repair limit thickness: 2.0mm(0.079 inch)
Page 189
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Housing Assembly HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 7675
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1452
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1681
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. 2. Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector. 3.
While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and release from the
steering column.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7954
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 12862
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are
an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to
"REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat
cushion.
Page 5333
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
PG-POWER-09
Page 6949
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6)
Page 4571
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2129
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2045
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start
Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
Page 7953
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3911
Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28)
Page 6839
Case 4
Page 7352
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 153
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7800
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 3810
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8458
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge
retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Page 10467
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released.
6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 3942
Valve clearance
^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown
(locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge.
^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC
c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at
TDC of its compression stroke.
NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to
rotation angle.
Page 11682
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 1223
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Lamp Switch
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
^ Check continuity.
Page 6460
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 5559
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 14506
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5788
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3736
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 4346
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 4859
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8496
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 5959
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5324
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 11624
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 2186
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7364
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 5373
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 10124
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13769
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 861
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11732
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 14248
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 7658
Page 621
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2355
Page 5403
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7436
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 10918
Alternator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the fan shroud. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4.
Remove generator stay, using power tools. 5. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools.
6. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. 7. Remove the generator.
GENERATOR PULLEY INSPECTION
Perform the following.
- Make sure that the generator pulley does not rattle.
- Make sure that the generator pulley nut is properly tightened.
Generator pulley nut : 118 Nm (12.0 kg-m, 87 ft-lb)
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the generator and check tension of drive belt. Refer to "Tension Adjustment".
Terminal "1" nut : 10.8 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Be sure to tighten terminal "1" nut carefully.
- For this model, the power generation voltage variable control system that controls the power
generation voltage of the generator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation variable
voltage control system operation inspection should be performed after replacing the generator, and
then make sure that the system operates normally. Refer to SC-33, "Power Generation Variable
Voltage Control System Inspection". See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/Non-Trouble Code Procedures/Power Generation Variable Voltage Control System
Inspection
Page 3640
Page EM-13
Page 2079
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6185
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1342
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 217
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 4899
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14578
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 2291
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 1465
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2161
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3858
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10950
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8426
Page 4761
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Service Limits & General Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
^ Check with connecting rod aligner. Bend: Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch)
length Torsion: Limit: 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch) length
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter "d" at position shown. If the reduction appears in a position other
than "d", regard it as "d". Limit: 7.75 mm (0.3051 inch)
^ When "d" exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace connecting rod bolt with new one.
CONNECTING ROD
Page 8558
Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 11196
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6443
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 1313
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8050
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 3669
Page EM-10
Page 6849
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 4172
Repair Flow Chart
Page 12461
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
Components
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY". See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service
and Repair
2. Remove the three screws and remove the heater core cover. 3. Remove the heater core and
evaporator pipe bracket.
4. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION
Page 14078
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14581
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1886
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14475
LT-T/TOW-03
Page 12201
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS".
NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Page 4763
Page 11262
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb
Page 14071
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1608
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 12566
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy.
5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical
connector.
6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal.
Page 11944
Page 7242
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 3713
19. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 20. Remove water pump cover and chain
tensioner cover from front timing chain case, if necessary
^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
21. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case.
22. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases
and oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating
surfaces.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan.
^ Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread.
Page 6617
CAN System (Type 5) Schematic
Page 10813
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10274
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 6669
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 11296
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3700
c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)].
- Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) with the ones on
camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) (4), (5), (7) and (10) (punched),
and install them.
Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (2) Copper link Blue link
Page 3189
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
C200
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/C200
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
M226
Removal and Installation
The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/M226
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 6653
LAN-CAN-29
Page 9807
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5092
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 463
Page 7062
EC-O2H2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2H2B2
Page 1776
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Disconnected
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 1093
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 10934
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2163
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 8599
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4700
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 2216
6. Turn the ignition OFF.
7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows:
The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment.
^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from
the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON).
^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed.
^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the
sensor is completely installed.
^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing.
8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2).
9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3.
^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused.
10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover.
Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or
A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are
located in the heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on
the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace
the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are
damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. Open the lower glove box and press in on the sides so that it will open completely allowing it to
hang by the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the heater and cooling unit housing.
Page 13053
Page 8220
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 6256
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 14687
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12532
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 10169
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Removal and Installation
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Page 5273
Page 10233
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Air Bag System
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Air Bag System
Repairs and Inspections Required After A Collision
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
Check the SRS components using the given table.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Part 1
Page 3565
^ Insert Tool between oil pan (upper) and lower cylinder block. Slide Tool by tapping on the side of
Tool with hammer. Remove oil pan (upper). Tool number KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surfaces.
16. Remove O-rings from bottom of lower cylinder block and oil pump.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer if any object attached.
INSTALLATION (UPPER) 1. Install oil pan (upper) as follows:
a. Use scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
^ Also remove the old liquid gasket from mating surface of lower cylinder block.
^ Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Install new O-rings on the bottom of lower cylinder block and oil pump.
Page 4591
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 4198
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 6027
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 7612
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8441
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley
Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt. Crankshaft bolt torque
...................................................................................................................................................... 44.1
Nm (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft. lbs.)
Put a paint mark on crankshaft pulley aligning with angle mark on crankshaft pulley bolt. Then,
further retighten bolt by 60° (equivalent to one graduation).
Front
Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Front Washer Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir".
2. Slide retaining ring upward to release front and rear washer motor. 3. Pull out the front and rear
washer motor and remove from the washer tank.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10346
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Environmental Impact Information
Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed
waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for
advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The
regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Page 4724
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2434
Page 8097
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1398
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11150
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13952
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 1528
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9327
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 1979
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8613
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11359
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14622
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2470
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3772
CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. - Press-fit straight
and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal.
3. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case, if removed.
- Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Tool number : WS39930000
4. Install idler pulley, if removed. 5. Install front timing chain case as follows:
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as
shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Tool number : WS39930000
Page 2303
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8719
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
Page 4079
Page 3701
NOTE:
- Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
- There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used
for the right and left banks, respectively.
Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5).
- Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets,
and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft
front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft
sprocket, and install them.
- On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft
sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not
fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly
turning camshaft(s).
- Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final
tightening will be done with all timing chains installed.
e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary).
Page 13417
4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube.
6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied.
Torque screws to:
Page 3359
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the
engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.
Page 6991
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 9678
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 7880
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2011
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1541
Page 1962
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6257
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 4867
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10369
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid
leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal".
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
Page 7485
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 749
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 8816
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14334
Page 7105
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13552
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 1333
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6658
LAN-CAN-34
Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as
necessary. Refer to Drain and Refill.
NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle.
3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the
vehicle.
Page 6324
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 2182
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9501
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 9730
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4439
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Page 3771
1. Hammer dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in
order to shorten protrusion length.
2. Install new front oil seal on the front timing chain case.
- Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip. - Install it so that each seal lip is oriented
as shown.
- Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift
[outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 in)]. - Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not
inverted.
Page 12258
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
WHEEL
Inspection
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other
damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as
shown in the illustration. Refer to "Road Wheel".
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness.
Page 11499
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12007
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9129
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7290
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 311
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11428
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13752
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2791
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
Checking Drive Belts
Drive Belt Routing
WARNING: Be sure to perform the inspection when the engine is stopped.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet) when inspecting the drive belt. 2. Visually
check the entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks.
Page 11907
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
CAUTION: ^
Secure the gear housing assembly with a vise. Use copper plates or equivalent to prevent it from
being damaged. Do not grip the cylinder with a vise.
^ Before performing disassembly, clean the gear housing assembly. Be careful not to allow any
cleaner to contact the discharge and return port connectors.
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the cylinder tubes from the gear housing assembly. 2. Loosen the lock
nuts of the outer sockets, then remove the outer sockets from the inner sockets. 3. Remove the
boot clamps from the boots, then remove the boots from the inner sockets and gear housing
assembly.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps.
^ Do not damage the boots, inner socket or gear housing assembly. If they are damaged, replace
them.
4. Remove the inner sockets.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace
if necessary.
Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as
an assembly if necessary.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
Page 2305
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 2548
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 12909
Speaker: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Speaker
REMOVAL - FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1. Remove door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER".
2. Remove the front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the connector and remove speaker from
front door.
INSTALLATION - FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front door speaker screws : 3.5 Nm (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
REMOVAL - REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR".
2. Remove the rear door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the connector and remove speaker from
rear door.
INSTALLATION - REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear door speaker screws : 3.5 Nm (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
REMOVAL - FRONT TWEETER
1. Remove the front tweeter grille.
Page 6483
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9406
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7550
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 11627
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 7618
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5198
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 7293
Page 5025
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 7875
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1995
Optional Splice
Part 1
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 9803
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 2702
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 8399
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 12649
10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit.
Page 10297
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 66
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position
of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
Page 230
hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3).
^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover.
^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips.
^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel.
4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4).
Page 6871
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
Page 11635
1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge
and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the adjusting bolts in the front
lower link.
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber then check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) minutes with each graduation of one adjusting bolt. Refer
to table for examples of lower link adjusting bolt effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to Components.
Page 9270
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7157
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37,
"CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking
System
Page 1657
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)]
CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use
only new ones.
Page 8668
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 649
EC-MAIN-02
Page 11541
Page 8833
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 9277
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6931
Case 4
Page 10752
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
On-Vehicle Service
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before
running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II.
BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE".
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
G Sensor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE".
Page 14562
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13581
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3112
Page 1271
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 6280
Attachment General Procedure
Page 5144
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6585
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 14604
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11507
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11189
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 3683
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft
pulley.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to
protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it.
19. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown.
Page 775
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3682
- Perform this step when engine is cold. - Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
4. Remove engine cooling fan (Motor driven type). 5. Disconnect engine harnesses and remove
harness brackets from front timing chain case. 6. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve, if necessary. 7. Remove drive belt. 8. Remove power steering oil pump from
bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9. Remove power steering oil pump
bracket.
10. Remove generator. 11. Remove water bypass hoses and water hose clamp. 12. Remove
engine cooling fan (Crankshaft driven type) and fan bracket. 13. Remove water hose at oil cooler.
14. Remove oil cooler water bypass pipe from front timing chain case.
15. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers.
- Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing,
keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected.
16. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 17. Remove A/C
compressor bolts and temporarily secure A/C compressor aside. 18. Remove crankshaft pulley as
follows:
a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-48761)
Page 6807
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
Page 9673
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5881
^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.)
9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced:
^ Install the new Sub-Harness.
^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15).
12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel
Bracket Hole (see Figure 18).
13. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
16. Re-program all radio station presets.
17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Page 14491
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 8993
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 2066
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 839
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13108
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8878
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
CAN System (Type 1)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4085
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2995
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
LUBRICANT
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to
compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is
important to maintain the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
- Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
LUBRICANT
Name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGR0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the
engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
- Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower speed: Max. position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30 °C (77° to 86 °F)]
- Intake position: Recirculation ( )
- Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the given table.
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the
system.
Amount of Lubricant to be Added
Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant".
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated
Refrigerant".
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant
discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the lubricant from the "old" (removed)
compressor into graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. 6. Drain the
lubricant from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of
new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this lubricant to "new"
compressor through the
suction port opening.
Page 383
Attachment General Procedure
Page 4007
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10627
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Rear
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
- Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the
above conditions are observed.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding
sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them.
Page 13664
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 227
Repair Flow Chart
Page 7470
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 3534
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING: ^
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Warm up engine, put vehicle on flat and level surface then check for engine oil leakage from
engine components. Refer to "ENGINE OIL
LEAKAGE".
2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Loosen oil filler cap and then remove drain plug. 4. Drain
engine oil. 5. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER".
CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
6. Refill with new engine oil.
Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
Engine oil capacity (Approximate)
CAUTION: ^
When filling engine oil, do not pull out oil level gauge.
^ The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
^ Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine.
7. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 8. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes. 9. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL".
Page 6337
Page 7246
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Specifications
Page 196
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 747
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 11289
Page 11257
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Disclaimer
Procedure A
PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK
Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring
Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows.
Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4914
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8744
CAUTION: ^
Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it.
b. Install spacer to fuel damper. c. Insert fuel damper straight into fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
^ Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value: 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lbs.)
^ Insert fuel damper until "B" is touching "A" of fuel tube.
d. Tighten bolts evenly in turn.
^ After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between fuel damper cap and fuel tube.
2. Install new O-rings to fuel injector, paying attention to the following.
CAUTION: ^
Upper and lower O-rings are different. Be careful not to confuse them. Fuel tube side: Blue Nozzle
side: Brown
^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert O-ring straight into fuel injector. Do not twist it.
3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube as follows:
a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. Insert clip so that protrusion "A" of fuel
injector matches cutout "A" of clip.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
^ Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring.
Page 11117
Page 6705
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 13539
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 9070
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7829
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1817
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 12984
LT-T/TOW-02
Page 7020
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses
these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 210
Repair Flow Chart
Page 14764
Page 12592
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 133
Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 7495
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5003
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2529
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Service and Repair
Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP
Removal
NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access.
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.
Page 1801
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3828
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Locations
Evaporative System Service Port: Locations
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8783
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 5250
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6065
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 13515
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Page 8274
Page 10863
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
^ Check continuity.
Page 11869
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 9770
Shifter A/T: Adjustments
Adjustment of A/T Position
1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place the manual lever and selector lever in "P" position. 3. Push
the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N (1 kg, 2.2 lbs.), release it. This is in the
natural state, tighten control cable nut
to specifications. Control cable nut: 14.5 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
Page 11426
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1968
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4303
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2057
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 1474
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 1213
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1613
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1374
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3316
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences
Rod Bearing Cap
Tighten connecting rod bolts. Connecting rod bolt
..........................................................................................................................................................
19.6 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.)
Then tighten all connecting rod bolts 90° clockwise.
Page 9970
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
Page 8610
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11617
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 11063
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 10939
Page 13707
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9025
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 13724
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 13)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 14)
Page 1597
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6923
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 8)
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Page 2761
15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield.
16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved.
Page 9599
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 8545
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and
maintained for as long as the procedure is running.
C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds.
D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN].
F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes.
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume
Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H.
C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within
specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK,
procedure ends here. If not, go to step H.
H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you:
^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and
^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above.
Go to step 3.
NOTE:
Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4.
^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned
IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed.
3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM
reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL.
A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part
Number (P/N) as follows:
[START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY]
Page 1423
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5844
Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Component Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by
reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery
current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the
charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or
not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power
generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on
the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to
IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And
Charging.
CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery
terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control,
and then the battery discharge may occur.
Page 3257
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13786
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13945
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 7476
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 13870
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 5382
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2143
Page 13555
9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body.
10. Install the cowl top.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
11. Replace the blower motor.
^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
Page 8155
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3766
Timing Cover: Removal and Replacement
"The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB-NTB10-001"
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
1. O-ring 2. Collared O-ring 3. Intake valve timing control cover (RH) 4. Idler pulley 5. Drive belt
auto tensioner 6. Intake valve timing control cover (LH) 7. Collared O-ring 8. O-ring 9. Chain
tensioner cover 10. Cooling fan bracket 11. Crankshaft pulley 12. Front oil seal 13. Water pump
cover 14. Front timing chain case 15. O-ring A. Refer to Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1.Remove engine room cover. 2.Drain engine oil.
CAUTION: - Perform this step when engine is cold. - Do not spill engine oil on drive belts.
3. Drain engine coolant from radiator.
CAUTION: - Perform this step when engine is cold.
Page 6113
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 3249
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6455
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 605
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13324
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 10120
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1821
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3767
- Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
4. Remove engine cooling fan (Motor driven type). 5. Disconnect engine harnesses and remove
harness brackets from front timing chain case. 6. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve, if necessary. 7. Remove drive belt. 8. Remove power steering oil pump from
bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9. Remove power steering oil pump
bracket.
10. Remove generator. 11. Remove water bypass hoses and water hose clamp. 12. Remove
engine cooling fan (Crankshaft driven type) and fan bracket. 13. Remove water hose at oil cooler.
14. Remove oil cooler water bypass pipe from front timing chain case.
15. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers.
- Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing,
keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected.
16. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 17. Remove A/C
compressor bolts and temporarily secure A/C compressor aside. 18. Remove crankshaft pulley as
follows:
a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-48761)
Page 5447
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8741
Fuel Injector: Service and Repair
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: ^
Put a "CAUTION INFLAMMABLE" sign in the workshop.
^ Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a C02 fire extinguisher.
^ Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work
area.
^ To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine coolant when engine is hot.
1. Remove intake manifold collector.
CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold.
2. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side.
^ Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number: (J-45488)
Page 5167
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 6879
Case 1
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 10940
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 9572
8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2
-> 3). Then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly
and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation".
Page 4527
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 3205
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Speed: Below 95 km/h (60 MPH) Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles)
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
- Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
- Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
- Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
- Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing
or recovery.
CAN System (Type 1)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11229
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9629
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
A/T Fluid: .............................................................................................................................................
................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J
NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
Page 14860
Front Door Window Regulator: Overhaul
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly.
Page 9279
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5328
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11026
Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 7348
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 14798
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11620
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 14766
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 537
Page 14664
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10299
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
Page 11489
Relay Box: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4091
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6945
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
BCM Circuit Inspection
Page 569
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 178
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 5256
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP
canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under
the given conditions.
CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
- Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg,
29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Page 6034
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9053
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6892
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
TCM Circuit Inspection
Page 4401
2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows:
[START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>.
Page 12572
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Page 11032
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 1352
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11353
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8226
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 3421
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 8269
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10277
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 7406
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6689
Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced
1. Put a check mark to "No indication" if some of unit names listed on the column of diagnosis
system selection screen of a check sheet table are not
displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen attached to the check sheet.
NOTE: Put a check mark to "No indication" of BCM because BCM is not displayed on "SELECT
SYSTEM" screen.
Page 14872
condition.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of
cracks in the glass.
^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches)
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start
point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons.
^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a
contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it.
Page 797
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1169
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector.
Page 373
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 7862
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 8922
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13661
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1219
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is
depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
Page 6568
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 9284
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9541
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 157
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9723
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11940
Lot Number Locations.
Page 2202
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2924
2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8024
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10111
Page 5095
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13097
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7935
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4844
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4765
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8535
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 4480
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 10955
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12388
Page 8142
EC-TPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 6890
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4)
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 434
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4258
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 3723
^ Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with
the copper color link on timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on crankshaft sprocket is
aligned with the gold one on timing chain, as shown.
^ When it is difficult to align mating marks of timing chain (primary) with each sprocket, gradually
turn camshaft using wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks.
^ During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of timing chains
(secondary).
8. Install internal chain guide, slack guide and timing chain tensioner (primary).
CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats
when bolts are tightened to specification.
^ When installing timing chain tensioner (primary), push in plunger and keep it pressed in with
stopper pin.
^ Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of
timing chain tensioner (primary).
^ After installation, pull out stopper pin by pressing slack guide.
9. Make sure again that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets and timing chain have not slipped
out of alignment.
10. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. 11. Install new front oil seal on front timing chain
case.
^ Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip.
Page 2230
11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4.
12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor.
13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order.
^ Reuse the original cover.
^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor.
^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb).
14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the
codes:
^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function,
SELF-DIAG [PAST].
15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows:
a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure
5).
b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF.
c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the
Service Manual for diagnosis and repair.
^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this
bulletin.
16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector.
Page 14375
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Diagram Information and Instructions
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3621
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3764
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to intake valve timing control covers as
shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being
careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain
case with the holes to install intake
valve timing control covers.
e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
7. Install crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal.
^ When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not
circumference).
b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
Crankshaft bolt torque: 44.1 Nm (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft. lbs.)
c. Put a paint mark on crankshaft pulley aligning with angle mark on crankshaft pulley bolt. Then,
further retighten bolt by 60° degrees
(equivalent to one graduation).
8. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly 9. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after
this step.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Page 1666
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 7982
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Locations
Cruise Control Switch: Locations
Page 13023
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 926
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 9335
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 8785
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.
Page 4257
ITEMS OF EACH PART
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 380
Page 13112
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 11369
Page 11598
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1318
Page 10854
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 10328
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 266
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7365
Disclaimer
Page 2179
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6515
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 1021
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11161
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12252
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 5831
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 6727
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6)
Page 10281
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5679
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12838
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Connect C-III to the vehicle.
3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs.
a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode.
b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function.
^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform
repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure.
^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this
bulletin.
NOTE:
All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with
this procedure.
4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3012
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 8677
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate
by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of
the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air
flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the
hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 4074
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14619
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 392
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 9084
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 5339
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5188
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 6457
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 4785
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9559
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
REAR OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove dust seal and rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: ^
Do not damage rear extension assembly.
^ Do not reuse dust seal and rear oil seal.
INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal.
^ Drive the new dust seal and rear oil seal using suitable tool. Dimension A: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 0.059 inch) Dimension B: 1.2 - 2.2 mm (0.047 - 0.087 inch)
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse dust seal and rear oil seal.
^ Apply multi-purpose grease to seal lips before installing.
^ Do not incline the dust seal and rear oil seal during installation.
^ Check the transmission oil level after installation. Refer to "Checking".
Page 6126
Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Wiring Diagram
Page 4209
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 13489
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14871
^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less
than 1 mm in diameter.
NOTE:
A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low
stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the
crack "branches out".
Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass
This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass.
^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty.
2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface.
Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface
Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone,
and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on
the same scale).
Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily
scratched by:
^ Fine sand particles
^ Hard metal
^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the
glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry
Page 7286
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 5081
Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor
2.
CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine
and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1
minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Page 6562
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition
switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5
seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
Page 5623
Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9088
EC-TPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS3
Page 10707
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284
Classification: EC04-025
Reference: NTB04-126
Date: October 29, 2004
MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR
FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor)
^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor)
ACTIONS:
1. Repair the vehicle as necessary.
^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information.
2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning.
IMPORTANT:
If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared:
^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists.
^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair).
CLAIMS INFORMATION
The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a
separate repair item.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284).
^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle.
^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information.
Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint
Classification: WT04-010
Reference: NTB05-003
Date: January 12, 2005
NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire
dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers)
to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire
dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven.
Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan
warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires.
If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that
the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty
does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied,
consider the following:
1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in
the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings.
2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires
grooves/treads.
3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess
tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely.
Disclaimer
Page 6050
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3629
Page EM-2
Page 5895
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 5950
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration".
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER
INSTRUMENT PANEL LH".
3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration".
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System - NATS)
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 342
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 812
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2976
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing and deterioration.
1. Run the engine until the fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in the reservoir
tank. Keep engine speed idle.
CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank
frequently and add fluid as needed.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the right and left several times. 3. Hold the steering wheel at each
locked position for five seconds to check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is
the possibility that the oil pump may be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at a connection is noticed, loosen the connection and then retighten. Do not
over-tighten connector as this can damage O-ring,
washer and connector. Refer to "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" and "HYDRAULIC LINE".
5. If fluid leakage from the oil pump is noticed, check the oil pump. Refer to "POWER STEERING
OIL PUMP". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid, indicating a leak from the
steering gear.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers.
Page 3820
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 538
Page 2630
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Page 12573
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 1259
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC
Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS
Wheel bearing axial end play...............................................................................................................
................................................................ 0 mm (0 in)
Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft.
lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39
(3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29)
Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 45° - 60°
Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg,
lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4)
With used grease seal N (kg,
lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3)
Disassembly and Assembly
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly.
Page 14698
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4798
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 480
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1956
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4743
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12276
9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from
steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components for tightening torques".
CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin.
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation".
^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment".
Inspection After Removal
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection".
Page 6343
Page 2323
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 8364
12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown.
Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP).
13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the
EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve.
Page 968
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14784
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3532
Engine Oil: Application and ID
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil
may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F).
^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy.
Specifications
Page 1571
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Service and Repair
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 8233
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
IVT CONTROL
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of
the intake valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and
engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the
shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in
high-speed range.
IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the
ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through
intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
Page 14452
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6947
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
Page 10387
Page 8979
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13863
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 566
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 14704
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 9795
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7468
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4620
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4
Page 1454
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1092
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Page 10630
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and cylinder body from torque
member.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: REfill with new brake fluid. Refer to Fluids and Lubricants.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts and torque member to caliper, if removed. Refer to
Components.
3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to Components.
CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wiper any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder
body attachment surfaces.
- Do not reuse cylinder body torque member bolts.
4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, If removed, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to Components.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt.
- Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers.
5. REfill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. 6Installtall wheel and tire.
Refer to Rotation.
Disassembly and Assembly
Page 12245
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance)
Page 14782
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Environmental Impact Information
Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed
waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for
advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The
regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Page 7295
Page 1920
Page 3264
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5318
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 4556
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Page 1750
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7049
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5533
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11088
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9288
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14048
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1246
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1198
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Cruise Control Switch: Locations
Page 4565
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Locations
Fuse Block: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3945
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve
lifters at the locations that are out of the standard.
4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation
below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 =
Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F)
^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Intake
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter".
ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC
C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163
Classification: EC08-003A
Reference: NTB08-027A
Date: August 26, 2008
2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144,
C1156, C1163
This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS
control unit:
C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM
CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE)
ACTIONS
Refer to the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its
replacement.
Page 4717
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5117
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8222
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change
.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
3/8 qt. (4 1/2 Imp qts., 5.1 L) Without oil filter change
...................................................................................................................................................... 5
1/8 qt. (4 1/4 Imp qts., 4.8 L)
Page 5040
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Service and Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage
REMOVAL
1. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2.
Remove the cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". 3. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
4. Remove wiper frame assembly mounting bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 5. Remove
wiper motor to linkage nut and washer from wiper motor pivot. 6. Remove wiper motor from wiper
frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
- Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn
the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install link to wiper motor
pivot with nut and washer. 4. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into
the vehicle. 5. Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper
motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 6. Install cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP".
Page 14146
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7091
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11608
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 5038
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7426
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 7585
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Page 1367
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10938
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4547
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 3746
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 11511
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9574
7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2
harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect
the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to
"Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)".
Page 7065
EC-O2S2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 5461
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 11184
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13906
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9099
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13583
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14803
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7304
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 7782
Page 12020
Page 10515
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Front Brakes
1. Replace the front brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit.
^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit).
^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service
information.
IMPORTANT:
Page 6806
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection
Page 10021
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13572
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 4572
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7363
Page 6720
Case 7
Case 8
Page 5973
Page 7722
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a
particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low
parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 6607
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1818
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7892
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 13115
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 8149
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 9603
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 11250
Page 2146
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9543
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 972
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 4438
Page 6305
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 6340
Page 1948
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5912
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 4947
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14356
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. 3. If
NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 2 again.
Page 5621
Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 14472
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
Trailer Tow Schematic
LT-T/TOW
Page 184
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10117
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Intake
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data)
....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416
mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch)
Exhaust
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data)
................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432
mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Available Valve Lifter
Page 9735
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7169
Page 687
Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the
combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with
power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness
connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the
following procedure.
8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug
and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and
check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Page 8889
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5427
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10673
Parking Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lining Thickness Inspection
^ Check thickness of lining. Standard thickness "A": 5.15 ± 0.25 mm (0.203 ± 0.010 inch) Repair
limit thickness "A": 0.5 mm (0.020 inch)
Drum Inner Diameter Inspection
^ Check drum inner diameter. Standard inner diameter: 205 ± 0.13 mm (8.07 ± 0.01 inch)
Maximum inner diameter: 205.7 mm (8.10 inch)
Other Inspections ^
Check shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage.
^ Check anti-rattle pin for excessive wear and corrosion.
^ Check return spring for sagging.
^ Check adjuster for rough operation.
^ When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the
adjuster threads. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or
damage inside drum.
Page 3644
Page EM-17
Page 14771
Page 334
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 1766
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Page 11218
Relay Box: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8403
Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the
canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil
in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the
on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is
closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized
and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis.
Page 4955
Page 5538
Page 5199
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12028
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7315
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 3390
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed.
2. Remove air duct.
3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not move it clockwise.
4. Remove drive belt.
Page 4243
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3262
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 4543
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 2982
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of
A/C lubricant leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of
refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional
leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component.
CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected
leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles
(J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows
preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain
opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean
shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth
with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to
prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak
repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
NOTE:
- Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze,
windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure
the surfaces to be checked are clean.
- Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
- Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any
substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has
seized and must be replaced.
1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52
kg/sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye
injector (J-41459).
CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a)
fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with
the service procedures.
3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the
engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running),
inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye
(J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC- 134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye
injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector
(J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20
minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C
system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take
from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an
A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE:
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or
equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set
properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Page 12031
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 5270
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5544
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Diagram Information and Instructions
Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12985
LT-T/TOW-03
Page 7988
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6659
LAN-CAN-35
Page 32
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 6119
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10333
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4069
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2097
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Diagram Information and Instructions
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)
- PNP switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles
equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not be illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE
1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without
CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
Page 661
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7
Page 5142
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2104
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 2060
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9264
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8818
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8907
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5791
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14697
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3994
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 14281
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Steps 1 - 3)
Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 4)
A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Cowl Weatherstrip: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Classification: HA10-003
Reference: NTB10-055
Date: April 20, 2010
PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before
5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010
Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831
APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate.
AND
There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor.
ACTION:
Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin.
^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE.
Replace the blower motor.
^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM), if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13719
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11)
Page 10123
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6766
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 8042
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2012
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10438
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and
Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE".
^ Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System".
Page 1802
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2913
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Oil Leakage and Oil Level
Checking
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL
Page 3954
2. Install water pump.
CAUTION: Do not allow timing chain case to nip O-rings when install water pump.
^ Make sure that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.
^ Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
3. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
a. Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of timing chain tensioner (primary)
and from installation area of rear timing chain
case.
b. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side
is loose. c. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) with its stopper pin attached.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case.
d. Remove stopper pin. e. Make sure again that timing chain and water pump sprocket are
engaged.
4. Install chain tensioner cover and water pump cover as follows:
a. Before installing, remove all traces of old liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover
and chain tensioner cover using scraper. Also
remove traces of old liquid gasket from the mating surface of front timing chain case.
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Service and Repair
Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
High-Mounted Stop Lamp
BULB REPLACEMENT
The high-mounted stop lamp bulbs are not serviceable.
Page 5811
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 659
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 4001
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Service and Repair
Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
CARGO/PERSONAL LAMP
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove
the cargo/personal lamp lens.
3. Release the cargo/personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove.
Cargo/personal lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W
Page 10884
Page 1502
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Classification: BT09-052
Reference: NTB09-091
Date: August 25, 2009
WINDSHIELD CRACKING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield
breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America
(NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the
glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks
that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically
does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles.
Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas:
1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass.
2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface.
3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Part Return Process Reminder
Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to
assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other
components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to
highlight the area damaged.
1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass.
Cracks from objects striking the glass
Page 13738
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12008
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6713
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
Page 1561
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
LAN System Component Parts
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Testing and Inspection
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes
a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger
is placed over valve inlet.
Page 1701
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14062
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7125
^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector.
NOTE:
For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in
Procedure B.
Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF.
3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2).
^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further
instructions.
^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for
further instructions.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Procedure B
PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections:
^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles.
^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles.
CAUTION:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure.
Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one
Page 6365
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 399
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 1322
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 3269
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt
it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the
coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed.
Page 625
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 4699
EC-APPS3-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 6535
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 14815
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 4440
Page 6102
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3298
to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for
fuel leakage at connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
^ Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in
the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
^ Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any
oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant.
^ Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
^ After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to the specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 8617
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9178
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 238
Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Page 7689
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6861
Case 5
Page 12383
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
ASCD Brake Switch
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD Brake Switch
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 13617
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 3952
a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper. (1) b. Insert plunger
into tensioner body by pressing slack guide. (2) c. Keep slack guide pressed and hold plunger in by
pushing stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove. (3)
d. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side
is loose.
e. Remove bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary).
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case.
7. Remove water pump as follows:
a. Remove three water pump bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by
turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until
timing chain looseness on water pump sprocket becomes maximum.
Page 10414
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 255
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8347
Page 10996
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9453
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13006
Trip Computer: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9933
3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
FILLING
1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug
hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and
Lubricants".
2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive
assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS". ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 1016
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7745
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 439
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 7250
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14148
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14027
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 7889
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 11028
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 6529
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2
Page 14606
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 2136
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Canister Vent Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446
Classification: EC07-006
Reference: NTB07-058
Date: September 6, 2007
2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored:
^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin).
3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains
information that is essential to successfully completing this repair.
Page 4216
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10130
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 12647
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air
bag connectors.
4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure
2.
^ The seat does not need to be removed.
^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit.
CAUTION:
Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes.
Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that
are under the seat.
Page 2276
Page 789
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9586
Page 7758
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6230
Disclaimer
Removal and Installation
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: ^
Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent.
^ When installing, do not get grease from the main drive shaft onto the clutch disc friction surface.
^ If the flywheel is removed, align the dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to
"ASSEMBLY".
REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)".
2. Remove the clutch cover bolts using power tool. Remove the clutch cover and clutch disc.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and main drive shaft spline.
CAUTION: Do not allow grease to contaminate the clutch facing.
2. Install clutch disc and clutch cover. Pre-tighten the bolts and install Tool. Then tighten the clutch
cover bolts evenly in two steps in the order
Page 1835
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 2044
Page 12981
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 24
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4714
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8552
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition
switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5
seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
Page 3291
7. Remove timing chain tensioner (secondary) from cylinder head. Remove timing chain tensioner
(secondary) with its stopper pin attached.
NOTE: Stopper pin was attached when timing chain (secondary) was removed.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout
1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft.
CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a
different diameter from the other three locations.
2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and
measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Standard: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch)
4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Height
1. Measure the camshaft cam height with micrometer.
Standard: Intake: 45.465 - 45.655 mm (1.7900 - 1.7974 inch) Exhaust: 45.075 - 45.265 mm
(1.7746 - 1.7821 inch) Limit: Intake: 45.265 mm (1.7821 inch) Exhaust: 44.875 mm (1.7667 inch)
2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
Page 5465
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 8799
e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver.
f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the
pocket screwdriver was inserted.
9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 13833
Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 1
Page 2185
Page 2059
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 5880
7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14).
8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and
replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10.
^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15).
^ Install the new BCM.
Page 10415
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 2067
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6704
Case 9
Case 10
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 1)
Page 4940
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9688
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness
connector.
Page 13224
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 5071
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-AF1B1
EC-AF1B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1B2
Page 14759
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4778
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 543
Page 1507
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Service Precautions
Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be
excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions.
- Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
- When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only
when necessary.
- Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing
damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material
off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst.
Page 12335
Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
- Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit.
- Apply 12 volts to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 and verify that the motor operates freely and
quietly.
Page 7712
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 1929
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11380
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14267
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7843
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 6828
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 3851
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so
that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
NOTE:
- Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD".
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as
shown in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to
zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
Page 4291
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4081
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6706
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 13754
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 3587
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove intake
manifold collector. 3. Remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly.
4. Loosen nuts and bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown to remove intake manifold. 5.
Remove gaskets.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
^ Check the surface distortion of the intake manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler
gauge. Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 inch)
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace intake manifold.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Page 7163
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 10465
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released.
6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 9352
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-PHSB1
EC-PHSB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-PHSB2
Page 6815
Case 1
Page 14028
Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations
Page 13768
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on the reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures
of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: ^
Do not overfill.
^ Do not reuse any power steering fluid.
^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS
AND LUBRICANTS".
Page 5934
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
Page 427
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 6533
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6
Page 10840
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7108
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways
Seat Back Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways
Classification: BT05-050
Reference: NTB05-092
Date: October 7, 2005
RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE
MOVEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual
seats WI Fold Flat Feature)
APPLIED VINS:
Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada:
vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123
IF YOU CONFIRM
An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven
^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above
^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above
ACTION
^ Remove the seat from the vehicle.
^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by
adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2619
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 10993
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3244
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8386
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7554
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 6163
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10590
NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and cylinder body from torque
member.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: REfill with new brake fluid. Refer to Fluids and Lubricants.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts and torque member to caliper, if removed. Refer to
Components. 3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten torque member bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to Components.
CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wiper any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder
body attachment surfaces.
- Do not reuse cylinder body torque member bolts.
4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, If removed, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque.
Refer to Components.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt.
- Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers.
5. REfill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. 6. Install wheel and tire.
Refer to Rotation.
Page 1000
Page 1736
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
PG-POWER-09
Page 12505
Refrigerant: Service and Repair HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes,
nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified
service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or
SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs,
ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
Page 1708
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9171
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13805
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 7490
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 6597
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 4446
Page 10786
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 2274
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2343
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 663
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 11812
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5488
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 2001
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10189
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8267
Page 13193
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 11347
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6976
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9742
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12450
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C
evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
Page 10965
Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation
PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is
ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a
bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
Page 4466
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 10959
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 1879
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 218
4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim
(see Figure 11).
5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing
Clips (see Figure 12).
6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure
13).
^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips.
^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover.
Page 1913
Page 1759
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Removal and Installation
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the steering column is separated
from the steering gear assembly. Therefore secure the steering wheel to avoid turning.
REMOVAL 1. Set front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the front tires from the
vehicle, using power tool. 3. Remove the engine undercover, using power tool. 4. On 4WD models,
remove the front final drive, then support the drive shafts, using suitable wire. 5. Remove the
stabilizer bar brackets and reposition the stabilizer bar. 6. Remove the cotter pins at the steering
outer sockets.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the cotter pins.
7. Remove the outer socket nuts.
8. Remove the steering outer sockets from the steering knuckles, using Tool.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: ^
Do not damage the ball joint boots.
^ Do not damage the ball joint threads. Thread the ball joint nut onto the end of the ball joint during
removal.
Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 13699
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 12589
Page 3836
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 13657
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Canister Vent Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5177
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2038
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13452
26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm.
7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with
narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in
Figure 5.
8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch
from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the
synchronization tube (see Figure 6).
9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube.
Page 12765
Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any
collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.
Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat
belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision
in which the air bags are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
- The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts,
retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
- The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
- The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for
damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
- Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
- The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the
collision in which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning
chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning
lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag
warning lamp. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (
AIR BAG)".
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide
swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not
bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat
belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt
does not return smoothly, wipe
the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the
belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be
an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in)
or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass
a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several
times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a
clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps
above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
Page 11220
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12013
Page 5798
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 1382
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 12212
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 6099
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2606
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13683
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Service and Repair
Access Cover: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove bolts using power tool.
2. Lift up on engine room cover firmly to dislodge snap fit mounts.
CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch cover when installing or removing.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1007
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 13013
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 10408
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1742
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7978
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 4308
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 1633
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6199
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1486
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 4687
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8991
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14387
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 9121
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5840
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8845
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High
Classification: EC05-009
Reference: NTB05-067
Date: October 5, 2005
PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models
IF YOU CONFIRM
The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or
DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored,
NOTE:
^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle
"in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or
replacement).
^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first.
^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification,
continue with this bulletin.
ACTIONS
To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes:
1. Check engine for vacuum leaks.
2. Perform IAVL procedure.
3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform
reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step.
4. Reduce idle speed manually:
a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for
details),
b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4564
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Diagram Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Specifications
Page 1124
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Testing and Inspection
Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection
Front Blower Switch
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
Page 2712
Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33)
DETAILED PROCEDURE
Page 2381
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 3258
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 22
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 4677
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13014
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10911
Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch
ON.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
Page 10958
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13554
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 3266
EC-IVCB2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 3676
Page EM-17
Page 2614
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 13639
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6593
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4817
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8538
NOTE:
Make sure all DTCs are cleared
^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5.
^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes:
a. Disconnect another injector.
b. Repeat step B above,
NOTE:
^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time.
^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3
disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank.
5. Final IAVL procedure.
A. Make sure all injectors are connected.
B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn.
C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it.
D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2).
Disclaimer
Page 5286
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Locations
Fuse Block: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11349
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11093
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Intake
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data)
....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416
mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch)
Exhaust
Cold .....................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data)
................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432
mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Available Valve Lifter
Page 9932
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil.
Page 1961
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 7727
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2944
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Tighten the bolt no more than necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the
crankshaft.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 6331
Page 7951
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13741
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6152
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14333
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7069
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the
monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.
CAUTION:
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
- Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000
rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes
between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above
0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting
from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd
gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
Page 6377
Disclaimer
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
Page 5473
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14653
Page 575
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 1453
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Component Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3507
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on
an AWD vehicle.
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner
plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE:
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
Service and Repair
Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and
Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)".
2. Remove the release bearing sleeve assembly, holder spring, and withdrawal lever from inside
the clutch housing. 3. Remove the dust cover. 4. Remove the snap spring from the withdrawal
lever.
5. Remove the release bearing from release bearing sleeve using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor
aligning function.
^ Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally.
^ Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked.
INSTALLATION
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Page 11991
Page 6614
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
CAN System (Engine Controls)
EC-CAN-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Testing and Inspection
Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Check Valve
- A check valve is provided in the washer tube fluid line. Be careful not to connect check valve to
washer tube in the wrong direction.
Page 6475
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11681
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12295
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Air Mix Door Motor (Front)
Air Mix Door Motor (Front) Circuit
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Air mix door motor (front)
- PBR (built into air mix door motor)
- Intake sensor
System Operation
The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver. The front air control
then applies a voltage to one circuit of the air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other
circuit, causing the air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which
circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control
monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each
door.
Air Mix Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Page 3023
Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement
Page 6192
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7285
Page 13553
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 11125
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14699
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 10783
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 7057
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6166
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2372
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11083
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 12329
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the cowl top.
^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed.
2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable
cleaner. See Figure 1.
Page 2108
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 777
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11375
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 361
Page 7925
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 9656
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6410
Page 7594
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 3776
1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket
(EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8.
Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft
sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other
sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt
threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft
pulley.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or
install the timing chain(s).
REMOVAL
Page 10886
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7416
Page 9647
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6430
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 7096
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5710
EC-APPS2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS3
Page 9225
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4583
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 6681
System Diagram
System diagram
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 10341
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 1269
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 3582
Intake Manifold: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Page 3248
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 6784
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 2 - 3)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 262
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1984
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1324
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 5407
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7064
EC-O2S2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B2
Page 2114
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10953
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3855
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 13124
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to INFORMATION BUS".
Page 585
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 10572
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 3903
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Page 6335
Page 7410
Page 1243
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8085
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11839
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 9476
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7615
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7053
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8980
Page 6142
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7239
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4273
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 8427
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6297
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 5696
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 11392
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 10280
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Drive Belt Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up
Classification: EM06-004B
Reference: NTB06-072B
Date: September 3, 2009
DRIVE BELT NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION,
and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier
(D40)
APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built
before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the
morning especially in cold or damp conditions.
OR
A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended
period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1)
hour.
AND
In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt.
ACTION:
^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed.
^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of
this bulletin, if needed.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5321
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Testing and Inspection
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 7552
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 461
Page 10450
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor,
first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor".
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION ^
Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting
hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
Removal and Installation
FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number 205-D002
Installation
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9034
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 3506
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and
will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged
$29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight.
Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 8014
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions.
Page 321
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 600
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 12412
Control Assembly: Description and Operation Control Operation
Control Operation
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
RECIRCULATION () SWITCH
- When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
- When REC switch is turned OFF, air inlet is set to fresh. REC mode can be re-entered by
pressing REC switch again.
- REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position or at the floor
position.
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside
air position and compressor is enabled.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
When switch is ON, rear window is defogged.
OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0)
The compressor and blower are OFF.
A/C SWITCH
The compressor is ON or OFF.
MODE DIAL
Controls the air discharge outlets.
BLOWER CONTROL DIAL
Manually controls the four blower speeds and turns blower off and on.
Page 9583
Page 6809
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Locations
Battery Current Sensor: Locations
Page 12405
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 5888
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 9160
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 5834
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7038
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11680
Page 7041
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11836
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6401
Page 13879
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1438
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 13823
Audible Warning Device: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
Page 8537
B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year
of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1).
C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that
your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower,
center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using
the latest (newer) data update, then go to D.
^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your
vehicle, go to step 4.
D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2)
^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done.
^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4.
4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows:
A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come
ON).
CAUTION:
Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step.
Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts.
B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2).
Page 1207
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 13599
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5112
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 14196
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1360
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12606
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 4463
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 4010
Page 5077
EC-O2S2B1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-O2S2B2
Page 4483
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 4614
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 12684
Page 6134
Page 6609
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 13443
11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel
or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9.
12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative
cable last), and reset the radio stations.
Disclaimer
Page 12036
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6523
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 2814
5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3.
^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail.
6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown.
7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows:
Page 9112
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9664
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 14269
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 261
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2157
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 4111
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: ^
When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belts.
^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
^ After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using tool.
REMOVAL 1. Remove undercover with power tool. 2. Remove drive belts. 3. Drain engine coolant.
Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT".
CAUTION: ^
Perform this step when engine is cold.
^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
4. Remove radiator hoses (upper and lower) and cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE
COOLING FAN".
5. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover from front timing chain case, using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
6. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
Page 8054
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 1985
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5728
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6901
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 8088
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9290
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 641
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8
Page 11738
Page 12963
Page 8881
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 10108
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 2373
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 477
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 12519
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations
Page 11200
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4384
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 4679
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7901
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 11514
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 6007
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 6876
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 8 - 10)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 14858
INSTALLATION
1. Install the regulator assembly.
a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window
motor or crank assembly to install the assembly
in the door.
b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom
rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f.
Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt.
g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank
assembly bolt.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly.
3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
bolts.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset
the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7.
Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR".
Page 8179
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11398
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 8139
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6005
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6159
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 53
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 984
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3165
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 3824
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1539
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9314
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 8073
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 14392
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Seat Cushion Trim and Pad
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Trim and Pad
SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD
CAUTION:
- Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control
module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will
affect the Occupant Classification System calibration.
- Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly.
- When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent
damage.
- During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in.
Do not add additional clips.
- The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat
cushion assembly.
1. Remove the recline release lever. 2. Remove four bolts and the seat cushion assembly.
- On the fold flat passenger seat it is necessary to unclip the rear flap j-clip from the seat pan.
3. On the drivers seat only, after removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to
separate the trim cover from the pad.
Page 5410
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8709
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12010
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14349
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft main journals with micrometer. Standard: 69.951 69.975 mm (2.7540 - 2.7549 inch) dia.
^ If out of the standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing.
Refer to "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE".
CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
^ Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft pin journal with micrometer. Standard: 53.956 - 53.974
mm (2.1242 - 2.1250 inch) dia.
^ If out of the standard, measure the connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize
bearing. Refer to "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE".
CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER
^ Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown in the figure on each main journal and
pin journal with micrometer.
^ Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in the dimensions between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B".
^ Taper is indicated by the difference in the dimensions between "A" and "B" at "X" and "Y". Limit:
Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch) Taper (Difference between
"A" and "B"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch)
^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, correct or replace crankshaft.
^ If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected main journal and/or pin journal.
Then select the main bearing and/or connecting rod bearing. Refer to "MAIN BEARING OIL
CLEARANCE" and/or "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE".
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
^ Place V-block on precise flat table, and support the journals on the both end of crankshaft.
^ Place dial indicator straight up on the No. 3 journal.
^ While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on dial indicator. (Total indicator
reading) Standard: Less than 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) Limit: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch)
^ If it exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft.
Page 7467
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 7531
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9
Page 14337
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8829
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 7491
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6877
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 7442
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 5007
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14518
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 5299
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-APPS1
EC-APPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-APPS2
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4872
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 14492
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7625
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Description and Operation
Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power
transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the
proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
Page 6097
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5151
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 914
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8389
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 10101
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2594
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 5006
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10260
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8846
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 7129
10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9).
^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness.
11. Re-connect the negative battery cable.
12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable
pedal assembly.
NOTE:
It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the
pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver).
13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness.
c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn
indicator light flashes.
d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right
turn indicator light flashes.
e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on.
^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step.
^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM,
then go to the next step.
14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal.
15. Re-program all radio station presets.
16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the
new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings.
^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual.
^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan
Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b.
^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual.
^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable
service manual.
Page 1652
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8034
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9355
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 1833
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 11334
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14706
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 6477
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8621
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 1692
Page 6693
NOTE: There is a case that some of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" and "SELF-DIAG RESULTS"
are not needed for diagnosis. In the case, "UNKWN" and "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" in
"Check sheet results (example)" change to "-". Then, ignore check marks on the check sheet table.
2. For the selected possible causes, it is expected that malfunctions have been found in the past.
Page 12022
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 2201
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 10100
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1509
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 12468
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible A/C Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right
mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to
"HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
5. Remove the low-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure
Flexible A/C Hose".
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor
oil to it for installation.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 3562
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL (LOWER)
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine oil when engine is hot.
1. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". 2. Remove oil pan (lower) as follows:
a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown to remove.
Page 6993
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 2985
16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no
refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to
"Operational Check".
Page 13641
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6619
CAN System (Type 7) Schematic
Page 7213
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch
"CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General
Information.
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 13737
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3295
^ Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are
present on new camshafts for proper placement and direction.
^ Install camshaft so that dowel pin hole and dowel pin on front end face are positioned as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder TDC on its compression stroke)
NOTE: ^
Large and small pin holes are located on front end face of camshaft (INT), at intervals of 180°.
Face small dia. side pin hole upward (in cylinder head upper face direction).
^ Though camshaft does not stop at the portion as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is
generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction as shown.
4. Install camshaft brackets.
^ Remove foreign material completely from camshaft bracket backside and from cylinder head
installation face.
^ Install camshaft bracket in original position and direction as shown.
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4)
Preliminary Inspection
Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear
suspension parts before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. Unladen
conditions means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. Refer to "Inspection". 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to "WHEEL
BEARING INSPECTION". 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each
mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check
each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height.
Refer to "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)".
Page 7272
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector.
3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1680
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 1335
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Interior Room Lamp
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 967
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4357
Page 12033
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Page 8470
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6904
Case 2
Page 12792
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 14163
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 13853
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 3035
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10409
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 7106
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 4901
Page 14341
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 2682
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased.
1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make
sure to check:
^ Hoses
^ Intake Manifold
^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS
2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows.
NOTE:
The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start.
A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased).
B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions:
Page 14510
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 12322
b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5).
6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6).
7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7).
8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7).
^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip.
Page 9869
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment
1. Check to see if the clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound
by the clevis or clutch pedal.
a. If the clevis pin is not free, check that the ASCD clutch switch is not applying pressure to the
clutch pedal causing the clevis pin to bind. To
adjust, loosen lock nut and turn ASCD clutch switch.
b. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. c. Verify that the clevis pin floats in the bore of the
clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clutch pedal. d. If the clevis pin is still not free, remove
the clevis pin and check for deformation or damage. Replace clevis pin if necessary. Leave pin
removed for step 2.
2. Check clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement.
a. With the clevis pin removed, manually move the clutch pedal up and down to determine if it
moves freely. b. If any sticking is noted, replace the assembly.
Page 13086
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 5905
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14825
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 8425
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4839
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 2544
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged
Roof Rack Frame: Customer Interest Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged
Classification: BT06-026A
Reference: NTB06-093A
Date: January 5, 2010
2005 - 2010 XTERRA AND FRONTIER; ROOF RACK DECAL DAMAGE
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and the Parts Information have been
updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard the earlier version of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The "NISSAN", "FRONTIER", or "XTERRA" roof rack decal(s) need to be replaced for any reason.
ACTIONS
1. Use a heat gun to carefully remove the damaged decal.
2. Clean the side rail or air dam surface.
3. Apply a new decal listed in the Parts Information.
NOTE:
Do not replace the roof rack, rails, or air dam for damaged decals.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service\ Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Page 13416
NOTE:
Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks.
3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each
corner (see Figure 1).
Page 7616
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 5166
Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
EC-TPS1
EC-TPS1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-TPS2
Page 5252
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 9505
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Service and Repair
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the
column cover upper and lower.
4. Disconnect wiper and washer switch connector. Then while pressing tabs, pull wiper and washer
switch away from spiral cable to remove.
Page 13450
NOTE:
Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks.
3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each
corner (see Figure 1).
Page 14265
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 1255
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 14075
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 7849
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 6485
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8005
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 14582
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4690
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1363
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8503
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 564
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 7919
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 6077
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6287
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 9715
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 1982
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 9902
3. Connect the brake tube and parking brake cable to the carrier cover and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to PB-4, "Components". See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair
4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Refer to
"Checking Differential Gear Oil".
Page 6790
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6)
Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 4740
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 11304
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14776
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Page 6952
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 12 - 14)
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Page 6702
Case 6
Page 13573
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14064
Page 1614
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 11881
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5181
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1237
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7628
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
FIRING ORDER
1-2-3-4-5-6
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Page 13018
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14670
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 9234
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7742
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1760
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 244
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 6813
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 6987
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10855
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9430
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9216
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 145
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the
appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness
Install
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922
Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install
Reference: NTB05-086
Date: September 22 2005
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN
BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005
Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab:
1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab:
1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada:
5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab:
1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra:
5N1*N08**5C600000-621507
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction.
We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's
purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently
introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or
fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the
trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this
production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will
have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN
The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each
vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory.
Page 4304
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 14877
adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time
will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the
urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done
by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply
primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Page 11044
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
Page 13222
3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until
the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle
and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the
glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped,
disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly.
9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
Removal and Replacement
Front Door Window Regulator: Removal and Replacement
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Front Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power
window switch.
3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the
outside of the door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
- Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION".
- On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position.
Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm
(0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Front Door Glass Regulator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect
the power window switch.
Page 1704
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1359
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 12127
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 3230
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 1334
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways
Seat Back Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves
Sideways
Classification: BT05-050
Reference: NTB05-092
Date: October 7, 2005
RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE
MOVEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual
seats WI Fold Flat Feature)
APPLIED VINS:
Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada:
vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123
IF YOU CONFIRM
An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven
^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above
^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above
ACTION
^ Remove the seat from the vehicle.
^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by
adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 581
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 14691
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 140
Page 7170
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 6472
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 6480
Page 6870
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection
Page 9086
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7209
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 322
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5903
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2319
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 10772
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 467
Page 11694
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 11590
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 909
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6964
Part 2
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 284
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2
Page 7809
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness
connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Page 4738
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5302
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 8700
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5325
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2002
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 40
6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5).
NOTE:
Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal.
7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a
squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close
attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6).
8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of
the decal (see Figure 7).
Page 865
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14730
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10846
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 6988
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Tighten oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts ........................................................
.......................................................................................................... 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch
lbs.)
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Specifications
Page 7731
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 1882
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In
any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence
of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Page 13084
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 282
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 10942
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking
type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS
CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 112
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 5911
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 8383
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13028
Trip Computer: Description and Operation
BOARD COMPUTER
System Description
FUNCTION
The board computer can indicate the following items.
- DTE (distance to empty)
- Trip distance
- Trip time
- Average fuel consumption
- Average vehicle speed
DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION
The range indication provides the driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is calculated by signals from the fuel level sensor unit (fuel remaining),
ECM (fuel consumption) and the ABS actuator and electric unit (vehicle speed). The indication will
be refreshed every 30 seconds. When fuel remaining is less than approximately 11.6 (3 1/8 US gal,
2 1/2 Imp gal), the indication will blink as a warning. If the fuel remaining is less than approximately
9.6 (2 1/2 US gal, 2 1/8 Imp gal), the indication will show "---". In this case, the display will change
to the DTE mode even though the display is showing a different mode. When the battery is
disconnected and reconnected, DTE mode will display "---" until the vehicle is driven 0.3 miles (0.5
km).
TRIP DISTANCE
Trip distance is calculated by signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (vehicle speed). If trip
distance is reset, trip time will be reset at the same time.
TRIP TIME
Trip time displays cumulative ignition switch ON time. If trip time is reset, trip distance will be reset
at the same time.
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
Average fuel consumption indication is calculated by signals from the ABS actuator and electric
unit (vehicle speed) and the ECM (fuel consumption). The indication will be refreshed every 30
seconds.
AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED
Average vehicle speed indication is calculated by running distance and running time. The indication
will be refreshed every 30 seconds. If average vehicle speed is reset, average fuel consumption
will be reset at the same time. After resetting, the display will show "---" for 30 seconds.
HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION
Indication can be changed in the following order by momentarily depressing the board computer
switch. Trip distance -> dte -> Average vehicle speed -> Average fuel consumption -> Trip time ->.
Holding the switch for more than 1 second will reset the indication of the currently displayed mode
(trip distance, trip time, average vehicle speed or average fuel consumption).
NOTE: After the display changes automatically, the indication can be changed to the next mode by
pushing the board computer switch.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to Information Bus.
Page 950
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12993
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 6417
Page 1385
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out
of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it
again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the
voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
Page 2436
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 4568
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration given.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9736
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 570
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 10232
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
Page 12512
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
LUBRICANT
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to
compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is
important to maintain the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
- Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
LUBRICANT
Name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGR0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the
engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
- Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower speed: Max. position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30 °C (77° to 86 °F)]
- Intake position: Recirculation ( )
- Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the given table.
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the
system.
Amount of Lubricant to be Added
Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant".
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated
Refrigerant".
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant
discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the lubricant from the "old" (removed)
compressor into graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. 6. Drain the
lubricant from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of
new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this lubricant to "new"
compressor through the
suction port opening.
Page 5839
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 10025
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115
Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks
Classification: RA09-003
Reference: NTB10-008
Date: January 15, 2010
2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic
Service Manual for identification),
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 8092
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5556
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 8213
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10937
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 13803
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 8329
Page 9579
Page 11417
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 5746
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Interior/Audio - Rear Door Speaker Grille Availability
Speaker: Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Audio - Rear Door Speaker Grille Availability
Classification: BT06-019
Reference: NTB06-068
Date: September 28, 2006
2005 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA; REAR DOOR PANEL SPEAKER GRILLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear door panel speaker grille needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
^ Replace the rear door panel speaker grille.
^ The rear door panel speaker grille is now available as a separate part. Do not replace the door
panel assembly.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
Page 7652
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 3531
Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information
Precautions for Engine Oils
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
- Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
- Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
- Do not put oily rags in pockets.
- Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
- Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be
cleaned regularly.
- First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
- Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the
skin.
- Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
- Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
- If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
- Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
- Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical
goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Page 5740
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 9526
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 12997
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
Page 11190
Page 14710
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 10894
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7219
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration".
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER
INSTRUMENT PANEL LH".
3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration".
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System - NATS)
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 7851
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 7174
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9342
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12759
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 10994
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM09-007A
Reference: NTB09-128A
Date: May 25, 2010
PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN
AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9391
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 5073
EC-AF1HB1-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
EC-AF1HB2
Page 14640
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition.
A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6640
LAN-CAN-16
Page 7130
^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the
applicable service manual.
Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure
1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check),
^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II.
^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable
service manual.
2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable.
CAUTION:
The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the
battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle
may have difficulty starting.
3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10).
^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips.
Page 1727
Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1
Page 272
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6637
LAN-CAN-13
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 13667
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 17 and 18 with pushing
each switch.
Page 2360
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5412
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14570
Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 9926
2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
Page 12493
4. Heater core and evaporator pipes grommet 5. A/C drain hose grommet 6. A/C drain hose 7.
Heater core pipe mounts 8. Heater core pipes 9. Heater and cooling unit assembly 9. Remove the
RH heater core pipes nut.
10. Disconnect the heater core hoses from the heater core. 11. Disconnect the high- and
low-pressure A/C pipes from the expansion valve. 12. Move the two front seats to the rearmost
position on the seat track. 13. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. Refer to
"INSTRUMENT PANEL" and "CENTER CONSOLE". See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair
14. Remove the two front floor ducts. 15. Remove the steering column. Refer to "STEERING
COLUMN". 16. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector
brackets, and the fuse block (SMJ) electrical connectors. Refer
to "Harness Layout".
17. Remove the covers then remove the three steering member bolts from each side to disconnect
the steering member from the vehicle body. 18. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with
it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling
unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
- Use suitable plugs on the heater core pipes to prevent coolant leakage.
19. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure A/C pipe and high-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, and
apply compressor oil to the O-ring for installation.
- After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks".
NOTE:
- Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE
COOLANT".
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant".
Page 4830
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 2497
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 6449
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 2361
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 633
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 13748
Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Adjustments
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 11372
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 7668
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5971
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7686
Optional Splice
Part 1
Testing and Inspection
Condenser: Testing and Inspection
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance............................................................................................................................................
....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F)
Page 1444
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration given.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Page 8787
c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock
ring holder as shown in Figure 8.
NOTE:
The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning
the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring.
NOTE:
^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring.
^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring.
^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while
turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise).
Page 1494
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5401
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow
Relay Sub-harness
- Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness
- Body Harness
- Body No. 2 Harness
- Room Lamp Harness
- Back Door Harness
- Back Door No. 2 Harness
- Rear Window Sub-Harness
- Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8625
installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6718
Case 5
Page 6775
Case 4
Page 7322
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 3702
3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
a. Install crankshaft sprocket.
- Make sure the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front of engine.
Page 6189
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14335
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8903
Checking Equipment
When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System
Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen.
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Page 8303
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace Vent Control Valve
1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information.
Install Filter Kit
1. Remove the spare tire.
Page 3840
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Specifications
Fuel Injector: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Injector
Resistance [at 10 - 60 °C (50 - 140 °F)]...............................................................................................
.........................................................11.1 - 14.5 Ohms
Page 7753
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short
is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose
or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded
ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a
thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information.
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Page 3254
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate
on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by
any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor
connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop
test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Page 2634
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in
the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and
resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 5455
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 10128
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Interior - Rear Cup Holder Repair Procedure
Drink Holders: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Rear Cup Holder Repair Procedure
Classification: BT09-072
Reference: NTB09-145
Date: December 15, 2009
2005 - 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; REAR CUP HOLDER REPAIR
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier
(D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear cup holder needs to be replaced for any reason,
ACTION
Replace only the rear cup holder - the rear cup holder is available as a separate part.
NOTE:
^ Do not replace the entire center console when only the cup holder will solve the incident, if one
should occur.
^ If a cup holder has been accidently snapped out of place:
1. Inspect the cup holder for damage.
2. If no damage is found, snap the cup holder back in place.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Open the rear cup holder.
2. Hold both sides of the cup holder and pull it (snap it) out of the center console.
^ If the cup holder is being replaced because it was broken, remove any pieces that may be inside
the center console.
Page 1487
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area
of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1215
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 8430
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7123
Repair Flow Chart
Page 6086
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location
Page 312
Optional Splice
Part 1
Page 8554
Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
- Battery
- Ignition system
- Engine oil and coolant levels
- Fuses
- ECM harness connector
- Vacuum hoses
- Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
- Fuel pressure
- Engine compression
- Throttle valve
- Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and
mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift
lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn
OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Page 5386
FEMALE TERMINAL
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the
intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged
contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
Page 6570
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4692
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items.
NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more
than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect
CONSULT-II access to other systems.
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Page 2285
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5736
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6604
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13700
Control Unit Circuit Test
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2293
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly
Page 1842
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 13171
3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2).
4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces
together (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B.
5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake
hole.
a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it
is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4).
CAUTION:
Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time.
Page 5054
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment
under which the owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
Page 509
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 11204
Components Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5338
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified
torque as required.
SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
Page 2035
GI-EXAMPL-02
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
Page 7966
EC-O2S2B2-01
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 5408
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively.
Observe the following instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart"
or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and
harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at
connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical
Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as
they were.
Page 7716
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The
connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to
the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For
the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
Page 6626
LAN-CAN-02
Page 4953
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows:
a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1
V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10105
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown
Page 14727
OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark
Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6862
Case 6
Page 2968
Engine Oil: Application and ID
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil
may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F).
^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy.
Page 6768
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 9 - 11)
Page 5240
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit,
either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Page 7943
- Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Page 14013
Make sure:
^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected.
^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together.
^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip.
^ Sender unit is locked in place.
^ Temp sensor is clipped in place.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit.
6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit.
^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place.
^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place.
^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly.
^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no
interference.